n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n
I
I
D
O
C
Compass Diversified Holdings (“CODI”) offers our shareholders an opportunity to own profitable
middle market businesses that hold highly defensible positions in their individual market niches.
We own controlling interests in our subsidiary businesses, which maximizes our ability to impact
their performance. Our model for creating shareholder value involves discipline in identifying and
valuing businesses and proactive engagement with the management teams of the companies we
acquire. From time to time, we will monetize our interest in those subsidiaries if we believe that doing
so will maximize value to our owners.
We deliver an extraordinarily high level of transparency in our financial reporting and governance
processes. We believe our owners deserve and should demand nothing less.
As of December 31, 2010, CODI owned and managed eight diverse subsidiaries; we believe that
these businesses will continue to produce stable and growing cash flows over the long term, enabling
us both to invest in the long-term growth of the company and to make distributions of cash to our
shareholders.
C o n t e n t s
Letter to Our Owners
Highlights
Our Companies
CODI Governance
Owner Information
Financial Review
1
4
5
10
12
13
Company Headquarters
61 Wilton Road, Second Floor
Westport, CT 06880, (203) 221-1703
Independent Auditors
Grant Thornton LLP
New York, NY
Common Stock Listing
NYSE, Ticker: CODI
Transfer Agent
BNY Mellon Shareholder Services
111 Founders Plaza, Suite 1100
East Hartford, CT 06108
Investor Relations Contact
Leon Berman, The IGB Group
(212) 477-8438, lberman@igbir.com
Annual Meeting of Shareholders
May 19, 2011, 9:00 a.m., EST
Hilton Rye Town, 699 Westchester Avenue
Rye Brook, NY 10573
Website
www.compassdiversifiedholdings.com
L e t t e r t o O u r O w n e r s
Dear Friends,
2010 was an important and successful year for CODI.
In the first and third quarters, we raised our game by purchasing two new platform subsidiaries into the
CODI fold – Liberty Safe and ERGObaby. Both of these businesses nicely met our primary CODI subsidiary
company criteria:
• ‘reason to exist’ - created by recognized brand strength, proprietary products or technology, superior
manufacturing capabilities or other sustainable advantages, and as evidenced by pricing or margin out-
performance relative to industry competitors;
• actionable opportunities to work with management to materially impact already strong operating results;
• long term industry dynamics that are positive and favor the company’s positioning within its industry; and
• valuation and terms that are attractive relative to these factors and the company’s expected level of cash
flow generation.
2010 was also a year in which our company reached out to existing and new shareholders on two occasions
to raise approximately $153 million in equity to support both the growth of our existing businesses and
the accretive acquisition of new platform or ‘add-on’ companies. We believe our growth and continued
success in accessing the capital markets is a result of the increased recognition of the success of both our
family of companies and of the CODI business model, itself.
Finally, and most importantly, having survived 2009 fairly well, we believed that going into 2010, we were
poised to grow our existing businesses based on specific initiatives taken during the downturn of 2009.
These efforts were designed to position our companies for relative market share growth within their niche
industries and increased operating productivity when business trends strengthened. Fortunately, our
family of companies met our expectations in these regards.
So, how did our companies do?
Fox Racing Shox continued to expand its presence in a variety of end markets, while enjoying a resurgence
of business in its core mountain bike market. Advanced Circuits completed the highly accretive acquisition
of Circuits Express and brought its focus on profitability to the combined entity, leading to substantial cash
flow growth. Tridien Medical (formerly Anodyne Medical) also enjoyed the impact of stronger end markets
and the strategic relationships it has developed with customers over the past several years. Fox, Advanced
Circuits and Tridien each had record years in terms of cash flow generation. Halo rebounded from its 2009
performance as a result of an improvement in its end markets, as well as its aggressive recruitment and
acquisition programs. Staffmark roared back from the severe decline of 2009 and benefited significantly
from commitments made during the downturn to continue to serve customers and geographies despite
short term profitability pressures. Among the six companies we owned for all of 2009 and 2010, only
American Furniture failed to generate significantly more cash flow in 2010 than it did in 2009. The
company made great strides in solidifying its relative share with its largest customers, but continues to
suffer from a soft furniture retailing environment.
What about the new CODI companies?
Liberty Safe is a designer, manufacturer and marketer of premium gun and home safes. It is the market
share leader and has the most widely recognized brand in the industry, selling through security, lock and
gun distributors, as well as through sporting goods stores and mass merchants. The business has a history
of stable cash flows, and we are excited about current opportunities to further enhance the company’s per-
formance through a number of operating initiatives, as well as potential expansion into new sales channels.
s
r
e
n
w
O
r
u
O
o
t
r
e
t
t
e
L
ERGObaby is a designer and marketer of premium baby carrying products. It is a leader in the industry and
has a passionate customer base attracted to the company’s commitment to attachment parenting and to
the comfort of its end users, both parent and child. The product is sold through specialty distributors and
mass merchants. The company has grown nicely over the past several years, and we are excited about the
opportunity to work with management to complete the company’s domestic and global sales footprint, as
well as to analyze and potentially pursue related product expansion opportunities.
In early 2011, we announced that our CEO, Joe Massoud, had requested and been granted a leave
of absence by our Board of Directors. Joe continues to be available to us during his leave and we are
optimistic that we will be able to grow our family of companies in the near future. We are also confident
that our existing companies are well positioned to perform and are excited about the opportunities we
see to make investments in those businesses that maximize their intrinsic value and cash flow generation
capabilities.
In summary, I would like to assure you that we and each of our subsidiary management teams are intensely
focused on profitably building our business for our owners. I would also like to take this opportunity to
thank all the people across our subsidiaries for their hard work and dedication during 2010. I hope you
share my comfort in knowing the stewards at each of our businesses possess unrivaled integrity and
competence. Thank you also to our owners for your confidence and trust. It is your company; we try
to manage it every day as we believe you would.
Very Truly Yours,
Alan B. Offenberg
Chief Executive Officer
s
t
h
g
i
l
h
g
i
H
Since CODI IPO
181.59%
CODI
106.32%
S&P 500
TOTAL RETURN TO SHAREHOLDERS
5/2006 - 12/2010
Source: FactSet
Total Returns Since IPO
181.59%
200%
150%
100%
121.39%
114.02%
50%
106.32%
110.23%
0%
0
S&P 500 Russell 2000
DJIA
NASDAQ
CODI
Advanced Circuits
American Furniture
ERGObaby
Fox Racing Shox
Halo
Liberty Safe
Staffmark
Tridien Medical
O u r C o m p a n i e s
O
E
C
,
b
u
o
c
a
Y
n
h
o
J
Headquartered in Aurora, Colorado, and founded in 1989,
Advanced Circuits is the preeminent North American
manufacturer of quick-turn, prototype and production
rigid printed circuit boards (“PCBs”). Customers include
research and development professionals at corporations and
academic institutions in the United States and Canada.
Advanced Circuits is able to meet its over 10,000 customers’
demands for responsiveness, quality and timely delivery by
shipping high quality, custom PCBs in as little as 24 hours. To
learn more about Advanced Circuits, please visit www.4pcb.com.
Headquartered in Ecru, Mississippi, and founded in 1998,
American Furniture is a leading manufacturer of upholstered
furniture targeted at the promotional segment of the industry.
American Furniture offers a broad product line of stationary
and motion furniture, including sofas, loveseats, sectionals,
recliners and accessory products. American Furniture’s mer-
chandising strategy focuses on a limited number of popular,
high volume styles and colors adapted from proven designs.
American Furniture has the ability to ship any product in its
line within 48 hours of receiving an order. To learn more about
American Furniture, please visit www.americanfurn.net.
O
E
C
,
s
a
m
o
h
T
e
k
M
i
s
e
i
n
a
p
m
o
C
r
u
O
O
E
C
,
r
e
u
r
B
m
T
i
Headquartered in Maui, Hawaii, and founded in 2003,
ERGObaby is a premier designer, marketer and distributor of
babywearing products and accessories. ERGObaby offers a
broad range of wearable baby carriers and related products
that are sold through approximately 700 retailers and web
shops in the United States and internationally in approxi-
mately 20 countries. ERGObaby’s reputation for product
innovation, reliability and safety has led to numerous awards
and accolades from several well known consumer surveys
and publications. To learn more about ERGObaby, please
visit www.ergobabycarriers.com.
Headquartered in Watsonville, California, and founded in 1974,
Fox is a well recognized designer, manufacturer and
marketer of high-end suspension products for mountain
bikes, all-terrain vehicles, snowmobiles and other off-road
vehicles. Fox both acts as a tier one supplier to leading
action sport original equipment manufacturers and provides
aftermarket products to retailers and distributors. To learn
more about Fox, please visit www.foxracingshox.com.
O
E
C
,
e
n
i
l
r
e
t
n
E
y
r
r
a
L
O
E
C
i
,
n
o
m
S
c
r
a
M
Headquartered in Sterling, Illinois, and founded in 1952,
HALO is a leading distributor of customized promotional
products. HALO’s account executives work with a diverse
group of end customers to develop the most effective
means of communicating a logo or marketing message to a
target audience. Operating under the brand names HALO and
Lee Wayne, HALO provides its more than 40,000 customers a
one-stop resource for design, sourcing, management and
fulfillment of their promotional products needs. To learn
more about Halo, please visit www.halo.com.
Headquartered in Payson, Utah, and founded in 1988,
Liberty Safe is a designer and manufacturer of home and
gun safes. Products are marketed under the Liberty® brand,
as well as a portfolio of licensed and private label brands,
including Remington®, Cabela’s® and John Deere®. The
Company’s products are the market share leader and are sold
in various sporting goods, farm and fleet and home improve-
ment retailers. Liberty also has the largest independent dealer
network in the industry. To learn more about Liberty Safe,
please visit www.libertysafe.com.
O
E
C
,
y
e
l
l
a
T
f
f
e
J
O
E
C
,
s
i
c
n
a
r
F
a
s
e
L
Headquartered in Cincinnati, Ohio, and founded in 1970,
Staffmark is a top ten provider of staffing services in the United States.
The company provides staffing solutions across a compre-
hensive range of disciplines from its approximate 300 branch
locations. Staffmark’s customized approach and market
specific knowledge are competitive advantages in a dynamic
labor and economic environment. The company’s approxi-
mately 1,000 permanent employees serve more than 6,000
customers and 34,000 temporary employees every week. To
learn more about Staffmark, please visit www.staffmark.com.
Headquartered in Coral Springs, Florida, and founded in 2006,
Tridien is focused on the design and manufacture of medical
support surfaces and treatment devices designed to treat
and prevent various types of ulcers, frequently formed on
immobile patients. Tridien offers its customers a full spectrum
of powered and static support surfaces based on both poly-
urethane foam and air based technologies. Tridien maintains
manufacturing operations throughout the United States to
better serve its national customer base. To learn more about
Tridien, please visit www.tridien.com.
s
e
i
n
a
p
m
o
C
r
u
O
O
E
C
,
o
n
i
t
n
a
t
s
o
C
e
c
n
V
i
B o a r d o f D i r e c t o r s
Sean Day has served as chairman of the board of
directors of the Company since April 2006. Mr. Day
is the president of Seagin International and was the chair-
man of our manager’s predecessor from 1999 to 2006.
Previously, Mr. Day was with Navios Corporation and Citi-
corp Venture Capital. Mr. Day is currently the chairman
of the boards of directors of Teekay Corporation; Teekay
Offshore GP LLC, the general partner of Teekay Offshore
Partners LP; Teekay GP L.L.C., the general partner of
Teekay LNG Partners LP; Teekay Tankers Limited and a
member of the board of directors of Kirby Corporation,
all NYSE listed companies. Mr. Day is a graduate of the
University of Capetown and Oxford University.
Jim Bottiglieri has served as a director of the Company
since December 2005, as well as its chief financial officer
since its inception on November 18, 2005. Mr. Bottiglieri
has also been an executive vice president of our manager
since 2005. Previously, Mr. Bottiglieri was the senior
vice president/controller of WebMD Corporation. Prior
to that, Mr. Bottiglieri was with Star Gas Corporation and
a predecessor firm to KPMG LLP. Mr. Bottiglieri serves
as a director for all of our subsidiary companies, except
Staffmark Holdings, Inc. and Liberty Safe and Security
Products, Inc. Mr. Bottiglieri also services on the board of
directors, audit committee and nominating and corporate
governance committee of Horizon Technology Finance
Corporation, a NASDAQ listed company. Mr. Bottiglieri
is a graduate of Pace University.
Gordon Burns has served as a director of the Company
since May 2008. Mr. Burns has been a private investor
since 1998. Previously he was responsible for investment
banking at UBS Securities and before that was a managing
director at Salomon Brothers Inc. Mr. Burns is a graduate
of Yale University and the Harvard Business School. Mr.
Burns served on the board of directors and audit commit-
tee of Aztar Corporation, a NYSE listed company, from
1998 through 2007.
Harold Edwards has served as a director of the Company
since April 2006. Mr. Edwards has been the president and
chief executive officer of Limoneira Company,
a NASDAQ listed company, since
November 2004. Previously,
Mr. Edwards was the presi-
dent of Puritan Medical
Products, a division of
Airgas Inc. Prior to that,
Mr. Edwards held man-
agement positions with
Fisher Scientific Interna-
tional, Inc., Cargill, Inc.,
Agribrands International and the Ralston Purina Company.
Mr. Edwards is currently a member of the boards of di-
rectors of Limoneira Company and Calavo Growers, Inc.,
which is also a NASDAQ listed company. Mr. Edwards is a
graduate of Lewis and Clark College and The Thunderbird
School of Global Management.
Gene Ewing has served as a director of the Company since
April 2006. Mr. Ewing has been the managing member of
Deeper Water Consulting, LLC, a private wealth and busi-
ness consulting company since March, 2004. Previously,
Mr. Ewing was with the Fifth Third Bank. Prior to that, Mr.
Ewing was a partner at Arthur Andersen LLP. Mr. Ewing is
on advisory boards for the business schools at Northern
Kentucky University and the University of Kentucky. Mr.
Ewing is also the chairman of the board of directors of
Staffmark Holdings, Inc. and a director of a private trust
company located in Wyoming and a private consulting
company located in California. Mr. Ewing is a graduate of
the University of Kentucky.
Mark Lazarus has served as a director of the Company
since April 2006. Mr. Lazarus has been the president
and chief executive officer of NBCUniversal Sports Ca-
ble Group since January 2011. Previously, Mr. Lazarus
was a senior sports adviser for Comcast Corporation,
a NASDAQ listed company, since December 2010 and
the president, media and marketing, of CSE, a sports
and entertainment company from 2008 through 2010
and the president of Turner Entertainment Group from
2003 through 2008. Prior to that, Mr. Lazarus served
in a variety of other roles for Turner Broadcasting and
also worked for Backer, Spielvogel, Bates, Inc. and NBC
Cable. Mr. Lazarus is a graduate of Vanderbilt University.
Mr. Lazarus served on the board of directors of Cincinnati
Bell, a NYSE listed company, from 2009 through 2011.
Alan Offenberg has served as a director and chief ex-
ecutive officer of the Company since February 2011.
Mr. Offenberg has also been a partner of our Manager
and its predecessor since 1998. Previously, Mr. Offen-
berg was with Trigen Energy, Creditanstalt-Bankverein
and GE Capital. Mr. Offenberg currently
serves as a director and the chair-
man of American Furniture
Inc. and
Liberty Safe and Secu-
rity Products, Inc. Mr.
Offenberg is a graduate
of Tulane University and
the Northeastern Uni-
versity Graduate School
of Business.
Manufacturing,
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G
I
D
O
C
C o m m i t t e e s
The Company’s operating agreement gives our board the authority to delegate its powers to committees appointed
by the board. All of our standing committees are comprised solely of independent directors. We have three standing
committees - the audit committee, the compensation committee and the nominating and corporate governance committee.
The Audit Committee is comprised entirely of inde-
pendent directors who meet the independence require-
ments of the NYSE and Rule 10A-3 of the Exchange Act
of 1934, as amended, which we refer to as the Exchange
Act, and includes at least one “audit committee financial
expert,” as required by applicable SEC regulations. The
audit committee is responsible for, among other things:
• retaining and overseeing our independent accoun-
tants;
• assisting the Company’s board of directors in its
oversight of the integrity of our financial statements,
the qualifications, independence and performance of
our independent auditors and our compliance with le-
gal and regulatory requirements;
• reviewing and approving the plan and scope of the
internal and external audit;
• pre-approving any audit and non-audit services pro-
vided by our independent auditors;
• approving the fees to be paid to our independent
auditors;
• reviewing with our chief executive officer and chief
financial officer and independent auditors the adequa-
cy and effectiveness of our internal controls;
• preparing the audit committee report to be filed with
the SEC; and
• reviewing and assessing annually the audit commit-
tee’s performance and the adequacy of its charter.
Messrs. Burns, Ewing, and Edwards serve on our audit
committee, and the board has determined that Mr. Ew-
ing qualifies as an audit committee financial expert, as
defined by the SEC.
The Compensation Committee is comprised entirely
of independent directors who meet the independence
requirements of the NYSE. In accordance with the com-
pensation committee charter, the members are “outside
directors” as defined in Section 162(m) of the Internal
Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and “non-employ-
ee directors” within the meaning of Section 16 of the
Exchange Act. The responsibilities of the compensation
committee include:
• reviewing the remuneration of our Manager and ap-
proving the remuneration paid to our Manager as re-
imbursement for the compensation paid by our Man-
ager to our chief financial officer and his staff;
• determining the compensation of our independent
directors;
• granting rights to indemnification and reimburse-
ment of expenses to our Manager and any seconded
individuals; and
• making recommendations to the Board regarding
equity-based and incentive compensation plans, po-
lices and programs.
Messrs. Edwards, Ewing and Lazarus serve on our com-
pensation committee.
The Nominating & Corporate Governance Committee
is comprised entirely of independent directors who meet
the independence requirements of the NYSE. The nomi-
nating and corporate governance committee is respon-
sible for, among other things:
• recommending the number of directors to comprise
the board of directors;
• identifying and evaluating individuals qualified to
become members of the board of directors, other
than our Manager’s appointed director and his or her
alternate, and soliciting recommendations for director
nominees from the chairman and chief executive of-
ficer of the company;
• recommending to the board of directors the direc-
tors’ nominees for each annual shareholders’ meeting;
• recommending to the board of directors the candi-
dates for filling vacancies that may occur between an-
nual shareholders’ meetings, other than our Manager’s
appointed director;
• reviewing independent director compensation and
Board processes, self-evaluations and polices;
• overseeing compliance with our code of ethics and
conduct by our officers and directors; and
• monitoring developments in the law and practice of
corporate governance.
• reviewing our Manager’s performance of its obliga-
tions under the Management Services Agreement;
Messrs. Lazarus, Burns, and Edwards serve on our nomi-
nating and corporate governance committee.
n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n
I
r
e
n
w
O
Trading
Our stock trades on the NYSE under the symbol “CODI”. During fiscal year 2010, the highest and lowest trading
prices per share were $18.16 and $11.00, respectively. As of December 31, 2010, we had 46,725,000 shares outstanding
that were held by approximately 20,000 beneficial holders.
Distributions
Pursuant to our distribution policy, we declared distributions of $1.36 per share for the year ended December 31,
2010. The declaration and payment of any distribution will be subject to a decision by our board of directors. In
making such a decision, our board will take into account such matters as general business conditions, our specific
financial condition, results of operations and capital requirements, as well as any other factors that it deems relevant.
Tax Reporting
CODI shareholders receive their tax information on a Form K-1. We endeavor to provide this tax information as early
as possible, and made information for tax year 2010 available for our shareholders as of February 28, 2011. Tax
information both is mailed to shareholders and is available on our website. We expect the items of income reported
on Form K-1 to our shareholders to remain fairly limited, and to include interest income, dividend income, capital
gains, interest expense and other expense.
Website
CODI’s website is www.compassdiversifiedholdings.com. On our website, shareholders can find our press releases,
SEC documents, investor events, and tax reporting, as well as information on our corporate governance procedures,
subsidiary companies, and board of directors.
Distributions Paid Since IPO
$4
$3
$2
$1
00
$1.36
$1.36
$1.33
Total
Distributions
Paid
Since IPO
$6.00
$1.25
$0.70
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
$
F i n a n c i a l R e v i e w
UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
(cid:59)
(cid:134)
ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
Form 10-K
For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2010
or
TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
For the transition period from to
Commission File Number: 0-51937
Compass Diversified Holdings
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)
Delaware
(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)
57-6218917
(I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)
Commission File Number: 0-51938
Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)
Delaware
(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)
20-3812051
(I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)
Sixty One Wilton Road
Second Floor
Westport, CT
(Address of principal executive offices)
06880
(Zip Code)
(203) 221-1703
(Registrants’ telephone number, including area code)
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:
Title of Each Class
Shares representing beneficial interests in Compass Diversified Holdings
(“trust shares”)
Name of Each Exchange on Which Registered
New York Stock Exchange
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12 (g) of the Act: None
Indicate by check mark if the registrants are collectively a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. Yes (cid:134) No (cid:59)
Indicate by check mark if the registrants are collectively not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act. Yes (cid:134) No (cid:59)
Indicate by check mark whether the registrants (1) have filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934
during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrants were required to file such reports), and (2) have been subject to such filing
requirements for the past 90 days. Yes (cid:59) No (cid:134)
Indicate by check mark whether the registrants have submitted electronically and posted on their corporate website, if any, every Interactive Data File
required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter
period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files). Yes (cid:134) No (cid:59)
Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the
best of registrants’ knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this
Form 10-K. (cid:134)
Indicate by check mark whether the registrants are collectively a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer or a smaller reporting
company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer”, “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check
one):
Large accelerated filer (cid:134) Accelerated filer (cid:59) Non-accelerated filer (cid:134) Smaller reporting company (cid:134)
Indicate by check mark whether the registrants are collectively a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act). Yes (cid:134) No (cid:59)
The aggregate market value of the outstanding shares of trust stock held by non-affiliates of Compass Diversified Holdings at June 30, 2010 was
$458,572,450 based on the closing price on the NASDAQ Global Select Market on that date. For purposes of the foregoing calculation only, all directors
and officers of the registrant have been deemed affiliates.
There were 46,725,000 shares of trust stock without par value outstanding at February 25, 2011.
Documents Incorporated by Reference
Certain information in the registrant’s definitive proxy statement to be filed with the Commission relating to the registrant’s 2011 Annual Meeting of
Stockholders is incorporated by reference into Part III.
PART I
Table of Contents
Item 1.
Item 1A.
Item 1B.
Item 2.
Item 3.
Item 4.
PART II
Item 5.
Item 6
Item 7.
Item 7A.
Item 8.
Item 9.
Item 9A
Item 9B.
PART III
Item 10.
Item 11.
Item 12.
Item 13.
Item 14.
PART IV
Item 15.
Business
Risk Factors
Unresolved Staff Comments
Properties
Legal Proceedings
(Removed and Reserved)
Market for Registrant’s Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of
Equity Securities
Selected Financial Data
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations
Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk
Financial Statements and Supplementary Data
Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure
Controls and Procedures
Other Information
Directors, and Executive Officers and Corporate Governance
Executive Compensation
Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related
Stockholder Matters
Certain Relationships and Related Transactions and Director Independence
Principal Accountant Fees and Services
Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules
Page
4
56
71
72
74
75
76
79
81
114
115
116
117
118
119
119
119
119
119
120
1
NOTE TO READER
In reading this Annual Report on Form 10-K, references to:
• the “Trust” and “Holdings” refer to Compass Diversified Holdings;
• “businesses”, “operating segments”, subsidiaries and “reporting units” all refer to, collectively, the businesses
controlled by the Company;
• the “Company” refer to Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC;
• the “Manager” refer to Compass Group Management LLC (“CGM”);
• the “initial businesses” refer to, collectively, Staffmark Holdings, Inc., Crosman Acquisition Corporation,
Compass AC Holdings, Inc. and Silvue Technologies Group, Inc.;
• the “2007 acquisitions” refer to, collectively, the acquisitions of Aeroglide Corporation, HALO Branded
Solutions and American Furniture Manufacturing;
• the “2008 acquisitions” refer to, collectively, the acquisitions of Fox Factory Inc. and Staffmark Investment
LLC;
• the “2010 acquisitions” refer to, collectively, the acquisitions of Liberty Safe and Security Products, LLC and
ERGObaby Carrier, Inc.;
• the “2007 disposition” refers to, the sale of Crosman Acquisition Corporation;
• the “2008 dispositions” refer to, collectively, the sales of Aeroglide Corporation and Silvue Technologies Group,
Inc.;
• the “Trust Agreement” refer to the amended and restated Trust Agreement of the Trust dated as of April 25,
2007;
• the “Credit Agreement” refer to the Credit Agreement with a group of lenders led by Madison Capital, LLC
which provides for a Revolving Credit Facility and a Term Loan Facility;
• the “Revolving Credit Facility” refer to the $340 million Revolving Credit Facility provided by the Credit
Agreement that matures in December 2012;
• the “Term Loan Facility” refer to the $74.0 million Term Loan Facility, as of December 31, 2010, provided by
the Credit Agreement that matures in December 2013;
• the “LLC Agreement” refer to the second amended and restated operating agreement of the Company dated as
of January 9, 2007; and
• “we”, “us” and “our” refer to the Trust, the Company and the businesses together.
2
Statement Regarding Forward-Looking Disclosure
This Annual Report on Form 10-K, including the sections entitled “Risk Factors,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis
of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and “Business,” contains forward-looking statements. We may, in some
cases, use words such as “project,” “predict,” “believe,” “anticipate,” “plan,” “expect,” “estimate,” “intend,” “should,”
“would,” “could,” “potentially,” or “may” or other words that convey uncertainty of future events or outcomes to identify
these forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements in this prospectus are subject to a number of risks and
uncertainties, some of which are beyond our control, including, among other things:
• our ability to successfully operate our businesses on a combined basis, and to effectively integrate and improve any
future acquisitions;
• our ability to remove our Manager and our Manager’s right to resign;
• our trust and organizational structure, which may limit our ability to meet our dividend and distribution policy;
• our ability to service and comply with the terms of our indebtedness;
• our cash flow available for distribution and our ability to make distributions in the future to our shareholders;
• our ability to pay the management fee, profit allocation when due and pay the put price if and when due;
• our ability to make and finance future acquisitions;
• our ability to implement our acquisition and management strategies;
• the regulatory environment in which our businesses operate;
• trends in the industries in which our businesses operate;
• changes in general economic or business conditions or economic or demographic trends in the United States and other
countries in which we have a presence, including changes in interest rates and inflation;
• environmental risks affecting the business or operations of our businesses;
• our and our Manager’s ability to retain or replace qualified employees of our businesses and our Manager;
• costs and effects of legal and administrative proceedings, settlements, investigations and claims; and
• extraordinary or force majeure events affecting the business or operations of our businesses.
Our actual results, performance, prospects or opportunities could differ materially from those expressed in or implied by the
forward-looking statements. A description of some of the risks that could cause our actual results to differ appears under
the section “Risk Factors”. Additional risks of which we are not currently aware or which we currently deem immaterial
could also cause our actual results to differ.
In light of these risks, uncertainties and assumptions, you should not place undue reliance on any forward-looking
statements. The forward-looking events discussed in this Annual Report on Form 10-K may not occur. These forward-
looking statements are made as of the date of this Annual Report. We undertake no obligation to publicly update or revise
any forward-looking statements to reflect subsequent events or circumstances, whether as a result of new information,
future events or otherwise, except as required by law.
3
ITEM 1. BUSINESS
PART I
Compass Diversified Holdings, a Delaware statutory trust (“Holdings”, or the “Trust”), was incorporated in Delaware on
November 18, 2005. Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC, a Delaware limited liability Company (the “Company”),
was also formed on November 18, 2005. The Trust and the Company (collectively “CODI”) were formed to acquire and
manage a group of small and middle-market businesses headquartered in North America. The Trust is the sole owner of
100% of the Trust Interests, as defined in our LLC Agreement, of the Company. Pursuant to that LLC Agreement, the
Trust owns an identical number of Trust Interests in the Company as exist for the number of outstanding shares of the
Trust. Accordingly, our shareholders are treated as beneficial owners of Trust Interests in the Company and, as such, are
subject to tax under partnership income tax provisions.
The Company is the operating entity with a board of directors whose corporate governance responsibilities are similar to
that of a Delaware corporation. The Company’s board of directors oversees the management of the Company and our
businesses and the performance of Compass Group Management LLC (“CGM” or our “Manager”). Our Manager is the
sole owner of our Allocation Interests, as defined in our LLC Agreement.
Overview
We acquire controlling interests in and actively manage businesses that we believe operate in industries with long-term
macroeconomic growth opportunities, and that have positive and stable cash flows, face minimal threats of technological or
competitive obsolescence and have strong management teams largely in place.
Our unique public structure provides investors with an opportunity to participate in the ownership and growth of companies
which have historically been owned by private equity firms, wealthy individuals or families. Through the acquisition of a
diversified group of businesses with these characteristics, we also offer investors an opportunity to diversify their own
portfolio risk while participating in the ongoing cash flows of those businesses through the receipt of distributions.
Our disciplined approach to our target market provides opportunities to methodically purchase attractive businesses at
values that are accretive to our shareholders. For sellers of businesses, our unique structure allows us to acquire businesses
efficiently with little or no financing contingencies and, following acquisition, to provide our businesses with substantial
access to growth capital.
We believe that private company operators and corporate parents looking to sell their businesses may consider us an
attractive purchaser because of our ability to:
• provide ongoing strategic and financial support for their businesses;
• maintain a long-term outlook as to the ownership of those businesses where such an outlook is required for
maximization of our shareholders’ return on investment; and
• consummate transactions efficiently without being dependent on third-party financing on a transaction-by-
transaction basis.
In particular, we believe that our outlook on length of ownership and active management on our part may alleviate the
concern that many private company operators and parent companies may have with regard to their businesses going through
multiple sale processes in a short period of time. We believe this outlook both reduces the risk that businesses may be sold
at unfavorable points in the overall market cycle and enhances our ability to develop a comprehensive strategy to grow the
earnings and cash flows of our businesses, which we expect will better enable us to meet our long-term objective of paying
distributions to our shareholders and increasing shareholder value. Finally, we have found that our ability to acquire
businesses without the cumbersome delays and conditions typical of third party transactional financing can be very
appealing to sellers of businesses who are interested in confidentiality and certainty to close.
We believe our management team’s strong relationships with industry executives, accountants, attorneys, business brokers,
commercial and investment bankers, and other potential sources of acquisition opportunities offer us substantial
opportunities to assess small to middle market businesses that may be available for acquisition. In addition, the flexibility,
creativity, experience and expertise of our management team in structuring transactions allows us to consider non-
traditional and complex transactions tailored to fit a specific acquisition target.
4
In terms of the businesses in which we have a controlling interest as of December 31, 2010, we believe that these
businesses have strong management teams, operate in strong markets with defensible market niches and maintain long
standing customer relationships. We believe that the strength of this model, which provides for significant industry,
customer and geographic diversity, has become even more apparent in the current challenging economic environment.
2010 Highlights
Acquisitions
• On March 11, 2010, our majority owned subsidiary, Advanced Circuits, acquired Circuit Express, Inc. (“Circuit
Express” or “CEI”), based in Tempe, Arizona for approximately $16.1 million. Circuit Express focuses on quick-
turn manufacturing of prototype and low-volume quantities of rigid PCBs, as defined below, primarily for
aerospace and defense related customers.
• On March 31, 2010, we purchased a controlling interest in Liberty Safe and Security Products, Inc. (“Liberty” or
“Liberty Safe”), with headquarters in Payson, Utah. Liberty is a premier designer, manufacturer and marketer of
home and gun safes in North America. Liberty manufactures and sells a wide range of home and gun safes in a
broad assortment of sizes, features and styles which are sold in various sporting goods, farm and fleet and home
improvement retailers. We made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Liberty for approximately $70.2
million.
• On September 16, 2010, we purchased a controlling interest in ERGO Baby Carrier, Inc. (“ERGObaby”) with
headquarters in Pukalani, Hawaii. ERGObaby is a premier designer, marketer and distributor of baby wearing
products and accessories. ERGObaby offers a broad range of wearable baby carriers and related products that are
sold through more than 800 retailers and web shops in the United States and internationally in approximately 20
countries. We made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in ERGObaby for approximately $85.2 million.
Common stock offerings
• On April 13, 2010, we completed a public offering of 5,250,000 Trust shares (including the underwriter’s over-
allotment completed April 23, 2010) at an offering price of $15.10 per share. The net proceeds to us, after
deducting underwriter’s discount and offering costs, totaled approximately $75.0 million. We used $70.0 million
of the net proceeds to pay down our Revolving Credit Facility.
• On November 12, 2010, we completed a public offering of 4,850,000 Trust shares (including the underwriter’s
over-allotment completed December 8, 2010) at an offering price of $16.90 per share. The net proceeds to us,
after deducting underwriter’s discount and offering costs, totaled approximately $78.0 million.
NYSE listing
• On October 14, 2010, we provided written notice to The NASDAQ Stock Market LLC of our intention to transfer
the listing of our shares to the New York Stock Exchange (the "NYSE") and to voluntarily delist our shares from
the NASDAQ Global Select Market in connection with the transfer. Our shares commenced trading on the NYSE
under the stock symbol "CODI" on November 1, 2010.
2010 Distributions
For the 2010 fiscal year we declared distributions to our shareholders totaling $1.36 per share.
The following is a brief summary of the businesses in which we own a controlling interest at December 31, 2010:
Advanced Circuits
Compass AC Holdings, Inc. (“Advanced Circuits” or “ACI”), headquartered in Aurora, Colorado, is a provider of
prototype, quick-turn and production rigid printed circuit boards, or “PCBs”, throughout the United States. PCBs are a
vital component of virtually all electronic products. The prototype and quick-turn portions of the PCB industry are
characterized by customers requiring high levels of responsiveness, technical support and timely delivery. We made loans
to and purchased a controlling interest in Advanced Circuits, on May 16, 2006, for approximately $81.0 million. We
currently own 69.6% of the outstanding stock of Advanced Circuits on a primary basis and 69.4% on a fully diluted basis.
American Furniture
AFM Holding Corporation (“American Furniture” or “AFM”) headquartered in Ecru, Mississippi, is a leader in the
manufacturing of low-cost upholstered stationary and motion furniture, including sofas, loveseats, sectionals, recliners and
complementary products to the promotional furniture market. We made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in
AFM on August 31, 2007 for approximately $97.0 million. As a result of the recapitalization of American Furniture’s
5
outstanding de16 with additional equity, we currently own approximately 99.9% of AFM’s outstanding stock on a primary
basis and 91.4% on a fully diluted basis.
ERGObaby
ERGObaby headquartered in Pukalani, Hawaii, is a premier designer, marketer and distributor of babywearing products
and accessories. ERGObaby's reputation for product innovation, reliability and safety has led to numerous awards and
accolades from consumer surveys and publications. ERGObaby offers a broad range of wearable baby carriers and related
products that are sold through more than 800 retailers and web shops in the United States and internationally. We made
loans to and purchased a controlling interest in ERGObaby on September 16, 2010 for approximately $85.2 million. We
currently own 83.9% of the outstanding stock of ERGObaby on a primary basis and 79.9% on a fully diluted basis.
Fox
Fox Factory Holding Corp. (“Fox”) headquartered in Watsonville, California, is a designer, manufacturer and marketer of
high end suspension products for mountain bikes and power sports, which includes; all-terrain vehicles, snowmobiles and
other off-road vehicles. Fox acts both as a tier one supplier to leading action sport original equipment manufacturers
(“OEM”) and provides after-market products to retailers and distributors (“Aftermarket”). Fox’s products are recognized
as the industry’s performance leaders by retailers and end-users alike. We made loans to and purchased a controlling
interest in Fox on January 4, 2008, for approximately $80.4 million. We currently own 75.7% of the outstanding common
stock on a primary basis and 68.1% on a fully diluted basis.
HALO
HALO Lee Wayne LLC, operating under the brand names of HALO and Lee Wayne (“HALO”), headquartered in Sterling,
Illinois, serves as a one-stop shop for over 40,000 customers providing design, sourcing, management and fulfillment
services across all categories of its customer promotional product needs in effectively communicating a logo or marketing
message to a target audience. HALO has established itself as a leader in the promotional products and marketing industry
through its focus on servicing its group of over 600 account executives. We made loans to and purchased a controlling
interest in HALO on February 28, 2007 for approximately $62.0 million. We currently own 88.7% of the outstanding
common stock on a primary basis and 72.8% on a fully diluted basis.
Liberty Safe
Liberty Safe, headquartered in Payson, Utah, is a designer, manufacturer and marketer of premium home and gun safes in
North America. From it’s over 200,000 square foot manufacturing facility, Liberty produces a wide range of home and
gun safe models in a broad assortment of sizes, features and styles. We made loans to and purchased a controlling interest
in Liberty Safe on March 31, 2010 for approximately $70.2 million. We currently own 96.2% of the outstanding stock of
Liberty Safe on a primary basis and 87.7% on a fully diluted basis.
Staffmark
In May of 2010, CBS Personnel Holdings Inc. changed its name to Staffmark Holding, Inc. (“Staffmark”) headquartered in
Cincinnati, Ohio, is a provider of temporary staffing services in the United States. In order to provide its more than 6,000
clients with tailored staffing services to fulfill their human resources needs, Staffmark also offers employee leasing
services, permanent staffing and temporary-to-permanent placement services. We made loans to and purchased a
controlling interest in Staffmark Holdings Inc, on May 16, 2006, for approximately $128.0 million.
On January 21, 2008, Staffmark Holdings, Inc. acquired Staffmark Investment LLC for approximately $133.8 million,
including fees and transaction costs. Like Staffmark Holdings Inc., Staffmark Investment LLC was one of the leading
providers of commercial staffing services in the United States, providing staffing services in 30 states. Staffmark
Holdings, Inc repaid $80.0 million in Staffmark Investment LLC indebtedness and issued $47.9 million in Staffmark
Holdings, Inc common stock for all the equity interests in Staffmark Investment LLC.
Our ownership percentage of the outstanding capital stock of Staffmark is currently 76.2% on a primary basis and 68.5%
on a fully diluted basis.
Tridien
Anodyne Medical Device, Inc. (“Anodyne”, which was rebranded as “Tridien” in September 2010) headquartered in Coral
Springs, Florida, is a leading designer and manufacturer of powered and non-powered medical therapeutic support services
and patient positioning devices serving the acute care, long-term care and home health care markets. Tridien is one of the
nation’s leading designers and manufacturers of specialty therapeutic support surfaces and is able to manufacture products
in multiple locations to better serve a national customer base. We made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in
Tridien from CGI on August 1, 2006 for approximately $31.0 million. We currently own 73.9% of the outstanding capital
stock on a primary basis and 61.8% on a fully diluted basis.
6
Our businesses also represent our operating segments.
Tax Reporting
Information returns will be filed by the Trust and the Company with the IRS, as required, with respect to income, gain,
loss, deduction and other items derived from the company’s activities. The Company has and will file a partnership return
with the IRS and intends to issue a Schedule K-1 to the trustee. The trustee intends to provide information to each holder of
shares using a monthly convention as the calculation period. For 2010, and future years, the Trust has, and will continue to
file a Form 1065 and issue Schedule K-1 to shareholders. For 2010, we delivered the Schedule K-1 to shareholders within
the same time frame as we delivered the schedule to shareholders for the 2009 and 2008 taxable year. The relevant and
necessary information for tax purposes is readily available electronically through our website. Each holder will be deemed
to have consented to provide relevant information, and if the shares are held through a broker or other nominee, to allow
such broker or other nominee to provide such information as is reasonably requested by us for purposes of complying with
our tax reporting obligations.
WHERE YOU CAN FIND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
We have filed with the SEC Forms S-1 and S-3 under the Securities Act, and Forms 10-Q, 10-K, and 8-K under the
Exchange Act, which include exhibits, schedules and amendments. In addition, copies of such reports are available free of
charge that can be accessed indirectly through our website http://www.compassdiversifiedholdings.com and are available
as soon as reasonably practicable after such documents are electronically filed or furnished with the SEC.
7
Public
Shareholders
86.4%
13.6%
CGI1
CGI Magyar
Holdings LLC
CGI Seagin
Holdings LLC5
Non-managing
Member
Allocation Interests4
Sostratus LLC2
“Sostratus”
Non-managing
Member
Management
Services Agreement
Compass Group
Management LLC 3
“Manager”
Compass
Diversified
Holdings
“Trust”
Trust Interests
Compass Group
Diversified
Holdings LLC
“Company”
Controlling
Equity Interests
ACI
AFM
ERGObaby
Fox
HALO
Liberty
Staffmark
Tridien
(1) CGI and its affiliates beneficially own approximately 13.6% of the Trust shares and is our single largest
holder. Mr. Massoud and Mr. Offenberg are not directors, officers or members of CGI or any of its
affiliates.
(2) Owned by members of our Manager, including Mr. Massoud as managing member.
(3) Mr. Massoud is the managing member.
(4)
The Allocation Interests, which carry the right to receive a profit allocation, represent less than 0.1%
equity interest in the Company.
(5) Mr. Day is a non-managing member.
8
Our Manager
Our Manager, CGM, has been engaged to manage the day-to-day operations and affairs of the Company and to execute our
strategy, as discussed below. Our management team has worked together since 1998. Collectively, our management team
has approximately 90 years of experience in acquiring and managing small and middle market businesses. We believe our
Manager is unique in the marketplace in terms of the success and experience of its employees in acquiring and managing
diverse businesses of the size and general nature of our businesses. We believe this experience will provide us with an
advantage in executing our overall strategy. Our management team devotes a majority of its time to the affairs of the
Company.
We have entered into a management services agreement (the “Management Services Agreement”) pursuant to which our
Manager manages the day-to-day operations and affairs of the Company and oversees the management and operations of
our businesses. We pay our Manager a quarterly management fee for the services it performs on our behalf. In addition,
our Manager receives a profit allocation with respect to its Allocation Interests in us. See Part III, Item 13 “Certain
Relationships and Related Transactions” for further descriptions of the management fees and profit allocation to be paid to
our Manager. In consideration of our Manager’s acquisition of the Allocation Interests, we entered into a Supplemental
Put agreement with our Manager pursuant to which our Manager has the right to cause us to purchase its Allocation
Interests upon termination of the Management Services Agreement. Our Manager owns 100% of the Allocation Interests
of the Company, for which it paid $100,000.
The Company’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer are employees of our Manager and have been
seconded to us. Neither the Trust nor the Company has any other employees. Although our Chief Executive Officer and
Chief Financial Officer are employees of our Manager, they report directly to the Company’s board of directors. The
management fee paid to our Manager covers all expenses related to the services performed by our Manager, including the
compensation of our Chief Executive Officer and other personnel providing services to us. The Company reimburses our
Manager for the salary and related costs and expenses of our Chief Financial Officer and his staff, who dedicate
substantially all of their time to the affairs of the Company.
See Part III, Item 13, “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions and Director Independence”.
Market Opportunity
We acquire and actively manage small to middle market businesses. We characterize small to middle market businesses as
those that generate annual cash flows of up to $60 million. We believe that the merger and acquisition market for small to
middle market businesses is highly fragmented and provides opportunities to purchase businesses at attractive prices. We
believe that the following factors contribute to lower acquisition multiples for small to middle market businesses:
•
•
•
•
there are fewer potential acquirers for these businesses;
third-party financing generally is less available for these acquisitions;
sellers of these businesses frequently consider non-economic factors, such as continuing board membership or the
effect of the sale on their employees; and
these businesses are less frequently sold pursuant to an auction process.
We believe that opportunities exist to augment existing management at such businesses and improve the performance of
these businesses upon their acquisition. In the past, our management team has acquired businesses that were owned by
entrepreneurs or large corporate parents. In these cases, our management team has frequently found that there have been
opportunities to further build upon the management teams of acquired businesses beyond those in existence at the time of
acquisition. In addition, our management team has frequently found that financial reporting and management information
systems of acquired businesses may be improved, both of which can lead to improvements in earnings and cash flow.
Finally, because these businesses tend to be too small to have their own corporate development efforts, we believe
opportunities exist to assist these businesses as they pursue organic or external growth strategies that were often not
pursued by their previous owners. We believe the current financing environment is conducive to our ability to
consummate acquisitions.
Our Strategy
We have two primary strategies that we use in order to provide distributions to our shareholders and increase shareholder
value. First, we focus on growing the earnings and cash flow from our businesses. We believe that the scale and scope of
our businesses give us a diverse base of cash flow upon which to further build. Second, we identify, perform due diligence
on, negotiate and consummate additional platform acquisitions of small to middle market businesses in attractive industry
sectors in accordance with acquisition criteria established by the board of directors
9
Management Strategy
Our management strategy involves the proactive financial and operational management of the businesses we own in order
to pay distributions to our shareholders and increase shareholder value. Our Manager oversees and supports the
management teams of each of our businesses by, among other things:
•
•
•
•
recruiting and retaining talented managers to operate our businesses using structured incentive compensation
programs, including minority equity ownership, tailored to each business;
regularly monitoring financial and operational performance, instilling consistent financial discipline, and
supporting management in the development and implementation of information systems to effectively achieve
these goals;
assisting management in their analysis and pursuit of prudent organic growth strategies;
identifying and working with management to execute attractive external growth and acquisition opportunities;
• assist management in controlling and right-sizing overhead costs, particularly in the current challenging economic
environment; and
•
forming strong subsidiary level boards of directors to supplement management in their development and
implementation of strategic goals and objectives.
Specifically, while our businesses have different growth opportunities and potential rates of growth, we expect our
Manager to work with the management teams of each of our businesses to increase the value of, and cash generated by,
each business through various initiatives, including:
• making selective capital investments to expand geographic reach, increase capacity, or reduce manufacturing costs
of our businesses;
•
•
•
investing in product research and development for new products, processes or services for customers;
improving and expanding existing sales and marketing programs;
pursuing reductions in operating costs through improved operational efficiency or outsourcing of certain processes
and products; and
•
consolidating or improving management of certain overhead functions.
In terms of the difficult economic environment we are currently facing, we and each of our subsidiary management teams
have been, and will continue to be, intensely focused on performance and cost control measures through this economic
cycle.
Our businesses typically acquire and integrate complementary businesses. We believe that complementary acquisitions
will improve our overall financial and operational performance by allowing us to:
•
•
•
•
•
leverage manufacturing and distribution operations;
leverage branding and marketing programs, as well as customer relationships;
add experienced management or management expertise;
increase market share and penetrate new markets; and
realize cost synergies by allocating the corporate overhead expenses of our businesses across a larger number of
businesses and by implementing and coordinating improved management practices.
We incur third party debt financing almost entirely at the Company level, which we use, in combination with our equity
capital, to provide debt financing to each of our businesses and to acquire additional businesses We believe this financing
structure is beneficial to the financial and operational activities of each of our businesses by aligning our interests as both
10
equity holders of, and lenders to, our businesses, in a manner that we believe is more efficient than our businesses
borrowing from third-party lenders.
Acquisition Strategy
Our acquisition strategy involves the acquisition of businesses that we expect to produce stable and growing earnings and
cash flow. In this respect, we expect to make acquisitions in industries other than those in which our businesses currently
operate if we believe an acquisition presents an attractive opportunity. We believe that attractive opportunities will
continue to present themselves, as private sector owners seek to monetize their interests in longstanding and privately-held
businesses and large corporate parents seek to dispose of their “non-core” operations.
Our ideal acquisition candidate has the following characteristics:
•
is an established North American based company;
• maintains a significant market share in defensible industry niche (i.e., has a “reason to exist”);
•
•
has a solid and proven management team with meaningful incentives;
has low technological and/or product obsolescence risk; and
• maintains a diversified customer and supplier base.
We benefit from our Manager’s ability to identify potential diverse acquisition opportunities in a variety of industries. In
addition, we rely upon our management team’s experience and expertise in researching and valuing prospective target
businesses, as well as negotiating the ultimate acquisition of such target businesses. In particular, because there may be a
lack of information available about these target businesses, which may make it more difficult to understand or
appropriately value such target businesses, on our behalf, our Manager:
•
•
•
•
•
•
engages in a substantial level of internal and third-party due diligence;
critically evaluates the management team;
identifies and assesses any financial and operational strengths and weaknesses of the target business;
analyzes comparable businesses to assess financial and operational performances relative to industry competitors;
actively researches and evaluates information on the relevant industry; and
thoroughly negotiates appropriate terms and conditions of any acquisition.
The process of acquiring new businesses is both time-consuming and complex. Our management team historically has
taken from two to twenty-four months to perform due diligence, negotiate and close acquisitions. Although our
management team is always at various stages of evaluating several transactions at any given time, there may be periods of
time during which our management team does not recommend any new acquisitions to us.
Upon acquisition of a new business, we rely on our manager’s team’s experience and expertise to work efficiently and
effectively with the management of the new business to jointly develop and execute a successful business plan.
We believe, due to our financing structure, in which both equity and debt capital are raised at the Company level, allowing
us to acquire businesses without transaction specific financing, that the current difficult financing environment is
conducive to our ability to consummate transactions that may be attractive in both the short- and long-term.
In addition to acquiring businesses, we sell businesses that we own from time to time when attractive opportunities arise
that outweigh the value that we believe we will be able to bring such businesses consistent with our long-term investment
strategy. As such, our decision to sell a business is based on our belief that doing so will increase shareholder value to a
greater extent than through our continued ownership of that business. Upon the sale of a business, we may use the
proceeds to retire debt or retain proceeds for acquisitions or general corporate purposes. We do not expect to make special
distributions at the time of a sale of one of our businesses; instead, we expect to pay shareholder distributions over time
through the earnings and cash flows of our businesses.
11
Since our inception in May 2006, we have recorded gains on sales of our businesses of over $100 million, or $3.00 per
share. We sold Crosman in January 2007 and Aeroglide and Silvue in June 2008. We sold Crosman, our majority owned
recreational products company for approximately $143 million and our net proceeds and gain on sale were approximately
$110 million and $36 million, respectively. We sold Aeroglide, our majority owned designer and manufacturer of
industrial drying and cooling equipment for approximately $95 million and our net proceeds and gain on sale were
approximately $78 million and $34 million, respectively. Finally, we sold Silvue, our majority owned developer and
producer of proprietary, high performance liquid coating systems for approximately $95 million and our net proceeds and
gain on sale were approximately $64 million and $39 million, respectively.
Strategic Advantages
Based on the experience of our management team and its ability to identify and negotiate acquisitions, we believe we are
well-positioned to acquire additional businesses. Our management team has strong relationships with business brokers,
investment and commercial bankers, accountants, attorneys and other potential sources of acquisition opportunities. In
addition, our management team also has a successful track record of acquiring and managing small to middle market
businesses in various industries. In negotiating these acquisitions, we believe our management team has been able to
successfully navigate complex situations surrounding acquisitions, including corporate spin-offs, transitions of family-
owned businesses, management buy-outs and reorganizations.
Our management team has a large network of approximately 2,000 deal intermediaries who we expect to expose us to
potential acquisitions. Through this network, as well as our management team’s proprietary transaction sourcing efforts,
we have a substantial pipeline of potential acquisition targets. Our management team also has a well established network
of contacts, including professional managers, attorneys, accountants and other third-party consultants and advisors, who
may be available to assist us in the performance of due diligence and the negotiation of acquisitions, as well as the
management and operation of our acquired businesses.
Finally, because we intend to fund acquisitions through the utilization of our Revolving Credit Facility, we expect to
minimize the delays and closing conditions typically associated with transaction specific financing, as is typically the case
in such acquisitions. We believe this advantage is a powerful one, especially in the current credit environment, and is
highly unusual in the marketplace for acquisitions in which we operate.
Valuation and Due Diligence
When evaluating businesses or assets for acquisition, our management team performs a rigorous due diligence and
financial evaluation process. In doing so, we evaluate the operations of the target business as well as the outlook for the
industry in which the target business operates. While valuation of a business is, by definition, a subjective process, we
define valuations under a variety of analyses, including:
•
•
•
•
discounted cash flow analyses;
evaluation of trading values of comparable companies;
expected value matrices; and
examination of recent transactions.
One outcome of this process is a projection of the expected cash flows from the target business. A further outcome is an
understanding of the types and levels of risk associated with those projections. While future performance and projections
are always uncertain, we believe that with detailed due diligence, future cash flows will be better estimated and the
prospects for operating the business in the future better evaluated. To assist us in identifying material risks and validating
key assumptions in our financial and operational analysis, in addition to our own analysis, we engage third-party experts to
review key risk areas, including legal, tax, regulatory, accounting, insurance and environmental. We also engage technical,
operational or industry consultants, as necessary.
A further critical component of the evaluation of potential target businesses is the assessment of the capability of the
existing management team, including recent performance, expertise, experience, culture and incentives to perform. Where
necessary, and consistent with our management strategy, we actively seek to augment, supplement or replace existing
members of management who we believe are not likely to execute our business plan for the target business. Similarly, we
analyze and evaluate the financial and operational information systems of target businesses and, where necessary, we
enhance and improve those existing systems that are deemed to be inadequate or insufficient to support our business plan
for the target business.
12
Financing
We have a Credit Agreement with a group of lenders led by Madison Capital, LLC. The Credit Agreement provides for a
Revolving Credit Facility totaling $340.0 million, subject to borrowing base restrictions, and a Term Loan Facility totaling
$74.0 million. The Term Loan Facility requires quarterly payments of $0.5 million that commenced March 31, 2008, and a
final payment of the outstanding principal balance on December 7, 2013. The Revolving Credit
Facility matures on December 7, 2012.
On February 18, 2009, we repaid $75.0 million of the outstanding Term Loan Facility with the unused portion of the
proceeds from the sale of Aeroglide and Silvue in 2008.
The Credit Agreement provides for letters of credit under the Revolving Credit Facility in an aggregate face amount not to
exceed $100 million outstanding at any time. At no time may the (i) aggregate principal amount of all amounts outstanding
under the Revolving Credit Facility, plus (ii) the aggregate amount of all outstanding letters of credit, exceed the borrowing
availability under the Credit Agreement. At December 31, 2010, we had outstanding letters of credit totaling $69.7
million. The borrowing availability under the Revolving Credit Facility at December 31, 2010 was approximately $248.3
million.
The Credit Agreement is secured by all of the assets of the Company, including all of its equity interests in, and loans to, its
subsidiaries. (See Note I to the consolidated financial statements for more detail regarding our Credit Agreement).
We intend to finance future acquisitions through our Revolving Credit Facility, cash on hand and additional equity and
debt financings. We believe, and it has been our experience, that having the ability to finance our acquisitions with the
capital resources raised by us, rather than negotiating separate third party financing specifically relating to the acquisition
of individual businesses, provides us with an advantage in acquiring attractive businesses by minimizing delay and closing
conditions that are often related to acquisition-specific financings. This is especially true given the recent disruptions in
the overall economy and current volatility in the financial markets. In this respect, we believe that in the future, we may
need to pursue additional debt or equity financings, or offer equity in Holdings or target businesses to the sellers of such
target businesses, in order to fund multiple future acquisitions.
Our Businesses
Advanced Circuits
Overview
Advanced Circuits, headquartered in Aurora, Colorado, is a provider of prototype, quick-turn and production rigid PCBs,
throughout the United States. Advanced Circuits also provides its customers with assembly services in order to meet its
customers’ complete PCB needs. The prototype and quick-turn portions of the PCB industry are characterized by
customers requiring high levels of responsiveness, technical support and timely delivery. Due to the critical roles that
PCBs play in the research and development process of electronics, customers often place more emphasis on the turnaround
time and quality of a customized PCB than on the price. Advanced Circuits meets this market need by manufacturing and
delivering custom PCBs in as little as 24 hours, providing customers with over 98% error-free production and real-time
customer service and product tracking 24 hours per day. During 2010, with the acquisition of Circuit Express,
approximately 64% of Advanced Circuits net sales were derived from highly profitable prototype and quick turn
production PCBs. In each of the years 2009 and 2008, approximately 66% of Advanced Circuits’ net sales were derived
from highly profitable prototype and quick-turn production PCBs. Advanced Circuits’ success is demonstrated by its
broad base of over 11,000 customers with which it does business throughout the year. These customers represent
numerous end markets, and for each of the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, no single customer accounted
for more than 2% of net sales. Advanced Circuits’ senior management, collectively, has approximately 90 years of
experience in the electronic components manufacturing industry and closely related industries.
For the full fiscal years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, Advanced Circuits had net sales of approximately $74.5
million, $46.5 million and $55.4 million, respectively and operating income of $20.4 million, $16.3 million and $17.7
million, respectively. Advanced Circuits had total assets of $92.0 million, $72.6 million and $74.0 million at December
31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Net sales from Advanced Circuits represented 4.5%, 3.7% and 3.6% of our
consolidated net sales for the years 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
13
History of Advanced Circuits
Advanced Circuits commenced operations in 1989 through the acquisition of the assets of a small Denver based PCB
manufacturer, Seiko Circuits. During its first years of operations, Advanced Circuits focused exclusively on manufacturing
high volume, production run PCBs with a small group of proportionately large customers. In 1992, after the loss of a
significant customer, Advanced Circuits made a strategic shift to limit its dependence on any one customer. As a result,
Advanced Circuits began focusing on developing a diverse customer base, and in particular, on providing research and
development professionals at equipment manufacturers and academic institutions with low volume, customized prototype
and quick-turn PCBs.
In 1997, Advanced Circuits increased its capacity and consolidated its facilities into its current headquarters in Aurora,
Colorado. During 2001 through 2003, despite a recession and a reduction in United States PCB manufacturing, Advanced
Circuits’ sales expanded by 29% as its research and development focused customer base continued to require PCBs to
perform day-to-day activities. In 2003, to support its growth, Advanced Circuits expanded its PCB manufacturing facility
by approximately 37,000 square feet or approximately 150%.
In March 2010 Advanced Circuits acquired Circuit Express, Inc (“CEI”) for approximately $16.1 million. Based in Tempe
Arizona and founded in 1987, CEI focuses on quick-turn and prototype manufacturing of rigid PCBs primarily for the
aerospace and defense related industry customers. CEI specializes in expedited delivery in as fast as 24 hours. CEI
reported net sales of approximately $16.4 million in 2009 and $18.7 million for the full fiscal 2010 year. Circuit Express
contributed approximately $15.8 million of net sales from its acquisition date to December 31, 2010 to Advanced Circuits
during 2010.
We purchased a controlling interest in Advanced Circuits on May 16, 2006.
Industry
The PCB industry, which consists of both large global PCB manufacturers and small regional PCB manufacturers, is a vital
component to all electronic equipment supply chains as PCBs serve as the foundation for virtually all electronic products,
including cellular telephones, appliances, personal computers, routers, switches and network servers. PCBs are used by
manufacturers of these types of electronic products, as well as by persons and teams engaged in research and development
of new types of equipment and technologies. According to an IPC 2010 Statistical Report, domestic net sales in 2010 of
rigid PCBs grew at the rate of almost 18% to approximately $1.6 billion in 2010 compared to $1.4 billion in 2009. From
that same report net bookings of rigid PCBs grew at the rate of over 23% in 2010 compared to 2009.
In contrast to global trends, however, production of PCBs in North America has declined by over 50% since 2000, to
approximately $4.09 billion in 2009, and is expected to grow slightly over the next several years according to the IPC 2009
Analysis. The rapid decline in United States production was caused by (i) reduced demand for and spending on PCBs
following the technology and telecom industry decline in early 2000; and (ii) increased competition for volume production
of PCBs from Asian competitors benefiting from both lower labor costs and less restrictive waste and environmental
regulations. While Asian manufacturers have made large market share gains in the PCB industry overall, prototype
production, some of the more complex volume production and military production have remained strong in the United
States.
Both globally and domestically, the PCB market can be separated into three categories based on required lead time and
order volume:
•
Prototype PCBs — These PCBs are typically manufactured for customers in research and development
departments of original equipment manufacturers, or OEMs, and academic institutions. Prototype PCBs are
manufactured to the specifications of the customer, within certain manufacturing guidelines designed to increase
speed and reduce production costs. Prototyping is a critical stage in the research and development of new
products. These prototypes are used in the design and launch of new electronic equipment and are typically
ordered in volumes of 1 to 50 PCBs. Because the prototype is used primarily in the research and development
phase of a new electronic product, the life cycle is relatively short and requires accelerated delivery time frames of
usually less than five days and very high, error-free quality. Order, production and delivery time, as well as
responsiveness with respect to each, are key factors for customers as PCBs are indispensable to their research and
development activities.
• Quick-Turn Production PCBs — These PCBs are used for intermediate stages of testing for new products prior
to full scale production. After a new product has successfully completed the prototype phase, customers undergo
test marketing and other technical testing. This stage requires production of larger quantities of PCBs in a short
14
period of time, generally 10 days or less, while it does not yet require high production volumes. This transition
stage between low-volume prototype production and volume production is known as quick-turn production.
Manufacturing specifications conform strictly to end product requirements and order quantities are typically in
volumes of 10 to 500. Similar to prototype PCBs, response time remains crucial as the delivery of quick-turn
PCBs can be a gating item in the development of electronic products. Orders for quick-turn production PCBs
conform specifically to the customer’s exact end product requirements.
• Volume Production PCBs — These PCBs, which we sometimes refer to as “long lead” and “sub-contract” are
used in the full scale production of electronic equipment and specifications conform strictly to end product
requirements. Volume Production PCBs are ordered in large quantities, usually over 100 units, and response time
is less important, ranging between 15 days to 10 weeks or more.
These categories can be further distinguished based on board complexity, with each portion facing different competitive
threats. Advanced Circuits competes largely in the prototype and quick-turn production portions of the North American
market, which have not been significantly impacted by the Asian based manufacturers due to the quick response time
required for these products. The North American prototype and quick-turn production sectors combined represent
approximately $2.6 billion in the PCB production industry in 2009.
Several significant trends are present within the PCB manufacturing industry, including:
•
•
•
Increasing Customer Demand for Quick-Turn Production Services — Rapid advances in technology are
significantly shortening product life-cycles and placing increased pressure on OEMs to develop new products in
shorter periods of time. In response to these pressures, OEMs invest heavily in research and development, which
results in a demand for PCB companies that can offer engineering support and quick-turn production services to
minimize the product development process.
Increasing Complexity of Electronic Equipment — OEMs are continually designing more complex and higher
performance electronic equipment, requiring sophisticated PCBs. To satisfy the demand for more advanced
electronic products, PCBs are produced using exotic materials and increasingly have higher layer counts and
greater component densities. Maintaining the production infrastructure necessary to manufacture PCBs of
increasing complexity often requires significant capital expenditures and has acted to reduce the competitiveness
of local and regional PCB manufacturers lacking the scale to make such investments.
Shifting of High Volume Production to Asia — Asian based manufacturers of PCBs are capitalizing on their
lower labor costs and are increasing their market share of volume production of PCBs used, for example, in high-
volume consumer electronics applications, such as personal computers and cell phones. Asian based
manufacturers have been generally unable to meet the lead time requirements for prototype or quick-turn PCB
production or the volume production of the most complex PCBs. This “off shoring” of high-volume production
orders has placed increased pricing pressure and margin compression on many small domestic manufacturers that
are no longer operating at full capacity. Many of these small producers are choosing to cease operations, rather
than operate at a loss, as their scale, plant design and customer relationships do not allow them to focus profitably
on the prototype and quick-turn sectors of the market.
Products and Services
A PCB is comprised of layers of laminate and contains patterns of electrical circuitry to connect electronic components.
Advanced Circuits typically manufactures 2 to 20 layer PCBs, and has the capability to manufacture up even higher layer
PCBs. The level of PCB complexity is determined by several characteristics, including size, layer count, density (line
width and spacing), materials and functionality. Beyond complexity, a PCB’s unit cost is determined by the quantity of
identical units ordered, as engineering and production setup costs per unit decrease with order volume, and required
production time, as longer times often allow increased efficiencies and better production management. Advanced Circuits
primarily manufactures lower complexity PCBs.
To manufacture PCBs, Advanced Circuits generally receives circuit designs from its customers in the form of computer
data files emailed to one of its sales representatives or uploaded on its interactive website. These files are then reviewed to
ensure data accuracy and product manufacturability. While processing these computer files, Advanced Circuits generates
images of the circuit patterns that are then physically developed on individual layers, using advanced photographic
processes. Through a variety of plating and etching processes, conductive materials are selectively added and removed to
form horizontal layers of thin circuits, called traces, which are separated by insulating material. A finished multilayer PCB
laminates together a number of layers of circuitry. Vertical connections between layers are achieved by metallic plating
15
through small holes, called vias. Vias are made by highly specialized drilling equipment capable of achieving extremely
fine tolerances with high accuracy.
Advanced Circuits assists its customers throughout the life-cycle of their products, from product conception through
volume production. Advanced Circuits works closely with customers throughout each phase of the PCB development
process, beginning with the PCB design verification stage using its unique online FreeDFM.com tool, FreeDFM.comTM,
which was launched in 2002, enables customers to receive a free manufacturability assessment report within minutes,
resolving design problems that would prohibit manufacturability before the order process is completed and manufacturing
begins. The combination of Advanced Circuits’ user-friendly website and its design verification tool reduces the amount
of human labor involved in the manufacture of each order as PCBs move from Advanced Circuits’ website directly to its
computer numerical control, or CNC, machines for production, saving Advanced Circuits and customers cost and time. As
a result of its ability to rapidly and reliably respond to the critical customer requirements, Advanced Circuits generally
receives a premium for their prototype and quick-turn PCBs as compared to volume production PCBs.
Advanced Circuits manufactures all high margin prototypes and quick-turn orders internally but often utilizes external
partners to manufacture production orders that do not fit within its capabilities or capacity constraints at a given time. As a
result, Advanced Circuits constantly adjusts the portion of volume production PCBs produced internally to both maximize
profitability and ensure that internal capacity is fully utilized.
The following table shows Advanced Circuits’ gross revenue by products and services for the periods indicated:
Gross Sales by Products and Services(1)
Year Ended December 31,
2009
2008
2010
Prototype Production ...........................................................................
Quick-Turn Production ........................................................................
Volume Production (including assembly) ...........................................
Third Party ..........................................................................................
Total ....................................................................................................
(1) As a percentage of gross sales, exclusive of sale discounts.
28.9%
32.6%
36.1%
2.4%
100.0%
30.6%
36.4%
30.1%
2.9%
100.0%
31.6%
34.4%
27.5%
6.5%
100.0%
Competitive Strengths
Advanced Circuits has established itself as a leading provider of prototype and quick-turn PCBs in North America and
focuses on satisfying customer demand for on-time delivery of high-quality PCBs. Advanced Circuits’ management
believes the following factors differentiate it from many industry competitors:
• Numerous Unique Orders Per Day — For the year ended December 31, 2010, Advanced Circuits received on
average over 300 customer orders per day. Due to the large quantity of orders received, Advanced Circuits is able
to combine multiple orders in a single panel design prior to production. Through this process, Advanced Circuits
is able to reduce the number of costly, labor intensive equipment set-ups required to complete several
manufacturing orders. As labor represents the single largest cost of production, management believes this
capability gives Advanced Circuits a unique advantage over other industry participants. Advanced Circuits
maintains proprietary software that maximizes the number of units placed on any one panel design. A single panel
set-up typically accommodates 1 to 12 orders. Further, as a “critical mass” of like orders is required to maximize
the efficiency of this process, management believes Advanced Circuits is uniquely positioned as a low cost
manufacturer of prototype and quick-turn PCBs.
• Diverse Customer Base — Advanced Circuits possesses a customer base with little industry or customer
concentration exposure. During fiscal year ended December 31, 2010, Advanced Circuits did business with over
11,000 customers and added approximately 210 new customers per month. For each of the years ended December
31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, no customer represented over 2% of net sales.
• Highly Responsive Culture and Organization — A key strength of Advanced Circuits is its ability to quickly
respond to customer orders and complete the production process. In contrast to many competitors that require a
day or more to offer price quotes on prototype or quick-turn production, Advanced Circuits offers its customers
quotes within seconds and the ability to place or track orders any time of day. In addition, Advanced Circuits’
production facility operates three shifts per day and is able to ship a customer’s product within 24 hours of
receiving its order.
16
•
Proprietary FreeDFM.com Software — Advanced Circuits offers its customers unique design verification
services through its online FreeDFM.com tool. This tool, which was launched in 2002, enables customers to
receive a free manufacturability assessment report, within minutes, resolving design problems before customers
place their orders. The service is relied upon by many of Advanced Circuits’ customers to reduce design errors
and minimize production costs. Beyond improved customer service, FreeDFM.com has the added benefit of
improving the efficiency of Advanced Circuits’ engineers, as many routine design problems, which typically
require an engineer’s time and attention to identify, are identified and sent back to customers automatically.
• Established Partner Network — Advanced Circuits has established third party production relationships with
PCB manufacturers in North America and Asia. Through these relationships, Advanced Circuits is able to offer its
customers a complete suite of products including those outside of its core production capabilities. Additionally,
these relationships allow Advanced Circuits to outsource orders for volume production and focus internal capacity
on higher margin, short lead time, production and quick-turn manufacturing.
Business Strategies
Advanced Circuits’ management is focused on strategies to increase market share and further improve operating
efficiencies. The following is a discussion of these strategies:
•
Increase Portion of Revenue from Prototype and Quick-Turn Production — Advanced Circuits’ management
believes it can grow revenues and cash flow by continuing to leverage its core prototype and quick-turn
capabilities. Over its history, Advanced Circuits has developed a suite of capabilities that management believes
allow it to offer a combination of price and customer service unequaled in the market. Advanced Circuits intends
to leverage this factor, as well as its core skill set, to increase net sales derived from higher margin prototype and
quick-turn production PCBs. In this respect, marketing and advertising efforts focus on attracting and acquiring
customers that are likely to require these premium services. And while production composition may shift, growth
in these products and services is not expected to come at the expense of declining sales in volume production
PCBs, as Advanced Circuits intends to leverage its extensive network of third-party manufacturing partners to
continue to meet customers’ demand for these services.
• Acquire Customers from Local and Regional Competitors — Advanced Circuits’ management believes the
majority of its competition for prototype and quick-turn PCB orders comes from smaller scale local and regional
PCB manufacturers. As an early mover in the prototype and quick-turn sector of the PCB market, Advanced
Circuits has been able to grow faster and achieve greater production efficiencies than many industry participants.
Management believes Advanced Circuits can continue to use these advantages to gain market share. Further,
Advanced Circuits has begun to enter into prototype and quick-turn manufacturing relationships with several
subscale local and regional PCB manufacturers. According to a November 2009 IPC study, approximately 309
PCB manufacturers operate in the United States with only 26 generating annual sales in excess of $20 million.
Management believes that while many of these manufacturers maintain strong, longstanding customer
relationships, they are unable to produce PCBs with short turn-around times at competitive prices. As a result,
Advanced Circuits has an opportunity for growth by providing production support to these manufacturers or direct
support to the customers of these manufacturers, whereby the manufacturers act more as a broker for the
relationship.
• Remain Committed to Customers and Employees — Advanced Circuits has remained focused on providing the
highest quality product and service to its customers. We believe this focus has allowed Advanced Circuits to
achieve its outstanding delivery and quality record. Advanced Circuits’ management believes this reputation is a
key competitive differentiator and is focused on maintaining and building upon it. Similarly, management believes
its committed base of employees is a key differentiating factor. Advanced Circuits currently has a profit sharing
program and tri-annual bonuses for all of its employees. Management also occasionally sets additional
performance targets for individuals and departments and establishes rewards, such as lunch celebrations or paid
vacations, if these goals are met. Management believes that Advanced Circuits’ emphasis on sharing rewards and
creating a positive work environment has led to increased loyalty. As a result, Advanced Circuits plans on
continuing to focus on similar programs to maintain this competitive advantage.
Research and Development
Advanced Circuits engages in continual research and development activities in the ordinary course of business to update or
strengthen its order processing, production and delivery systems. By engaging in these activities, Advanced Circuits
expects to maintain and build upon the competitive strengths from which it benefits currently. Research and development
expenses were not material in each of the years 2010, 2009 and 2008.
17
Customers
Advanced Circuits’ focus on customer service and product quality has resulted in a broad base of customers in a variety of
end markets, including industrial, consumer, telecommunications, aerospace/defense, biotechnology and electronics
manufacturing. These customers range in size from large, blue-chip manufacturers to small, not-for-profit university
engineering departments. The following table sets forth management’s estimate of Advanced Circuits’ approximate
customer breakdown by industry sector for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008:
Industry Sector
Electrical Equipment and Components ...................
Measuring Instruments ............................................
Electronics Manufacturing Services ........................
Engineer Services ....................................................
Defense ....................................................................
Industrial and Commercial Machinery ....................
Business Services ....................................................
Wholesale Trade-Durable Goods ............................
Educational Institutions ...........................................
Transportation Equipment .......................................
All Other Sectors Combined ...................................
Total ........................................................................
2010 Customer
Distribution
27%
9%
17%
10%
7%
6%
1%
1%
7%
7%
8%
100%
2009 Customer
Distribution
33%
13%
15%
5%
-
8%
2%
1%
8%
10%
5%
100%
2008 Customer
Distribution
32%
12%
16%
5%
-
8%
2%
2%
6%
8%
9%
100%
Management estimates that over 95% of its orders are generated from existing customers. Moreover, approximately 65%
of Advanced Circuits’ orders in each of the years 2010, 2009 and 2008 were delivered within five days (not including CEI
orders in 2010).
Sales and Marketing
Advanced Circuits has established a “consumer products” marketing strategy to both acquire new customers and retain
existing customers. Advanced Circuits uses initiatives such as direct mail postcards, web banners, aggressive pricing
specials and proactive outbound customer call programs as part of this strategy. Advanced Circuits spends approximately
2% of net sales each year on its marketing initiatives and advertising and has 42 employees dedicated to its marketing and
sales efforts. These individuals are organized geographically and each is responsible for a region of North America. The
sales team takes a systematic approach to placing sales calls and receiving inquiries and, on average, will place over 300
outbound sales calls and receive between 160 and 200 inbound phone inquiries per day. Beyond proactive customer
acquisition initiatives, management believes a substantial portion of new customers are acquired through referrals from
existing customers. In addition, other customers are acquired over the internet where Advanced Circuits generates over
75% of its orders from its website.
Once a new client is acquired, Advanced Circuits offers an easy to use customer-oriented website and proprietary online
design and review tools to ensure high levels of retention. By maintaining contact with its customers to ensure satisfaction
with each order, Advanced Circuits believes it has developed strong customer loyalty, as demonstrated by over 95% of its
orders being received from existing customers. Included in each customer order is an Advanced Circuits pre-paid “bounce-
back” card on which a customer can evaluate Advanced Circuits’ services and send back any comments or
recommendations. Each of these cards is read by senior members of management, and Advanced Circuits adjusts its
services to respond to the requests of its customer base.
Substantially all revenue is derived from sales within the United States.
Advanced Circuits, due to the volume of prototype and quick turn sales, had a negligible amount in firm backlog orders at
December 31, 2010 and 2009.
18
Competition
There are currently an estimated 300 active domestic PCB manufacturers. Advanced Circuits’ competitors differ amongst
its products and services.
Competitors in the prototype and quick-turn PCBs production industry include larger companies as well as small domestic
manufacturers. The three largest independent domestic prototype and quick-turn PCB manufacturers in North America are
DDI Corp., TTM Technologies, Inc. and Viasystems Group, Inc. Though each of these companies produces prototype
PCBs to varying degrees, in many ways they are not direct competitors with Advanced Circuits. In recent years, each of
these firms has primarily focused on producing boards with greater complexity in response to the off shoring of low and
medium layer count technology to Asia. Compared to Advanced Circuits, prototype and quick-turn PCB production
accounts for much smaller portions of each of these firm’s revenues. Further, these competitors often have much greater
customer concentrations and a greater portion of sales through large electronics manufacturing services intermediaries.
Beyond large, public companies, Advanced Circuits’ competitors include numerous small, local and regional
manufacturers, often with revenues under $20 million that have long-term customer relationships and typically produce
both prototype and quick-turn PCBs and production PCBs for small OEMs and EMS companies. The competitive factors
in prototype and quick-turn production PCBs are response time, quality, error-free production and customer service.
Competitors in the long lead-time production PCBs generally include large companies, including Asian manufacturers,
where price is the key competitive factor.
New market entrants into prototype and quick-turn production PCBs confront substantial barriers including significant
investments in equipment, highly skilled workforce with extensive engineering knowledge and compliance with
environmental regulations. Beyond these tangible barriers, Advanced Circuits’ management believes that its network of
customers, established over the last two decades, would be very difficult for a competitor to replicate.
Suppliers
Advanced Circuits’ raw materials inventory is small relative to sales and must be regularly and rapidly replenished.
Advanced Circuits uses a just-in-time procurement practice to maintain raw materials inventory at low levels. Additionally,
Advanced Circuits has established consignment relationships with several vendors allowing it to pay for raw materials as
used. Because it provides primarily lower-volume quick-turn services, this inventory policy does not hamper its ability to
complete customer orders. Raw material costs constituted approximately 17.9%, 16.9% and 16.1% of net sales for each of
the fiscal years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
The primary raw materials that are used in production are core materials, such as copper clad layers of glass and chemical
solutions, and copper and gold for plating operations, photographic film and carbide drill bits. Multiple suppliers and
sources exist for all materials. Adequate amounts of all raw materials have been available in the past, and Advanced
Circuits’ management believes this will continue in the foreseeable future. Advanced Circuits works closely with its
suppliers to incorporate technological advances in the raw materials they purchase. Advanced Circuits does not believe that
it has significant exposure to fluctuations in raw material prices. The fact that price is not the primary factor affecting the
purchase decision of many of Advanced Circuits’ customers has allowed management to historically pass along a portion of
raw material price increases to its customers.
Intellectual Property
Advanced Circuits seeks to protect certain proprietary technology by entering into confidentiality and non-disclosure
agreements with its employees, consultants and customers, as needed, and generally limits access to and distribution of its
proprietary information and processes. Advanced Circuits’ management does not believe that patents are critical to
protecting Advanced Circuits’ core intellectual property, but, rather, its effective and quick execution of fabrication
techniques, its website FreeDFM.comTM and its highly skilled workforce are the primary factors in maintaining its
competitive position.
Advanced Circuits uses the following brand names: FreeDFM.comTM, 4pcb.comTM, 4PCB.comTM, 33each.comTM,
barebonespcb.comTM and Advanced CircuitsTM. These trade names have strong brand equity and are material to Advanced
Circuits’ business.
Regulatory Environment
Advanced Circuits’ manufacturing operations and facilities are subject to evolving federal, state and local environmental
and occupational health and safety laws and regulations. These include laws and regulations governing air emissions,
wastewater discharge and the storage and handling of chemicals and hazardous substances. Advanced Circuits’
19
management believes that Advanced Circuits is in compliance, in all material respects, with applicable environmental and
occupational health and safety laws and regulations. New requirements, more stringent application of existing
requirements, or discovery of previously unknown environmental conditions may result in material environmental
expenditures in the future. Advanced Circuits has been recognized three times for exemplary environmental compliance as
it was awarded the Denver Metro Wastewater Reclamation District Gold Award for the years 2002, 2003, 2005, 2006, 2008
and 2009.
Employees
As of December 31, 2010, Advanced Circuits employed 399 persons. Of these employees, there were 42 in sales and
marketing, 7 in information technology, 13 in accounting and finance, 47 in engineering, 18 in shipping and maintenance,
264 in production and 8 in management. None of Advanced Circuits’ employees are subject to collective bargaining
agreements. Advanced Circuits believes its relationship with its employees is good.
American Furniture
Overview
American Furniture, headquartered in Ecru, Mississippi, is a manufacturer of upholstered furniture sold to large-scale
furniture distributors and retailers. American Furniture operates almost exclusively in the promotional upholstered
segment of the furniture industry which is characterized by affordable prices, standard designs and immediate availability to
retail consumers. American Furniture was founded in 1998. The current management team has been in place since 2004
led by CEO Mike Thomas. American Furniture’s products are adapted from established designs in the following
categories: (i) stationary, (ii) motion, (iii) recliner and (iv) other related products including accent tables and rugs.
American Furniture’s products are manufactured from common components and offer proven select fabric options,
providing manufacturing efficiency and resulting in limited design risk or inventory obsolescence.
On February 12, 2008, American Furniture’s 1.1 million square foot corporate office and manufacturing facility in Ecru,
MS was partially destroyed in a fire. Approximately 750 thousand square feet of the facility was impacted by the fire. The
executive offices were fundamentally unaffected. The recliner and motion plant, although largely unaffected, suffered
some smoke damage but resumed operations on February 21, 2008. There were no injuries related to the fire.
The Company temporarily moved its stationary production lines into other facilities. In addition to its 45 thousand square
foot ‘flex’ facility, management secured 320 thousand square feet of additional manufacturing and warehouse space in the
surrounding Pontotoc area. These temporary stationary production facilities provided American Furniture with
approximately 90% of the pre-fire stationary production capabilities for the months of April through November. Orders for
motion and recliner products were addressed by the production facilities that were largely unaffected by the fire at the Ecru
facility. On November 7, 2008 the damaged manufacturing facility was fully restored and operating.
For the full fiscal years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008 American Furniture had net sales of approximately
$136.9 million, $142.0 million and $130.9 million and operating income (loss) of ($37.1 million), $6.5 million and $5.1
million, respectively. American Furniture had total assets of $78.3 million, $115.8 million and $119.8 million at December
31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Net sales from American Furniture represented 8.3%, 11.4% and 8.5% of our
consolidated net sales for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
History of American Furniture
American Furniture was founded in 1998 with an exclusive focus on promotional upholstered furniture, offering a unique
value proposition combining consistent high-quality, attractively priced products and 48-hour quick-ship service. As
American Furniture has grown, it has maintained a disciplined, production focused strategy with proven merchandising
ideally suited to serve what has historically been one of the faster growing segments of the retail furniture marketplace,
promotional furniture. AFM began operations in 1998 with four assembly lines housed in a 60,000 sq. ft. facility. By
2002, American Furniture had achieved revenues in excess of $120 million and grew operations into a 600,000 sq. ft.
facility in Houlka, MS. In 2004, American Furniture was sold by its founder to a group of private investors who installed a
new management structure led by Mr. Mike Thomas. Mr. Thomas successfully hired a new executive team and grew
American Furniture’s administrative infrastructure in order to build a solid foundation to support future growth. In 2005,
American Furniture aggressively pursued Asian sourcing for fabrics and other assorted materials. Today American
Furniture is a leading manufacturer of promotional upholstered furniture operating from an approximately 1.1 million sq. ft.
manufacturing and warehouse facility completely restored from the February 2008 fire.
20
We acquired a controlling interest in American Furniture on August 31, 2007.
Industry
AFM is a leading manufacturer of upholstered furniture serving the promotional segment of the U.S. furniture industry.
The domestic furniture industry over the past twenty years prior to 2008 realized consistent growth driven by several
factors including (i) a long-term favorable housing market and consistent growth in the purchase of second homes, (ii)
favorable demographic trends (i.e., graying/baby-boom population) and (iii) overall rise in consumer spending have all
contributed to the expansion of the domestic furniture industry prior to 2008.
Overall conditions for the furniture industry have been difficult over the past year. New housing starts are down
significantly and consumers continue to be faced with general economic uncertainty fueled by deteriorating consumer credit
markets and lagging consumer confidence as a result of erratic financial markets. All of this has significantly impacted big
ticket consumer purchases such as furniture.
AFM participates largely in the promotional upholstered furniture industry. Within the U.S. residential retail furniture
marketplace, products are typically positioned in the “promotional”, “good”, “better”, or “best” category. The scale of the
categories is intended to reflect an increasing level of quality, appearance and corresponding price. At the wholesale level,
the promotional segment of the upholstered furniture industry we believe accounts for $3.4 billion in sales. Promotional
upholstered furniture manufacturers typically offer a limited range of products in a discrete number of styles and/or designs,
allowing immediate delivery to retail customers at well-established retail price points. Specifically, promotional
upholstered furniture is generally priced by product at the retail level from $99 for recliners and up to $1,500 for motion
sectionals.
Promotionally priced products are among the best-selling lines within the overall upholstered furniture category and are
expected to outpace the overall upholstered market over the next five years. The popularity of promotional furniture is
attributable to (i) the segment’s consistent product quality (based on focused manufacturing on a few key furniture pieces),
and (ii) its value pricing, which appeals to the broadest cross-section of the furniture consumers.
AFM competes exclusively in the promotional segment, selling upholstered furniture in both the stationary and motion
categories. In the retail furniture landscape, promotional furniture is a growing catalyst of floor traffic and sales volumes
for mass market furniture retailers. Recurring promotional programs have become core to retailer strategies given its
immediate availability to customers and just-in-time strategies employed within the industry which limit retailer inventory
requirements.
Within the wholesale market, wholesale shipments from Asian suppliers, we believe, have grown steadily as a percent of
total wholesale shipments. Asian upholstered imports have grown significantly in the past ten years. We believe their
impact on AFM has been far less than the industry as a whole within the promotional upholstered furniture, due to the low
price points and resulting shipping costs as a percent of a piece’s total value.
Off-shore Imports
Furniture manufactured in Asia emerged as an important driver of the U.S. residential furniture market beginning in the
mid-1990s. While off-shore manufacturers, particularly Chinese and Vietnamese manufacturers, have affected the entire
industry, the import trend, has impacted different segments of the industry at varying levels.
Case-goods and metal furniture have proven to be more susceptible to Asian competition than upholstered furniture, due to
the stack ability and assembly characteristics, resulting in efficient freight consolidation. Upholstered furniture cannot be
broken down and shipped efficiently to the U.S. such that the resulting freight costs tend to outweigh the labor and material
savings achieved through offshore manufacturing. As a result, domestic upholstered manufacturers have largely managed
to compete effectively against Asian competitors when compared to other segments of the furniture industry. In addition,
manufacturers in the promotional segment of the upholstered industry are even further insulated from offshore competition
due not only to overall freight costs but also freight costs when compared to wholesale price of the product together with
the prolonged lead-times to retailers and end customers in a market segment characterized by very short lead-times and
immediate delivery to the end consumer.
Retail price points in the promotional segment of the upholstered industry range from $99 - $1,500, whereas shipping costs
from Asia on a per piece basis are generally in excess of $100 per piece ($3,000 - $4,000) per standard 40 foot container
not including domestic shipping and insurance costs.
21
In addition to the increased cost, lead times also hinder Asian manufacturers’ ability to effectively compete in the
promotional upholstered industry. As mentioned previously, retailers use promotional furniture to drive store traffic and
provide immediate delivery to the end-user of value-priced, quality upholstered furniture products. AFM aims to ship
customer orders 48 hours following receipt of an order with delivery occurring 1 – 3 days later depending on the customers’
location within the U.S. Asian manufacturers typically require at least 50 days (or 7 – 8 weeks depending on business
days) from order receipt to customer delivery, resulting in a significant amount of increased inventory management and
advertising planning in order to effectively source upholstered product from overseas manufacturers.
In spite of these drawbacks, we have experienced significantly more competition beginning in 2009 and continuing through
2010, from upholstered Asian imports in the more expensive motion product category. Asian manufacturers have
demonstrated an ability to create a high quality motion product at a cost that maintains a competitive price point even with
the added shipping costs.
Products and Services
AFM manufactures two basic categories of promotional upholstered products, stationary and motion. Stationary products
include sofas, loveseats and sectionals, these products accounted for approximately 70%, 70% and 64% of sales in fiscal
2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Motion products include single rocking recliner chairs, sofas with reclining end seats,
loveseats with seats that rock together or separately and reclining sectionals with storage compartments. Motion and
reclining products contributed approximately 25%, 28% and 33% of fiscal 2010, 2009 and 2008 gross sales, respectively.
Beginning in 2005, AFM added a line of imported rugs and accent tables to its product mix to provide customers with
complimentary accessory offering to AFM’s core furniture lines. For 2010, 2009 and 2008, accent tables and other
miscellaneous revenue accounted for approximately 2%-5% of gross sales. AFM’s core product offerings with average
retail prices are summarized below:
28 styles of stationary sofas, loveseats and chairs - $299 - $499
15 styles of recliners - $99 - $399
5 styles of motion sofas - $499 - $599
5 styles of stationary sectionals - Up to $799
1 style of motion sectional - $999 - $1,399
AFM’s products utilize common components and frames with limited fabric options, allowing AFM to reproduce
established styles at value prices. Since 2004, AFM has continuously introduced new styles which typically replace older
designs and are primarily slight variations to existing products. AFM builds its products to stock and maintains adequate
inventory levels to facilitate shipment to customers within 48 hours of an order. AFM’s quick-ship strategy allows
customers to better manage inventory and product promotions yet maintain the ability to provide immediate availability to
retail customers, a key attribute within the promotional furniture segment of the furniture industry.
Product Development
AFM can re-engineer a new design, create a prototype and begin to solicit customer feedback within two weeks. AFM
carefully controls its product line such that new styles typically replace older designs. As a result, AFM requires
approximately 60 days to 90 days to wind-down a discontinued line and begin shipping truckload quantities of new designs
to customers.
Manufacturing
AFM utilizes an assembly-line manufacturing process with a four day production cycle divided into four functions, cutting,
sewing, backfill and upholstery. Employees are specialized by function and are compensated on a piece-rate basis. The
limited number of styles and designs minimizes scheduling and line changes and each function is simplified by the use of
common components. AFM uses one standard seat spring, one standard back spring and one standard cushion in each
category of upholstery. AFM’s piece-rate compensation plan and streamlined manufacturing process combine to give AFM
a low cost structure. Prior to 2009, American Furniture utilized pre assembled cut and sewn fabric kits for approximately
20% of its upholstered furniture. Theses fabric kits replace the cutting and sewing function in the manufacturing process.
Over the last two years AFM has increased the use of these fabric kits and as of December 31, 2010 and management
estimates that approximately 85% of the upholstered furniture that it manufactures uses the imported cut and sewn fabric
kit. The use of these fabric kits reduces the labor component related to the cutting and sewing process in-house. Theses
fabric kits are imported from Asia.
AFM’s efficient manufacturing process combined with its inventory strategy is designed to facilitate AFM’s 48-hour
quick-ship service covering the entire product line. AFM’s expedited shipping capacity enables retailers to improve
inventory turns and reduce lost sales due to stock-outs. AFM’s warehoused inventory is loaded on the delivery truck within
48 hours of order placement and typically arrives at a customer location within three days of shipping.
22
AFM delivers the majority of its products through a combination of its in-house trucking fleet and third-party freight
service providers. Freight costs are generally paid by the customer, including fuel surcharges. AFM utilized third-party
freight providers for over 70% of its customer shipments in 2010 and 2009 compared to approximately 50% in prior years.
We estimate that this saved approximately $1.0 million in 2009 in overall freight costs when this strategy was first
instituted.
Competitive Strengths
We believe that AFM is among the lowest-cost domestic manufacturers of promotional upholstered furniture. AFM
maintains a competitive cost basis through an assembly-line production model and build-to-stock strategy. Specifically,
AFM generates economies of scale through:
•
Long runs of a limited number of standardized frames;
The application of common components throughout the entire production line; and
•
• A standard offering of only two to four fabric options per frame.
In addition, management has aligned AFM’s high-volume manufacturing strategy with a piece-rate incentive structure for
its direct labor force. This structure drives workforce productivity. The incentive system also provides floor personnel
with the opportunity to earn annual compensation at or above local standards, thereby facilitating AFM’s recruiting and
retention efforts.
AFM’s efficient build-to-stock manufacturing operation facilitates AFM’s strategy of offering its customers shipment of
product within 48 hours of order receipt. In turn, AFM’s customers are able to offer their retail customers quality, value-
priced, upholstered furniture for immediate delivery upon the day of sale, while only maintaining limited quantities of
product inventory.
AFM serves a diverse base of approximately 840 customers. Within its broader customer base, AFM specifically targets
independent furniture retailers at the national, multi-regional and regional levels. AFM’s value proposition and the ability
to ship any product within 48 hours, is highly valued by this segment of the marketplace that focuses broadly on
demographic segments that demand immediate delivery of popular styles at competitive prices.
Barriers to Significant Asian Competition
The availability of low-cost Asian products has had a far-reaching impact on the broader home furnishings market in the
United States over the past ten years, contrasted to manufacturers serving other segments. Until recently, AFM has had
minimal exposure to off-shore competition due to the following:
• AFM’s efficient, low-cost production model;
• Mass retailers’ short lead-time demands and unwillingness to accept excess inventory risk; and
• High costs (e.g., freight, damage, shrink) of shipping upholstered furniture direct from Asia.
Recently, we have begun to see more competition in the motion product category from Asian imported product. These
products typically offer customers better value in terms of construction and price when compared to our motion product.
Our margin for motion product has typically been less than stationary.
Business Strategies
(cid:120) Increase sales with new and existing customers
While AFM currently supplies many of the top furniture retailers, AFM believes it can further augment its customer
base and is pursuing new business opportunities with selected national and regional furniture retailers, as well as in
other channels, including Rent-To-Own (“RTO”) and mass merchandisers. In addition, many existing customers
currently purchase only a portion of AFM’s product line, representing an opportunity for AFM to increase sales to
existing customers by augmenting customers’ entire promotional product line. In order to focus additional attention
to major customers and expand product–line sell-through to these customers, the Company added significant
infrastructure to its sales and marketing organization since 2005, increasing its sales representative network while
also subdividing sales territories to allow representatives to focus more closely on the expansion of existing
relationships and the addition of new customers. Online sales expanded in 2010 growing to approximately 7% of
sales. This was accomplished through sales to national and regional internet marketing firms.
23
• Product development
AFM’s merchandising strategy focuses on satisfying the changing needs of retailers and consumers in a manner that
meets AFM’s production strategy. AFM’s management and sales staff monitor the furniture market to identify new
trends and popular styles at higher price points. AFM subsequently ensures that it can cost effectively replicate a
new style with standardized components and limited cover options, after which AFM will build a prototype to
determine if the product can be reproduced at acceptable margin levels.
• Asian sourcing of components
In 2004, AFM implemented a program to purchase raw materials from the lowest-cost source available in the
marketplace. The Company hired a director of Asian sourcing in May 2005 to lead this effort. Currently, AFM
sources the vast majority of its fabric, legs, show wood, chaises, ottomans, correlate chairs and accent tables from
Asian vendors. AFM believes there are additional opportunities to lower purchasing costs through this initiative.
• Strategic acquisitions
AFM has in the past and will continue to evaluate strategic acquisitions to augment its existing business. In
particular, acquisitions may provide AFM with an opportunity to expand geographically, add additional product
lines or achieve operational synergies.
• Pursue cost savings initiatives
Currently, AFM is aggressively pursuing expense reduction, cost cutting programs and cash preservation initiatives
throughout all parts of its business.
Customers
AFM serves a base of approximately 840 customers comprised of retailers and distributors at the regional, multi-regional
and national levels. In 2010, 2009 and 2008, AFM’s top 20 customers accounted for approximately 67%, 62% and 56%,
respectively, of AFM’s total sales, with the top customer, Value City, accounting for approximately 23%, 24% and 22% of
total sales in 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Other than this customer, no single customer accounted for more than
8.0% of total sales in 2010, 2009 or 2008.
Sales and Marketing
AFM has a sales force consisting of 15 independent, outside representatives that exclusively sell AFM’s products in an
assigned geographic territory of up to six states. Sales representatives are compensated on a 100% commission basis. AFM
maintains two permanent showrooms in High Point, NC and Tupelo, MS, host cities for furniture industry trade shows
(High Point in April and October and Tupelo in January and August). In addition, AFM leases showroom space for the
furniture trade show in Las Vegas NV. Trade shows provide opportunities for AFM to display its existing products and
introduce new designs into the marketplace.
American Furniture’s business is seasonal. Net sales have historically been higher in the period of January through April of
each fiscal year. We believe this seasonality is due in part to consumer demand increasing resulting from income tax
refunds. Substantially all revenue is derived from sales within the United States.
Marketing at the retail level is typically handled by AFM’s customers. AFM does not advertise specific products on its
own, but provides product information and pictures for retailers to include in newspaper and various insert advertisements.
AFM’s products are typically included in retailers’ recurring promotional programs as the products drive floor traffic and
sales volume due to low price points.
AFM had approximately $6.1 million and $6.9 million in firm backlog orders at December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively.
Competition
AFM competes with selected large national manufacturers that produce and sell promotional products. However,
promotional upholstered furniture often represents only a small percentage of revenue for these participants. Also, large
diversified manufacturers tend not to place specific emphasis on developing quick-ship capabilities specifically for their
promotional offerings. Therefore, AFM competes primarily with several smaller manufacturers that are typically thinly-
capitalized, family owned businesses that we believe do not have the capacity, manufacturing capabilities, sourcing
expertise or access to capital in order to build critical production volumes. Competition within the segment is largely based
on value and delivery lead times, as opposed to product differentiation, providing AFM and its quick-ship capabilities with
a key competitive advantage within the industry. AFM’s primary competitors include United Furniture Industries, Albany
Industries and Hughes Furniture, Ashley Furniture and Affordable Furniture.
24
Suppliers
AFM’s top supplier, Independent Furniture Supply (“Independent”), is 50% owned by Mr. Thomas, AFM's CEO. AFM
purchases polyfoam from Independent on an arms-length basis and AFM performs regular audits to verify market pricing.
AFM does not have long-term supply contracts with Independent or any other suppliers. A majority of AFM’s domestic
suppliers are located near AFM due to a concentration of furniture manufacturers in northeastern Mississippi. Several of
AFM’s key raw materials, including lumber, plywood and polyfoam, are sourced locally with alternative suppliers available
at competitive prices, if necessary. In order to continually manage material costs, AFM actively sources products from
Asia. AFM imports legs, show wood, chaises, ottomans, correlate chairs, accent tables and the majority of its fabric from
China-based suppliers. The prices charged by manufacturers of products such as petro-chemicals and wire rod, which are
the primary materials purchased by our suppliers of foam and drawn wire, are expected to increase in 2011. Raw material
cost as a percentage of sales was approximately 62%, 59% and 59% in 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
Regulatory Environment
AFM’s manufacturing operations, facilities and operations are subject to evolving federal, state and local environmental
and occupational health and safety laws and regulations. Such laws and regulations govern air emissions, wastewater
discharge and the storage and handling of chemicals and hazardous substances. AFM believes that it is in compliance, in
all material respects, with applicable environmental and occupational health and safety laws and regulations. New
requirements, more stringent application of existing requirements, or discovery of previously unknown environmental
conditions may result in material environmental expenditures in the future.
Employees
As of December 31, 2010, American Furniture employed 682 persons. Of these employees, 607 were in production,
shipping and purchasing with the remainder serving in executive, administrative office and other capacities. None of
AFM’s employees are subject to collective bargaining agreements. We believe that AFM’s relationship with its employees
is good.
ERGObaby
Overview
ERGObaby, headquartered in Pukalani, Hawaii, is a premier designer, marketer and distributor of baby wearing products
and accessories. ERGObaby offers a broad range of wearable baby carriers and related products that are sold through more
than 800 retailers and web shops in the United States and internationally in approximately 20 countries.
ERGObaby’s reputation for product innovation, reliability and safety has lead to numerous awards and accolades from
consumer surveys and publications, including Parenting Magazine, Pregnancy magazine and Wired magazine.
For the full fiscal years ended December 31, 2010 and 2009, ERGObaby had net sales of approximately $34.5 million and
$22.8 million, respectively and pro forma operating income (exclusive of one-time transaction related costs) totaling $9.4
million and $6.5 million, respectively. ERGObaby had total assets of $96.0 million at December 31, 2010. ERGObaby’s
net sales (from acquisition date to December 31, 2010) represented 0.7% of our consolidated net sales for the year ended
December 31, 2010.
History of ERGObaby
ERGObaby was founded in 2003 by Karin Frost, who previously designed baby carriers following the birth of her son. In
its second year of operations, ERGObaby sold 10,500 baby carriers. Within the first six years of operation, ERGObaby had
sold over 850,000 baby carriers and in 2009 sold approximately 380,000 baby carriers. During that same time period
ERGObaby was named to the “20 Best Products in the Last 20 Years” by Parenting Magazine (2007) and named as a
“Must have Baby Item” on The View (2007).
As sales grew, the product line was expanded introducing the Organic, Designer, Sport and Performance carriers in addition
to 12 new accessory lines to accompany the carrier and enhance its capabilities. Since 2004, ERGObaby’s sales of carriers
and accessories have grown at an average rate of over 100% annually, largely due to the rapid gains in market share and the
increased consumer awareness and adoption of baby wearing. In 2007, ERGObaby made a strategic decision to establish an
operating subsidiary (“EBEU”) in Hamburg, Germany to better serve the European markets.
25
We purchased a majority interest in ERGObaby on September 16, 2010.
Industry
ERGObaby is part of the large and expanding infant and juvenile products industry. The industry exhibits little seasonality
and is somewhat insulated from overall economic trends, as parents view spending on children as largely non-discretionary
in nature. Consequently, parents spend consistently on their children, particularly on durable items, such as car seats,
strollers, baby carriers, and related items that are viewed as necessities. Further, an emotional component is often a factor in
parents’ purchasing decisions, as parents desire to purchase the best and safest products for their children. As a result,
parents spend, on average, $11,600 for housing, food, transportation, clothes, healthcare, daycare, and other items on a
child under the age of two in the U.S. each year. According to the U.S. Department of Agriculture (“USDA”), average
annual expenditures in the U.S. for children from zero to two ranged from $8,500 to $19,250 per family, depending upon
family household income. Similar spending patterns occur in the U.K., where a survey of several thousand new mothers by
Gurgle.com suggests parents spend £27,615 on a child before his or her third birthday.
According to a Mintel report published in March 2010, estimated 2009 retail dollars spent on baby durables reached
approximately $10.3 billion in the U.S., up compared to approximately $9.5 billion in 2004, with a considerably larger
market worldwide. The U.S. retail market is expected to continue its growth trajectory through 2014P with an anticipated
market size of approximately $12.0 billion.
Demand drivers fueling the growing spending on infant and juvenile products include favorable demographic trends, such
as (i) an increasing number of births worldwide; (ii) a high percentage of first time births; (iii) an increasing age of first
time mothers and a large percentage of working mothers with increased disposable income; and (iv) an increasing
percentage of single child households and two-family households.
Given that the child’s safety is paramount, many parents do not want to compromise a baby or child’s safety by purchasing
secondhand products to save money. In many cases, when purchasing secondhand, the parent does not know key facts
about the product they are buying, such as the age of the product, history of the item, or potential recalls by the
manufacturer. Furthermore, the safety standards for the product may have changed since the version being resold, resulting
in a product that does not meet the most rigorous safety standards. Consequently, as parents consider purchases of
important necessities such as baby durables, they typically favor new products. According to Mintel Research,
approximately 83% of baby carrier purchases were first-time purchases, with the remainder being either purchased second
hand or borrowed.
Safety influences not only whether parents purchase new or used products, but also which brands parents choose, which
consequently impacts pricing and competition within the infant and juvenile products market. In purchases of baby
durables, parents often seek well-known brands that offer a sense of comfort regarding a product’s reliability and safety. As
a result, brand name and safety certifications can serve as a barrier to entry for competition in the market, as well as allow
well-known brands such as ERGObaby to charge a premium.
Wearable Carriers and Babywearing Trends - Within the broader market for infant and juvenile products, ERGObaby
operates specifically within the market for child mobility and transport products. According to the Juvenile Products
Manufacturers Association (“JPMA”), reported child mobility and transport manufacturer dollar sales, which includes sales
of carriers, strollers, travel systems, and related products, totaled approximately $349.1 million in the U.S. in 2009.
Penetration of baby carriers currently trails that of strollers, car seats, and other infant and juvenile products. JPMA
manufacturer sales growth from 2008 to 2009 suggests that the soft carrier segment is growing more rapidly than other
infant and juvenile product categories, with 7.8% unit growth and dollar growth. Comparatively, stroller shipments and
convertible car seat shipments decreased 1.6% and 8.3%, respectively, over the same period
Management believes that continued growth within the market for wearable baby carriers is driven by several trends,
including (i) lower relative penetration of baby carriers versus other infant and juvenile products; (ii) favorable
demographics; (iii) increasing focus on the popularity of baby wearing; and (iv) convenience and mobility of wearable
products.
Products and Services
ERGObaby has two main product lines: baby carriers and accessories. ERGObaby’s baby carrier design supports a natural
sitting position for babies, eliminating compression of the spine and hips that can be caused by unsupported suspension.
The baby carrier also balances the baby's weight to parents' hips and shoulders, and alleviates physical stress for the parent.
26
The organic carrier line uses 100% organic cotton from India. Additional accessories are provided to complement the
babycarriers.
Within the carrier category, ERGObaby sells five primary product lines: the Standard, Organic, Sport, Performance and
Options carriers and; within each line, ERGObaby offers multiple style variations. Amongst the carrier category, Standard
carriers represented 48% of 2010 carrier sales and Organic carriers represented 39%, with all other carriers representing
approximately 13%. Carrier sales were approximately $30.0 million and $20.1 million in 2010 and 2009, respectively and
represented 87% and 88% of total sales in 2010 and 2009, respectively.
Within the accessories category, ERGObaby sells twelve primary product lines: back packs, bibs, changing pads, chest
strap, doll carrier, front pouch, hood replacement, Infant Insert, papoose coat, teething pads, waist extension and a weather
cover. Within each line, ERGObaby offers multiple style variations including color and organic/non-organic fabric. The
Infant Insert is the largest sales component of the accessory category, representing more than half of total accessory sales
for 2009 and 2010. Accessory sales were $4.4 million and $2.6 million and represented 13% and 12% of total sales in 2010
and 2009, respectively.
ERGObaby’s core product offerings with average retail prices are summarized below:
•
•
•
•
4 styles of baby carriers — $105 — $120
1 style of organic carrier in 7 colors — $120 — $148
2 styles of Infant Inserts — $25 — $38
10 different accessory products — $10 — $64
Competitive Strengths
Superior Design Resulting in Improved Comfort for Both Parent and Child - The ERGObaby carrier’s flexible
ergonomic design allows a parent to wear the child on the front, back, or hip, while ensuring a correct sitting position for
the baby. The concept of babywearing is increasing in popularity in the U.S., as parents recognize the benefits of the
practice. Some child care experts encourage babywearing as a means to strengthen the bond between parent and child,
including allowing the parent to become more attuned to a child’s movements and needs. Consumers continually cite the
comfort, superior design, and convenient “hands free” mobility the ERGObaby carrier offers as key purchasing criteria.
Baby Carriers Provide Less Expensive Alternative to Strollers - In times of economic softness, wearable baby carriers
provide parents a less expensive alternative to strollers, while providing similar functionality. However, many parents
purchase more than one form of transport for their infants and children, utilizing wearable carriers in addition to strollers
and hand carriers.
Business Strategy
Increase Penetration of Current U.S. Distribution Channels - ERGObaby continues to benefit from steady expansion of
the market for wearable baby carriers and related accessories in the U.S. and internationally. Going forward, ERGObaby
will continue to leverage its outstanding brand to capture additional market share in the U.S., as parents increasingly
recognize the enhanced mobility, convenience, and the ability to remain close to the child that ERGObaby carriers enable.
The company currently markets its products to consumers in the U.S. through brick-and-mortar retailers, including
specialty boutiques; online web shops; and directly through its website. Management has developed a targeted strategy to
increase its penetration of these currently underpenetrated distribution channels that includes: (i) the addition of new sales
representatives; (ii) implementation of new sales and marketing programs; and (iii) a redesign of the company’s website.
Cultivate Attractive New Distribution Channels - In addition to its existing retail customer base, comprised primarily of
small specialty retail stores and boutiques, there are numerous other retail channels that offer tremendous growth
opportunities for ERGObaby. Specifically, management recently began targeting several types of retailers as the company
continues its growth trajectory, including (i) multi-store maternity and infant and juvenile products chains; (ii) outdoor and
sporting goods retailers; (iii) organic and natural specialty retailers; (iv) department stores; and (v) mass retailers.
International Market Expansion - Testimony to the global strength of its lifestyle brand, ERGObaby derives nearly 55%
of its sales from international markets. Similar to the U.S., ERGObaby can continue to leverage its brand equity in the
international markets it currently serves to aggressively drive future growth, as well as expand its international presence
into new regions. The market for the company’s products abroad continues to grow rapidly, in part due to the growth in the
number of births worldwide and the fact that in many parts of Europe and Asia, the concept of babywearing is a culturally
entrenched form of infant and child transport.
27
New Product Development - Management believes ERGObaby has an opportunity to leverage its unique, authentic lifestyle
brand and expand its product line. Since its founding in 2003, the company has successfully introduced new products to
maintain innovation, uniqueness, and freshness within its product line. Specifically, with 26 SKUs added in 2007, 14 SKUs
added in 2008, and 22 new SKUs added in 2009. These product introductions include both evolutionary product
introductions, such as new colors and patterns for the company’s current carriers and associated products, as well as
entirely new product categories. Major recent new product introductions include the 2007 introduction of the organic carrier
and the 2008 introduction of the ERGObaby sport carrier, which incorporated a lighter-weight fabric and additional
ventilation. In 2009, the company unveiled the ERGObaby infant insert Heart2Heart, which modifies the ERGObaby
carrier to provide additional support for a baby’s developing spine. Additionally, in 2010, ERGObaby launched the
Performance carrier and the Option carrier, the latter which allows the consumer to customize the look of the carrier with
optional colored fabrics and designs.
Customers
ERGObaby primarily sells its products through brick-and-mortar retailers, online retailers and distributors and derives
approximately 55% of its sales from outside of the U.S. Within the U.S., ERGObaby sells its products through 720 brick-
and-mortar retail customers and small infant and juvenile products chains, representing 830 retail doors. ERGObaby
products are sold through its German based subsidiary, ERGObaby Europe, which services brick-and-mortar retailers and
online retailers primarily in Germany, France, Spain, Sweden, Belgium and Norway as well as a network of distributors
located in Austria, Finland, Russia, Switzerland, Turkey and the Ukraine. Sales to customers outside of the U.S. and
European markets are predominantly serviced through distributors granted rights, though not necessarily exclusive, to sell
within a specific geographic region.
Sales & Marketing
ERGObaby directly employs 16 sales professionals, 4 in the U.S. and 12 in Europe. Within the U.S., there are no directly
employed sales reps; ERGObaby utilizes 8 independent sales representatives assigned to differing U.S. territories and
managed by 3 in-house sales professionals. Independent salespeople in the U.S. are paid on a commission basis based on
customer type and sales territory.
In Europe, ERGObaby directly employs 12 salespeople. In Europe, salespeople are paid a base salary and a commission
on their sales, which is standard in that territory.
With the exception of several small distributors in Russia, Ukraine, Switzerland, Finland, Turkey and Austria, all
distributor orders are handled through ERGObaby’s U.S. headquarters.
To date, ERGObaby has not invested a significant amount of capital in marketing its products yet has achieved significant
loyalty. Management believes that nearly two-thirds of current customers have noted family and friend referrals as the
reason for buying ERGObaby products. Going forward, ERGObaby plans to employ a multi-faceted marketing plan which
includes (i) targeted print advertising; (ii) online marketing efforts, including online advertisement, search engine
optimization and social networking efforts; (iii) increasing tradeshow attendance; and (iv) increasing promotional activities.
ERGObaby had approximately $7.6 million in firm backlog orders at December 31, 2010.
Competition
The infant and juvenile products market is fragmented, with a few larger manufacturers and marketers with portfolios of
brands and a multitude of smaller, private companies with relatively targeted product offerings.
Within the infant and juvenile products market, ERGObaby primarily competes with companies that market wearable baby
carriers; although to some extent it competes with other forms of child transport and mobility products, such as strollers and
hand-held baby carriers. Within the wearable baby carrier market, several distinct categories exist, including (i) slings and
wraps; (ii) soft-structured baby carriers; and (iii) hard frame baby carriers. ERGObaby’s products are considered part of the
soft-structured baby carrier category, and management estimates that based upon JPMA data. ERGObaby has increased the
reported unit share of this rapidly growing market from approximately 20% in 2007 to 25% in 2008. Further, in 2009,
ERGObaby has captured approximately 28% of U.S. revenue in reported soft carrier sales. The primary competitors in this
segment are Baby Bjorn and Manduca, which also market products in the premium price range. ERGObaby also competes
with several smaller companies that have developed wearable carriers, such as Beco, CatBird, and L’il Baby, although these
companies maintain a more limited product offering than ERGObaby. Within these categories, ERGObaby competes on
price and functionality of design.
28
Suppliers
ERGObaby exclusively sources its products from China and India. Since 2004, ERGObaby has utilized a contract
manufacturer in China to manufacture all of ERGObaby’s non-organic carriers and accessories, which accounted for
approximately 55% of ERGObaby’s volume in 2010. ERGObaby partnered with a family-owned manufacturer located in
India in 2008. This company manufactures all of ERGObaby’s organic carriers and accessories, which represented
approximately 45% of ERGObaby’s products in 2010. Management believes that this manufacturer has significant
additional capacity to accommodate ERGObaby’s projected growth in the organic and non-organic categories.
Furthermore, management is in the early stages of sourcing additional capacity from suppliers located in Vietnam and
expects the qualification process to take approximately one year.
Intellectual Property
ERGObaby maintains a utility patent on its standard carrier, which was filed in 2003 and issued January 29, 2008.
Notwithstanding this patent, ERGObaby primarily depends on brand name recognition and premium product offering to
differentiate itself from competition.
Regulatory Environment
Management is not aware of any existing, pending, or contingent liabilities that could have a material adverse effect on the
company’s business. The company is proactive regarding regulatory issues and is in compliance with all relevant
regulations. ERGObaby maintains adequate product liability insurance coverage and to date has not incurred any losses.
Management is not aware of any potential environmental issues.
Employees
As of December 31, 2010 ERGObaby employed 42 persons in 4 locations. Of these employees, approximately 23 were in
sales and marketing and customer service with the remainder serving in executive and administrative capacities. None of
ERGObaby’s employees are subject to collective bargaining agreements. We believe that ERGObaby’s relationship with
its employees is good.
Fox
Overview
Fox, headquartered in Watsonville, California, is a branded action sports company that designs, manufactures and markets
high-performance suspension products and components for mountain bikes, snowmobiles, motorcycles, all-terrain vehicles
(“ATVs”), and other off-road vehicles.
Fox’s products are recognized by manufacturers and consumers as being among the most technically advanced suspension
products currently available in the marketplace. Fox’s technical success is demonstrated by its dominance of award
winning performances by professional athletes utilizing its suspension products. As a result, Fox’s suspension components
are incorporated by OEM customers on their high-performance models at the top of their product lines. OEMs leverage the
strength of Fox’s brand to maintain and expand their own sales and margins. In the Aftermarket segment, customers
seeking higher performance select Fox’s suspension components to enhance their existing equipment.
Fox sells to over 200 OEM and over 7,600 Aftermarket customers across its market segments. In each of the years 2010,
2009 and 2008, approximately 78%, 76% and 76% of net sales were to OEM customers with the remaining sales to
Aftermarket customers. Fox’s senior management, collectively, has approximately 100 years of experience in the
suspension design and manufacturing industry and other closely related industries.
For the full fiscal years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, Fox had net sales of approximately $171.0 million,
$121.5 million, and $131.7 million and operating income of $19.6 million, $10.7 million and $10.7 million, respectively.
Fox had total assets of $130.8 million, $120.3 million and $124.5 million at December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008. Fox’s net
sales represented 10.3%, 9.7%, and 8.6% of our consolidated net sales for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and
2008, respectively.
29
History of Fox
Fox was founded by Bob Fox in 1974 when, having participated in motocross racing, he sought to create a racing
suspension shock that performed better than existing coil spring shocks. Working in a friend’s garage, Mr. Fox created the
“Fox Air-Shox”. The product was successful and within two years it was used to win the U.S. 500cc National Motocross
Championship.
In 1978, Fox began producing high performance suspension products for off-road and motorcycle racing. From 1978 to
1983, Fox suspension users won the 500cc Grand Prix (motocross), Baja 1000 (off-road), AMA Super Bike (motorcycle
road racing) and Indy 500 (auto racing) generating greater market awareness for the Fox brand especially among racing
enthusiasts.
As Fox grew, the company applied the same core suspension technologies developed for motocross racing to other
categories. In 1987, Fox entered the snowmobile market. By 1993, Fox began supplying the mountain bike industry with
rear shocks before offering front fork suspensions in 2001. Fox entered the ATV and other off-road markets in 2002.
We purchased a majority interest in Fox on January 4, 2008.
Industry
Fox provides suspension products for mountain biking and powered vehicles, such as, snowmobiles, all-terrain/utility
vehicles, motorcycling/motocross and off-road/specialty vehicles. Over the last three fiscal years mountain biking has
represented approximately 75%, 79% and 84%, of Fox’s gross sales and powered vehicles have represented the remainder
of gross sales.
Mountain Biking - In 2010, the U.S. bike market generated over $5.6 billion of sales according to the National Bicycle
Dealers Association. Mountain bike related sales accounted for approximately 27.8% of this total according to U.S.
Department of Commerce statistics, Gluskin Townley Estimates. These sales were primarily conducted through three
channels: mass merchants, chain sporting goods and Independent Bike Dealers (IBDs). These channels are differentiated
by the price, quality and selection of the mountain bikes they offer, with the IBD segment consisting of premium priced
and highly technical performance bikes.
Mountain biking enthusiasts typically have strong preferences concerning not only the OEM brand but also for the
components used by OEM manufacturers. Shocks, forks, wheels and drive-trains strongly influence customers’ buying
decisions. OEMs have formed partnerships with premium component manufacturers having strong brands in order to
generate increased sales of their fully assembled bikes. Fox’s components are generally selected by OEMs participating in
the IBD segment and by Aftermarket consumers seeking increased performance characteristics.
Snowmobiles – In 2010, management estimates that the worldwide market for new snowmobiles was $1.0 billion.
Snowmobiling can be segmented into the following categories: performance/crossover snowmobiles used for a variety of
activities including racing; touring/utility snowmobiles that are more comfortable and often seat two people; mountain
snowmobiles that are performance-oriented, focusing on vertical geography; trail snowmobiles that are primarily used for
riding groomed and un-groomed trails; and youth snowmobiles. Fox provides suspension products in each of these
categories.
As a way to stimulate demand for new snowmobiles and entice customers to purchase more premium priced snowmobiles,
OEMs will select Fox shocks. Additionally, OEMs offer the Fox’s shock absorbers as upgrades on less expensive models.
Aftermarket customers will select Fox components for increased performance characteristics.
All-Terrain Vehicles – In 2010 the worldwide ATV market was $4.5 billion according to management’s estimates. The
market for all-terrain vehicles (ATVs) and utility vehicles can be divided into four segments: Recreation/Utility ATVs that
are primarily used for trail riding, hunting and farming; Sport ATVs that are high performance, two-wheel drive machines
used for racing and aggressive trail riding; Youth ATVs; and Side-by-Side ATVs. Fox develops and sells shocks into the
performance and racing sport, youth and side-by-side sub-segments of the ATV market.
Similar to the snowmobile industry, OEMs will stimulate demand for new ATVs and entice customers to purchase more
premium priced ATVs by selecting Fox’s shocks for their premium models. Additionally, OEMs offer the company’s
shock absorbers as upgrades on less expensive models. Aftermarket sales are comprised of customers seeking enhanced
performance characteristics.
30
Motorcycles/Motocross - In 2010, the U.S. retail sales of motorcycles was $4.9 billion according to management
estimates. The motorcycle market consists of all classes of on-road and off-road motorcycles. There are three main
categories: On-highway motorcycles that are primarily used on paved roads; Dual motorcycles that are used for both on
and off-road activities; and Off-highway motorcycles that are only certified for off-road use. The Off-road category is
further segmented into motocross, off-road which includes youth motocross and youth off-road. Currently, OEM needs for
suspension products are largely filled by captive suppliers in this category. As such, Fox has focused on the Aftermarket
performance racing segments. Aftermarket sales are comprised of customers seeking enhanced performance
characteristics.
Off-Road Vehicles– In 2010, the U.S. retail sales of specialty automotive products were $27.9 billion according to the
Specialty Equipment Market Association. Of that, $9.7 billion came from suspension and handling equipment. Off-road
vehicles can be divided into five segments: off-road trucks, buggies, sand buggies, rock crawlers and lifted trucks.
Consumers in the truck, buggy, sand buggy and rock crawler categories range from serious racers and enthusiasts to
individuals involved primarily in recreational activities. The lifted truck segment, which consists of vehicles that in many
cases never leave the highway, is divided generally by price point. Fox’s products target the high-end price point for each
of these five segments. Off-road vehicles are generally customized vehicles with Aftermarket components unlike OEM
vehicles although some OEM manufacturers are offering limited edition vehicles. Fox primarily sells to Aftermarket
consumers seeking increased performance characteristics but has begun some limited sales to OEM manufacturers. FOX
also provides suspension to the U.S. Government either directly or through tier one manufacturers.
Products and Services
Fox designs and manufactures suspension products that dissipate the energy and force generated by various action sport
activities. A suspension product allows wheels to move up and down to absorb bumps and shocks while keeping the tires in
contact with the ground for better control. Fox’s products use aerospace alloys and feature adjustable suspension,
progressive spring rates, and low weight combined with structural rigidity. Fox suspension products improve user control
for greater performance while maximizing comfort levels.
Each suspension product built at Fox’s manufacturing facilities is assembled according to precise specifications at multiple
stages throughout the assembly process to ensure consistently high performance levels and customer satisfaction. Finished
parts are built in multiple assembly cells and on an assembly line using precise tooling to ensure manufacturing consistency
and product functionality. Fox has developed a number of highly sophisticated assembly machines to ensure consistent
high quality.
Competitive Strengths
Proprietary Engineering Expertise – Fox maintains a broad base of technical innovation and design that has been
developed over the past 36 years. Fox’s technical expertise enables the development and production of some of the most
advanced suspension products available in the market. With its history of innovation and design, Fox has created a deep
portfolio of key intellectual property related to suspension technology and applications.
Highly Recognizable Brand – Driven by a long history of innovation, Fox has created a highly respected and well-known
brand for advanced suspension products. A product branded with the FOX Racing Shox logo represents the highest level of
technical performance for enthusiasts and professionals who require suspension systems capable of handling demanding
conditions. The FOX Racing Shox logo is prominently displayed on all of Fox’s products and provides a halo effect for
complementary products.
Strong Blue-Chip Customer Relationships – Given the long history of performance for Fox’s suspension products, OEM
customers seeking the highest level of quality and technical features for suspension have developed strong long-term
relationships with the company.
Business Strategies
Expand Revenues from Powered Vehicles Business – Fox’s focus on developing premier suspension technologies
continues to create complementary opportunities across this segment. For example, Fox currently supplies shocks to Ford’s
Special Vehicle Division specifically for its F-150 SVT Raptor Off-Road Truck. Additionally, Fox is currently in
discussions with participants in numerous other industries including military applications.
Expand Aftermarket Sales – The sale of Aftermarket parts typically carries higher gross margins than a similar OEM
sale. Fox is further investing in its Aftermarket sales infrastructure to foster sales growth in 2011 and beyond. One of the
31
simplest and most effective ways for customers to improve their performance is the purchase and installation of an
aftermarket Fox suspension product when compared to the expense of purchasing an entirely new platform.
International Growth – Due to the successful efforts of Fox’s operations teams, distribution to foreign OEMs and
distributors is well-established. By selectively increasing infrastructure and honing its focus on identified opportunities,
Fox plans to continue its international sales growth. Further, management plans include investigation of other international
market opportunities, such as Asian and South American markets. International sales represented 67%, 69% and 70% of
net sales in fiscal 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
Pursue New Market Trends and Opportunities – New trends in action sports can lead to significant market
opportunities. Fox’s close association with racing and its professionals allows it to see new trends as they emerge.
Depending on the trend, Fox will develop new products that address these needs.
Research and Development
Fox’s products are among the most technically advanced and rigorously engineered in their markets. They are specifically
designed to function and perform under diverse and extreme conditions. Fox’s research and development effort is at the
core of its strategy of product innovation and market leadership. Fox’s products feature a combination of innovative
design, high-quality materials, and superb functionality and performance elements and are recognized as being the leaders
or among the leaders in all of the market segments in which they participate.
Fox has a ten person core research and development team, which has collectively over 172 years of combined industry
experience. In addition to the core engineering group, a large number of other Fox staff members, who also use the
company’s products, contribute to the research and development effort at various stages. This may take the form of initial
brainstorming sessions or ride testing products in development. Product development also includes collaborating with
customers, field testing by sponsored race teams and working with grass roots riders. This feedback helps ensure products
will meet the company’s demanding standards of excellence as well as the constantly changing needs of professional and
recreational end users.
Fox’s research and development activities are supported by state-of-the-art engineering software design tools, integrated
manufacturing facilities and a performance testing center equipped to ensure product safety, durability and superior
performance. The testing center collects data and tests products prior to and after commercial introduction. Suspension
products undergo a variety of rigorous performance and accelerated life tests. Research and development costs totaled $4.2
million, $3.0 million and $2.6 million in each of the years 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
Customers
Fox’s reputation for product quality, durability and technical excellence has resulted in a customer base that includes some
of the world’s leading OEMs and a loyal following of knowledgeable and experienced end users. Fox’s OEM customers
are market leaders in their respective categories, and help define, as well as respond to, consumer trends in their respective
industries. These customers provide exceptional market support for Fox by including the company’s products on their
highest-performing models. OEMs will often use Fox’s components to improve the marketability and demand of their own
products.
Fox sells to over 200 OEM customers and over 7,600 Aftermarket customers across its market segments. One customer
accounted for approximately 11.0%, 10.8% and 10.7% of net sales for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008,
respectively. Fox’s top 10 customers accounted for approximately 53.2%, 50.0% and 48.1% of net sales in 2010, 2009 and
2008. International sales totaled $113.6 million, $84.0 million and $92.5 million in each of the years 2010, 2009 and 2008,
respectively. Sales to Taiwan totaled $49.5 million, $35.6 million and $44.8 million in 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
Sales attributable to countries outside the United States are based on shipment location. The international sales amounts
provided do not necessarily reflect the end customer location as many of our products are assembled at international
locations with the ultimate customer located in the United States.
Sales and Marketing
Fox employs 14 dedicated sales professionals. Each divisional sales person is fully dedicated to servicing either OEM or
Aftermarket customers ensuring that Fox’s customers receive only the most capable person to address their unique needs.
Fox strongly believes that providing the best service to its end customers is essential in maintaining its reputational
excellence in the marketplace. The sales force receives training on the latest Fox products and technologies in addition to
attending trade shows to increase its market knowledge.
32
The primary goal of the marketing program is to strengthen and promote the FOX brand in the marketplace. Fox increases
brand awareness and equity with through a number of marketing channels including: advertisements in publications and
websites; team and individual sponsorships; support and promotion at outdoor events; trade shows; website development;
and dealer support.
Net sales spent on advertising and marketing costs in each of the years 2010, 2009 and 2008 were 1.2%, 1.6% and 2.0%,
respectively.
Fox’s business is somewhat seasonal. Historically, net sales and earnings are highest during the third quarter. We believe
this seasonality is due to delivery of new products containing our shocks related to the new bike season.
Fox had approximately $34.7 million and $24.1 million in firm backlog orders at December 31, 2010 and 2009,
respectively.
Competition
Competition in the high-end performance segment of the suspension market revolves around technical features,
performance and durability, customer service, price and reliable order execution. While price is a factor in all purchasing
decisions, customers consider Fox’s products to be an outstanding value proposition given their significant performance
and other attributes.
Fox competes with several large suspension providers as well as numerous small manufacturers who provide branded and
unbranded products. These competitors can be segmented into the following categories:
Mountain Biking – Fox competes with several companies that manufacture front and rear mountain bike suspension
products. Management believes these include RockShox (a subsidiary of SRAM Corporation), Tenneco Marzocchi S.r.l. (a
subsidiary of Tenneco Inc.), Manitou (a subsidiary of HB Performance Systems), SR Suntour and DT Swiss (a subsidiary
of Vereinigte Drahtwerke AG).
Snowmobiles – Within the snowmobile market, Management believes its main competitor is KYB (Kayaba Industry Co.,
Ltd.). Other suppliers include Öhlins Racing AB, Walker Evans Racing, Works Performance Products and Penske Racing
Shocks / Custom Axis, Inc.
All-Terrain Vehicles – A large percentage of the shocks supplied to OEM ATV manufacturers are the result of either
long-term supplier relationships or captive business units associated with a specific OEM. Alternatively, ATV
manufacturers source suspensions from a variety of suspension manufacturers depending on the final application and
performance requirements.
Fox’s management believes its primary competitor outside of captive OEM suppliers is ZF Sachs (ZF Friedrichshafen
AG). Aftermarket shocks are available from large OEMs plus a number of primarily Aftermarket suppliers including Elka
Suspension Inc., Öhlins Racing AB, Works Performance Products and Penske Racing Shocks / Custom Axis, Inc.
Off-Road Vehicles – Within the off-road vehicle category, Fox competes with both branded and unbranded competitors.
The two largest competitors to Fox in management’s opinion are ThyssenKrupp Bilstein Suspension GmbH (“Bilstein”)
and King Shock Technology, Inc. (“King Shock”). Other competitors include Sway-A-Way, Pro Comp Suspension,
Edelbrock Corporation and Walker Evans Racing.
Suppliers
Fox works closely with its supply base, and depends upon certain suppliers to provide raw inputs, such as forgings and
castings and molded polymers that have been optimized for weight, structural integrity, wear and cost. Fox typically has no
firm contractual sourcing agreements with these suppliers other than purchase orders.
Additionally, Fox internally manufactures over 600 different components. Depending on component requirements, raw
inputs go through a combination of machining processes including computer numeric control machines, drill stations and
lathes. Fox utilizes manufacturing models and workflow analysis tools to minimize bottlenecks and maximize capital asset
utilization. After initial machining, components are then outsourced to specialized manufacturers for plating, grinding,
anodizing and reaming.
Fox’s primary raw materials used in production are aluminum and magnesium. Fox uses multiple suppliers for these raw
materials and believes that these raw materials are in adequate supply and are available from many suppliers at competitive
33
prices. Prices for these materials have been increasing but the company is implementing sourcing strategies and value
engineering initiatives to offset them.
Intellectual Property
Fox relies upon a combination of patents, trademarks, trade names, licensing arrangements, trade secrets, know-how and
proprietary technology in order to secure and protect its intellectual property rights.
Fox’s in-house intellectual property department and in-house counsel diligently protect its new technologies with patents
and trademarks and vigorously defend against patent infringement lawsuits. Fox currently owns 25 patents on proprietary
technologies for shock absorbers and front fork suspension products and has an additional 56 patent pending applications at
the U.S. and European Patent Offices. Fox’s patent portfolio makes it an impediment to competitors to introduce products
with comparable features.
Regulatory Environment
Fox’s manufacturing and assembly operations, its facilities and operations are subject to evolving federal, state and local
environmental and occupational health and safety laws and regulations. These include laws and regulations governing air
emissions, wastewater discharge and the storage and handling of chemicals and hazardous substances. Management
believes that Fox is in compliance, in all material respects, with applicable environmental and occupational health and
safety laws and regulations. New requirements, more stringent application of existing requirements, or discovery of
previously unknown environmental conditions could result in material environmental expenditures in the future.
Additionally, Fox is subject to the jurisdiction of the United States Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) and
other federal, state and foreign regulatory bodies. Under CPSC regulations, a manufacturer of consumer goods is obligated
to notify the CPSC, if, among other things, the manufacturer becomes aware that one of its products has a defect that could
create a substantial risk of injury. If the manufacturer has not already undertaken to do so, the CPSC may require a
manufacturer to recall a product, which may involve product repair, replacement or refund. Fox has never had any of its
products recalled.
Employees
As of December 31, 2010, Fox employed approximately 436 persons. Of these employees, approximately 58 were in sales,
marketing and customer service, 52 were in engineering and 292 were in operations and IT with the remainder serving in
executive and administrative capacities. None of Fox’s employees are subject to collective bargaining agreements. We
believe that Fox’s relationship with its employees is good.
HALO
Overview
Headquartered in Sterling, IL, HALO is an independent provider of customized drop-ship promotional products in the U.S.
and operates under the well-known brand names of HALO and Lee Wayne. Through an extensive group of dedicated sales
professionals, HALO serves as a one-stop shop for over 40,000 customers throughout the U.S. HALO is involved in the
design, sourcing, management and fulfillment of promotional products across several product categories, including apparel,
calendars, writing instruments, drink ware and office accessories. HALO’s sales professionals work with customers and
vendors to develop the most effective means of communicating a logo or marketing message to a target audience. A large
majority of products sold are drop shipped, reducing the company’s inventory risk.
We believe HALO is the largest promotional products business in the customized, drop ship sub-sector of the highly
fragmented $15.9 billion domestic promotional products market. We believe HALO’s size and scale enables specialization
and efficiency in back office functions that cannot be replicated by smaller, independent operators. This scale generates
purchasing power with vendors and allows HALO to consolidate purchases across its client base to achieve improved
product pricing.
For the fiscal years ended December 31, 2010, 2009, and 2008, HALO had net sales of approximately $159.9 million,
$139.3 million and $159.8 million and operating income of $4.9 million $2.8 million and $5.3 million in fiscal 2010, 2009
and 2008, respectively. HALO had total assets of $110.1 million, $107.6 million and $115.6 million at December 31,
2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Net sales from HALO represented 9.6%, 11.2% and 10.4% of our total consolidated
net sales for fiscal 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
34
History of HALO
HALO was founded in 1952 under its predecessor Lee Wayne Corporation. Lee Wayne Corporation was acquired in the
early 1990s by HA-LO Industries, Inc., a provider of advertising and marketing services. In 2004, HALO formed to
acquire the domestic promotional product assets of HA-LO Industries, Inc. and was renamed HALO Branded Solutions,
Inc.
HALO acquired (i) Tasco, a promotional products distributor in 2007, (ii) Goldman Promotions, a promotional products
distributor in April 2008, (iii) the promotional products distributor division of Eskco, Inc in November 2008 and (iv) the
promotional products distributor Ad-Nov in March 2009 and (v) the promotional products distributor Relay Gear in March
2010.
We acquired a majority interest in HALO on February 28, 2007.
Industry
Promotional products provide companies with targeted marketing and long term exposure. In contrast to general advertising,
promotional products enable targeted marketing to individuals and yield long term exposure from repeated use. Growth has
been driven by the efficacy of promotional products in creating and enhancing brand awareness.
The promotional products industry generally involves coordination between suppliers, distributors and account executives.
Suppliers manufacture promotional goods either internally or through outsourced manufacturers and produce catalogs for
account executives to use when selling products. Following receipt of a product order, representatives work with their
respective distributors to administer and process the transaction, typically following up to ensure delivery.
HALO competes in a sub sector of the promotional products market that consists of merchandise which is customized or
decorated with logos, team names or special events. While nearly any consumer product can serve as a marketing tool when
branded, a majority of promotional products sold are in the apparel, writing instruments, calendars, drink ware, business
accessories or bag categories. Management believes the promotional products distribution industry is fragmented, with
approximately 22,000 distributors in the United States, the considerable majority of which are small firms with one to five
account executives, generating sales of under $2.5 million.
The market can be broadly segregated into two large service categories: drop ship and program or fulfillment. A drop ship
order is typically one time in nature and may be related to an event or single marketing campaign. Drop ship distributors do
not take inventory of the product; instead, sales representatives assist customers in designing a solution to achieve its
marketing objective, such as brand or company awareness, customer acquisition or customer retention. Drop ship distributors
then source the product from one of thousands of suppliers to the industry, arrange the necessary embroidering, decorating, or
other customization, and coordinate delivery to the client. Alternatively, providers of fulfillment services develop larger
programs that involve corporate branding or incentive programs. Fulfillment distributors design programs with the customer,
take inventory of product and ship over time to customer locations as requested.
Products and Services
HALO is one of the leading providers of promotional products that stimulate brand awareness, customer acquisition, and
customer retention. HALO offers drop ship and fulfillment services, although drop ship services comprise a large majority
of revenue. Through a sales force that has both broad geographic coverage and deep industry expertise, HALO provides
promotional products to thousands of companies in the U.S. and Canada.
Categories
Apparel
Business Accessories
Calendars
Writing Instruments
Recognition Awards
Other Items
Examples of Common Promotional Products
Examples
Jackets, sweaters, hats, golf shirts
Calculators, briefcases, desk accessories
Wall and desk calendars, appointment planners
Pens, pencils, markers, highlighters
Trophies, plaques
Crystal ware, key chains, watches, mugs, golf accessories
35
HALO and its sales professionals assist customers in identifying and designing promotional products that increase the
awareness and appeal of brands, products, companies and organizations. HALO sales people regularly play a consultative
role with customers in the development of promotional materials, resulting in an array of product sourcing. HALO also
provides fulfillment services on a selective basis.
As a result of its focus on automation, management has implemented what it believes to be an industry leading and
proprietary information system to supplement HALO’s customer service operation. The system is tailored to support the
unique needs of its customers and provides the flexibility required to integrate an acquisition or respond to a customer
demand. The information system supports all aspects of the business, including order processing, billing, accounting,
fulfillment and inventory management.
Competitive Strengths
HALO has established itself as a leading distributor in the promotional products industry. HALO’s management believes
the following factors differentiate it from many industry competitors.
• Industry Leading, Scalable Back Office Infrastructure — HALO’s management team believes that an important
factor in attracting and retaining high quality account executives is providing an efficient and effective order
processing and administrative system. HALO’s customer service organization provides critical support functions for
its sales force including order entry, product sourcing, order tracking, vendor payment, customer billing and
collections. HALO’s scale in the industry has allowed it to make information technology and personnel investments
to create a sophisticated infrastructure that management believes differentiates it from many smaller industry
participants.
• Diverse Customer Base Characterized by Long-Standing Relationships — HALO’s revenue base possesses little
customer, end market or geographic concentration. It currently does business with over 40,000 customers in various
end markets. For the fiscal years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, HALO’s top ten customers represented
less than 20% of its revenues. HALO’s team of account executives are often deeply involved in their local
communities and possess deep and long standing relationships with customers of all sizes.
• Extensive Relationships with a Broad Base of Suppliers — HALO’s management believes its relationships with a
wide range of suppliers of promotional products allows HALO to offer its end customers the most complete line of
items in the industry.
Business Strategies
• Attract and Retain Account Executives — As HALO’s infrastructure is relatively fixed, it derives significant
incremental contribution from the addition of account executives. Further, HALO’s management believes it has
developed a combination of service and compensation that allows it to offer account executives a value proposition
superior to those offered by its competitors.
• Optimize the Productivity of Account Executives — The management team of HALO continuously strives to
increase the productivity of its account executives. HALO routinely provides its account executives with marketing
support tools and training. In addition, for larger accounts, HALO works with account executives to develop
proprietary solutions that allow customers to better measure and track their programs, thereby increasing their
loyalty.
• Selectively Acquire and Integrate — HALO’s management believes that HALO is well positioned to take advantage
of the industry’s fragmentation and economies of scale. In the past, HALO has achieved significant synergies by
acquiring and integrating other distributors. Recognizing this opportunity, HALO’s management team is constantly
evaluating potential acquisition opportunities. We believe that current economic conditions may enhance our
opportunities to make desirable acquisitions.
Customers
HALO has developed relationships with a diverse base of over 40,000 customers. HALO’s customers include a number of
Fortune 500 companies as well as privately held businesses that rely on HALO as their sole marketing services provider.
36
Sales and Marketing
HALO’s revenue is generated through its sales force, which consults directly with clients to develop a solution that best
meets their needs for each order and/or utilizes HALO’s infrastructure to build customized websites that act as online
company stores. HALO’s back office receives orders from internal sales representatives via phone, fax or email. HALO’s
tracking systems allow sales representatives to ensure that products are drop shipped directly from the vendor to the
customer on time. HALO’s salespeople are based throughout the U.S. in order to better serve a geographically diverse
customer base.
HALO historically recognizes approximately 70% of its net sales in the fiscal quarters ended September and December due
to calendar sales and corporate demand during the holiday season.
The following represents product category sales as a percent of gross sales by product in fiscal 2010, 2009 and 2008:
Product category
% of sales
2010
% of sales
2009
% of sales
2008
Apparel
Office accessories
Bags
Writing instruments
Calendars
Jewelry/awards
Drink ware
Other
19.5%
11.0%
11.0%
11.0%
11.0%
1.0%
7.0%
28.5%
100.0%
19.5%
12.0%
11.0%
11.0%
11.9%
1.0%
5.0%
28.6%
100.0%
19.9%
15.1%
14.1%
13.8%
11.6%
5.0%
4.0%
16.5%
100.0%
Substantially all revenue is derived from sales within the United States.
HALO had approximately $14.4 million and $14.9 million in firm backlog orders at December 31, 2010 and 2009,
respectively.
Competition
We believe HALO is the largest drop ship promotional products distributor in the U.S. Management believes the promotional
products distribution industry is fragmented, with over 22,000 distributors in the United States, the considerable majority of
which are small firms with one to five account executives, generating sales of under $2.5 million. Industry players can be
segmented into the following categories, or a combination thereof:
• Full Service – Companies that provide a wide array of services to a range of customers, including multinational
clients. Full service offerings include both the drop shipment and fulfillment business models. HALO is a full
service distributor.
• Inventory Based – Distributors that provide inventory programs for large corporations. Inventory based providers
are generally capital intensive, often requiring a large investment to maintain a broad inventory of SKUs.
• Franchisers – Distributors that process and finance orders for a franchise fee. Franchisers do not offer back office
support and typically attract distributors with lower credit profiles and those with available time to perform
customer service functions.
• Consumer Products Manufacturers – Some customer product manufacturers provide promotional products.
Consumer product manufacturers, for whom promotional products is a non-core business, do not customarily invest
in the necessary infrastructure to meet the support needs of industry sales professionals.
Competition in the promotional product industry revolves around product assortment, price, customer service and reliable
order execution. In addition, given the intimate relationships account executives enjoy with their customers, industry
participants also compete to retain and recruit top earners who possess a meaningful existing book of business.
37
Suppliers
HALO purchases products and services from over 4,000 companies. One supplier accounted for approximately 7% of
purchases in the year ended December 31, 2010. If circumstances required us to replace this supplier we believe we could
do so with minimal interruption in our product flow and at a negligible incremental cost.
Employees
As of December 31, 2010, HALO employed approximately 487 full-time employees and approximately 645 independent
sales representatives. None of HALO’s employees are subject to collective bargaining agreements. We believe that
HALO’s relationship with its employees is good.
Liberty Safe
Overview
Liberty Safe, headquartered in Payson, Utah and founded in 1988, is the premier designer, manufacturer and marketer of
home, gun and office safes in North America. From its over 200,000 square foot manufacturing facility, Liberty Safe
produces a wide range of home, office and gun safe models in a broad assortment of sizes, features and styles ranging from
an entry level product to good, better and best products. Products are marketed under the Liberty Safe brand, as well as a
portfolio of licensed and private label brands, including Remington, Cabela’s and John Deere. Liberty Safe’s products are
the market share leader and are sold through an independent dealer network (“Dealer sales”) in addition to various sporting
goods and home improvement retail outlets (“Non-Dealer sales” or “National sales”). Liberty Safe has the largest
independent dealer network in the industry.
Approximately 62% of Liberty Safe’s net sales are National sales and 38% are Dealer sales.
For the full fiscal years ended December 31, 2010 and 2009, Liberty Safe had net sales of approximately $64.9 million and
$73.8 million, respectively and pro-forma operating income of $2.8 million and $5.9 million, respectively. Liberty Safe had
total assets of $83.3 million at December 31, 2010. Net sales (from acquisition date to December 31, 2010) from Liberty
Safe represented 3.0% our consolidated net sales for the year ended December 31, 2010.
History of Liberty Safe
The Liberty Safe brand and its leading market share has been built over a 22 year history of superior product quality,
engineering and design innovation, and leading customer service and sales support. Liberty Safe has a long history of
continuous improvement and innovative approaches to sales and marketing, product development and manufacturing
processes. Significant investments over the last five years have solidified Liberty Safe’s reputation for providing substantial
value to retailers and enhanced its long-standing position as the leading producer of premium home, office and gun safes.
Liberty Safe started operations in 1988 and throughout 1991 and 1992, increased its distribution capabilities, establishing a
regional sales force model to better serve the Dealer channel. This expanded sales coverage gave Liberty Safe the needed
organizational structure to provide ready support and products nationwide, helping to establish its reputation for service to
its customers. On the strength of its growing reputation and national sales presence, Liberty Safe achieved the status of the
#1 selling safe company in America in 1994, according to Sargent and Greenleaf data, the major lock supplier to the
industry, a position that it has maintained to this day. In 2001, Liberty Safe opened its current 205,000 square foot state-of-
the-art facility in Payson, UT and consolidated all of its manufacturing and distribution operations to a centralized location.
As the only facility in the industry utilizing significant automation and a streamlined roll-form manufacturing process, it
represented a significant step forward when compared to the production capabilities of its competitors. Incremental
investments following the consolidation have solidified Liberty Safe’s position as the low-cost and most efficient domestic
manufacturer.
Beginning in 2007, Liberty Safe reorganized its manufacturing process, retooled its product line for increased
standardization throughout the production process and realigned employee incentives to labor efficiency. These
improvements enabled Liberty Safe to shift from build-to-stock production to build-to-order with shorter lead time
requirements, greater labor efficiency and reduced working capital.
Compass Diversified Holdings purchased a majority interest in Liberty Safe on March 31, 2010.
38
Industry
Currently, Liberty Safe competes in the broadly defined North American safe industry which includes fire and document
safes, media and data safes, depository safes, gun safes and cabinets, home safes and hotel safes. According to Global
Industry Analysts, (“GIA”) March 2008 report, the global safe industry was estimated to be approximately $2.9 billion of
wholesale sales in 2008, and grew consistently at an estimated CAGR of 4.3% from 2000 to 2008. Consistent growth has
been one of the defining characteristics of this industry, and GIA anticipates it will continue at a rate of 4.4% from 2008
through 2015.
The North American wholesale safe market is estimated at $705 million in sales in 2008, with the U.S. market comprising
the single largest safe market in the world. The industry exhibited stable growth from 2000 to 2008 with an estimated
CAGR of 4.7%, and is expected to reach approximately $954 million by 2015, exhibiting a long-term (2000 to 2015)
CAGR of 4.6%.
Products & Services
Liberty Safe offers home, office and gun safes with minimum retail prices ranging from $400 to $8,000.
Liberty Safe produces 23 home and gun safe models with the most varied assortment of sizes, feature upgrades, accessories
and styling options in the industry. Liberty Safe’s premium home and gun safe product line covers sizes from 12 cu. ft. to
50 cu. ft. with smaller sizes available for its personal home safe. Liberty Safe markets its products under Company-owned
brands and a portfolio of licensed and private label brands, including Remington, Cabela’s, John Deere and others. Liberty
Safe also sells commercial safes, vault doors and a number of accessories and options. The overwhelming majority of
revenue is derived from the sales of safes.
Competitive Strengths
#1 Premium Home and Gun Safe Brand with Strong Momentum in the Market - Liberty Safe achieved the status of #1
selling safe company in America in 1994 (per statistics provided by Sargent & Greenleaf, the primary lock supplier to the
industry) and maintains this prominent position today. The market for premium home and gun safes is highly fragmented,
and management estimates that Liberty Safe’s net sales are over twice those of its next largest competitor in the category.
Liberty Safe continues to gain market share from the various smaller participants who lack the distribution and sales and
marketing capabilities of Liberty Safe.
State-of-the-Art and Scalable Operations - Over the past five years, management has constructed a highly scalable
operational platform and infrastructure that has positioned Liberty Safe for substantial sales growth and enhanced
profitability in the coming years. Under current ownership, the company has transitioned itself from a manufacturing
oriented operating culture to a demand-based, sales-oriented organization. The company’s strategic transition required the
implementation of a demand-based sales and operating platform, which included (i) new equipment to drive automation and
capacity improvements; (ii) reengineered product lines and production processes to drive efficiency through greater
standardization in production; and (iii) new employee incentives tied to labor efficiency, which has improved worker
performance as well as employee attitude. These initiatives are enhanced by an experienced senior executive team, a
balanced sourcing and in-house manufacturing production strategy, advanced distribution capabilities and sophisticated IT
systems. Liberty has combined its demand-based sales and operating initiatives with upgraded production equipment to
drive multiple operational improvements. Since 2007, the company has reduced its lead times from 4 – 6 weeks to
approximately seven days. These shorter production cycles coupled with better demand forecasting have significantly
reduced working capital needs for the business by reducing domestic inventory from approximately 7,000 units to 3,000
units since 2007. Improved automation and workflow organization have decreased labor hours over 25% per safe from 8.3
in 2005 to 5.9 in 2010. These recent initiatives combined with the company’s cumulative historical investments in
operational capabilities have created a lasting competitive advantage over its smaller competitors, who utilize labor-
intensive operations and lack the company’s lean manufacturing culture.
Liberty Safe maintains an optimal mix of in-house and Asian-sourced manufacturing to maximize margins and improve its
ability to meet customer inventory needs. The company has leased for the past nine years a manufacturing and distribution
facility in Payson, Utah that represents the most scalable domestic facility in the industry. The establishment of an
exclusive Asian-sourcing arrangement over the past six years has allowed Liberty Safe to expand its product offering to
include smaller safe lines. Because of Liberty Safe’s ability to manufacture medium to large sized safes at a lower cost at its
domestic facility, the company sources all of its small safes (below 17 size model) and shifts production for its 20 size
models between the two facilities based on current demand and product mix. The company’s multi-faceted production
capabilities allow for substantial flexibility and scalable capacity, thus assuring a level of supply chain execution far
superior to any of its competitors.
39
Reputation for High Quality Products - Liberty Safe is passionate about offering only the highest quality products on a
consistent basis, which over the years has gained it an enviable reputation and a key point of differentiation from its
competitors. Liberty Safe distinguishes its products through tested security and fire protection features and industry leading
design focused on functionality and aesthetics. The design of its safes meet rigorous internal benchmarks for security and
fire protection, while receiving certification from Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (“UL”), the leading product safety standard
certification, for its security capabilities. Additionally, Liberty Safe’s investment in accessories and feature options have
made Liberty safes the most visually appealing and functional in the industry, while providing more customized solutions
for retailers and consumers.
Trusted Supplier to National Retailer and Dealer Accounts - Liberty Safe's comprehensive, high-quality product offering
and sophisticated sales and marketing programs have made it a critical supplier to a diverse group of national accounts and
dealers. Initially a key supplier primarily to the dealer channel, it has expanded its business with national accounts, such as
Gander Mountain, Cabela’s, Sam’s Club and Lowe’s. Liberty Safe provides a superior value proposition as a supplier for
its national retailers and dealers via its well-recognized brands, lifetime product warranty, tailored merchandising, category
management solutions and superior supply chain execution. Further, Liberty Safe’s products generate more profitable floor-
space, with both high absolute gross profit and retail margins over 30%. High retail profitability plus increased inventory
turns has entrenched Liberty Safe as a key partner in customers’ success in the safe category. As a core element of building
its relationships, Liberty Safe has invested significantly in making its retailers better salespeople through a proprietary suite
of training tools, including in-store training, new product demonstrations, online education programs and sales strategy
literature.
Business Strategies
Liberty has experienced strong historical growth while executing on multiple new sales and operational initiatives,
positioning it to continue to increase its scale and improve profitability. Liberty’s growth strategy is rooted in the sales and
marketing and operational initiatives that have spurred its expansion into new accounts and increased penetration of
existing accounts. Liberty has significant opportunity in its existing channels to continue to build upon its already strong
market share. In addition to growth within its current channels, the Liberty’s core competencies can be successfully applied
to ventures in the broader security equipment market. Liberty has explored certain of these opportunities, but due to the
prioritization of operational initiatives and expansion opportunities within existing channels, they have not been
aggressively pursued. Potential near-to-medium term areas for expansion of Liberty’s platform include:
• Expand Liberty’s product line into the broader home and office safe market through current customers or new
distribution strategies;
• Enter the military secure enclosures market, about which Liberty has recently been approached;
• Further develop international distribution by entering new countries and expanding current limited presence in
Canada, Mexico and Europe;
• Enter the residential security market through a strategic partnership with a provider of residential security service
solutions to provide a more complete physical and electronic security solution; and
• Acquire businesses within the premium home and gun safe industry and/or leverage Liberty’s platform into new
products or channels.
Customers
Liberty Safe prides itself on its ability to provide high-quality, innovative products and industry-leading customer service.
As a result, it has fostered long-term relationships with leading national retailers (National or Non-Dealer) as well as
numerous Dealers, enabling Liberty Safe to achieve considerable brand awareness and channel exposure. Traditionally, the
Dealer channel has accounted for the majority of the Liberty Safe’s net sales, but through significant investment in its
national accounts sales and marketing efforts, Liberty Safe has also become the leading supplier to National accounts.
Expansion into National accounts is part of Liberty Safe’s strategy to reach a broader customer base and more varied
demographics. National account customers include sporting goods retailers, farm & fleet retailers, home improvement
retailers and club retailers. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, Liberty Safe had 19 and 22 National account customers,
respectively, that are estimated to account for approximately 62% of net sales.
Dealer customers include local hunting and fishing stores, hardware stores and numerous other local, independent store
models. As of December 31, 2010, there were 322 dealers that accounted for 38% of 2010 net sales.
Liberty Safe’s largest customer accounted for approximately 14.5% and 15.2% of net sales in 2010 and 2009, respectively.
40
Sales & Marketing
Liberty Safe possesses robust sales and marketing capabilities in the safe industry. Liberty Safe utilizes separate sales teams
for National accounts and Dealers, which enables it to provide more focused and effective strategies to manage and develop
relationships within different channels. Liberty Safe has made significant recent investments in the development of a
comprehensive sales and marketing program including merchandising, sales training and tools, promotions and supply
chain management. Through these various initiatives, Liberty Safe offers highly adaptable programs to suit the varying
needs of its retailers. This has enabled Liberty Safe to become a key supplier across diverse channels.
Liberty Safe’s comprehensive service offering makes it uniquely suited to service national retailers in a variety of channels.
Liberty Safe has designed a Store-within-a-Store program and a more comprehensive Safe Category Management program
to build relationships and increase its importance to retailers. Primarily utilized with sporting goods retailers, the Store-
within-a-Store concept successfully integrates the effective sales strategies of its dealers for selling a high-price point, niche
product into a larger store format. Centered on communicating the benefits of its products to customers, the program
enables retailers to more effectively up-sell customers through a good-better-best merchandising platform, increasing
margin and inventory turns for its retailers. Liberty’s Safe Category Management program builds on the Store-within-a-
Store concept to provide greater sales and marketing control and more complete inventory management solutions. This
program facilitates Liberty Safe becoming the sole supplier to a retailer, providing large incremental expansion and stronger
relationships at accounts. No other market participant has the capabilities to provide a comprehensive suite of customer
service solutions to national retailers, such as customized SKU programs, a Store-within-a-Store program and a Safe
Category Management program.
Competition
Liberty Safe is the premier brand in the premium home and gun safe industry, with an estimated 34% market share in the
category, two times the next competitor. Liberty is in a class by itself when it comes to manufacturing technology and
efficiency and supply chain capabilities. Competitors are generally more heavily focused on either smaller, sourced safes or
large, domestically produced safes. Competitive domestic manufacturers run “blacksmith” type factories that are small,
inefficient and require a tremendous amount of manual labor that produces inconsistent product. In addition, many of
Liberty’s competitors are directly tied to a third-party brand, such as Browning, Winchester or RedHead / Bass Pro.
Liberty competes with other safe manufacturers based on price, breadth of product line, technology, product supply chain
capabilities and marketing capabilities.
Channel diversity in the premium home and gun safe industry is rare, with most companies having greater concentration in
either the dealer channel or national accounts, but rarely having the supply chain capabilities or sales and marketing
programs to service both channels effectively. Major competitors have limited sales and marketing departments and
programs, making it difficult for them to expand sales and gain market share.
Suppliers
Liberty’s primary raw materials are steel, sheetrock, wood, locks, handles and fabric, for which it receives multiple
shipments per week. Materials, on average, account for approximately 71% of the total cost of a domestically produced
safe, with steel accounting for approximately 50% of material costs. Liberty purchases its materials from a combination of
domestic and foreign suppliers. Historically, Liberty Safe has been able to pass on raw material price increases to its
customers.
Liberty purchases approximately 20 million pounds of steel each year primarily from domestic suppliers, using contracts
that lock in prices two to three quarters in advance. Liberty Safe purchases coiled and flat steel in gauges from four to 14.
Liberty Safe specifies rigorous requirements related to surface and edge finish and grain direction. All steel products are
checked to ASTM specification and dimensional tolerances before entering the production process.
Liberty Safe had approximately $7.3 million and $2.1 million in firm backlog orders at December 31, 2010 and 2009,
respectively.
Intellectual Property
Liberty Safe relies upon a combination of patents and trademarks in order to secure and protect its intellectual property
rights.
41
Liberty Safe currently owns 25 trademarks and 2 patents on proprietary technologies for safe products and has an additional
2 patent pending applications at the U.S. Patent Offices.
Research and Development
Liberty’s approach to R&D and innovation drives customer satisfaction and differentiation from competitive products.
Liberty is the engineering and design leader in its sector, due to a history of first-to-market features and standard-setting
design improvements. The Company’s proactive solicitation of feedback and constant interaction with consumers and retail
customers across diverse channels and geographies enables the Company to stay at the forefront of customer demands. The
Company’s approach to product development increases the likelihood of market acceptance by creating products that are
more relevant to consumers’ demands.
The below charts represents some of the recent innovations in product design (and functionality) that have come about from
the Company’s dedication to R&D:
Product
Function / benefit
Cool Pocket™
Integrated lighting system
Palusol™ Heat activated door
Liberty Tough Doors™
Marble gloss powder coat paint
4-in-1 Flex™ storage system
Door panels
Keeps documents 50% cooler than rest of safe
Automatic on/off interior lights
Seal expands to 7 times its size in a fire
Enhanced protection against side bolt prying
Provides smooth glass finish
Adjustable shelving configurations
Pocket variety to store handguns and other items
In addition to product enhancements, new products, such as the Fatboy® Series, have been launched from Liberty’s
commitment to R&D.
Based on consumer feedback, Liberty saw demand for safes that were capable of holding more valuables within the safe but
at a lower price point than Liberty’s current large safe models. Within 3 months of conception, the Company introduced the
successful Fatboy® series in February 2009. The Fatboy® and Fatboy Jr.® models, which are wider and deeper than
traditional safes, were a natural complement to Liberty’s current products, targeted at a specific customer need. The
introduction and success of the Fatboy® series demonstrates Liberty’s proven ability to recognize market opportunities,
engineer a responsive product and execute market delivery.
Regulatory Environment
Liberty Safes’ management believes that Liberty Safe is in compliance, in all material respects, with applicable
environmental and occupational health and safety laws and regulations.
Employees
Liberty Safe is led by a highly knowledgeable management team of sporting goods and consumer products industry
veterans that possess a balanced combination of industry experience and functional expertise. The majority of the team
members have worked together since 2000.
As of December 31, 2010, Liberty Safe had 187 full-time employees and 49 temporary employees. The Company’s labor
force is non-union. Management believes that Liberty Safe has an excellent relationship with its employees.
Staffmark
Overview
Staffmark, headquartered in Cincinnati, Ohio, is a provider of temporary staffing services in the United States. Staffmark
currently operates under the brand name Staffmark, (see page 51 “rebranding of CBS Personnel”). Staffmark also provides
its clients with other complementary human resource service offerings such as employee leasing services, permanent
staffing and temporary-to-hire placement services. Staffmark operated more than 190 branch locations in various cities in
42
29 states during 2010. Staffmark and its subsidiaries have been associated with quality service in their markets for more
than 30 years. Staffmark is one of the top 10 commercial staffing companies in the United States. Staffmark Holdings, Inc
acquired Staffmark Investment LLC, a large privately held provider of temporary staffing services in January 2008. Find
more information at www.staffmark.com.
Staffmark serves approximately 6,000 corporate and small business clients and on an average week places over 41,000
temporary employees in a broad range of industries, including manufacturing, transportation, retail, distribution,
warehousing, automotive supply, construction, industrial, healthcare and financial sectors. We believe the quality of
Staffmark’s branch operations and its strong sales force provides it with a competitive advantage over other staffing
services. Staffmark’s senior management, collectively, has over 70 years of experience in the human resource outsourcing
industry and other closely related industries.
For each of the fiscal years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, Staffmark had revenues totaling approximately $1.0
billion, $745.3 million and $1.0 billion, and operating income (loss) of $25.2 million, $(55.6) million and $16.1 million,
respectively, on a pro-forma basis, as if Staffmark Holdings, Inc had acquired Staffmark Investment LLC on January 1,
2008. Staffmark had total assets of $292.9 million, $277.7 million and $329.4 million at December 31, 2010, 2009 and
2008, respectively. Revenues from Staffmark represented 60.5%, 59.7% and 65.4% of our consolidated net sales for 2010,
2009 and 2008, respectively.
History of Staffmark
In August 1999, CGI acquired Columbia Staffing through a newly formed holding company. Columbia Staffing was a
provider of light industrial, clerical, medical, and technical personnel to clients throughout the southeast. In October 2000,
CGI acquired through the same holding company CBS Personnel Services, LLC, a Cincinnati-based provider of human
resources outsourcing. CBS Personnel Services began operations in 1971 and was a provider of temporary staffing services
in Ohio, Kentucky and Indiana, with a particularly strong presence in the metropolitan markets of Cincinnati, Dayton,
Columbus, Lexington, Louisville, and Indianapolis. The name of the holding company that made these acquisitions was
later changed to CBS Personnel Holdings, Inc. In May of 2010, the name of the holding company was changed again to
Staffmark Holdings, Inc.
In 2004, Staffmark Holdings, Inc. expanded geographically through the acquisition of Venturi Staffing Partners (“VSP”),
formerly a wholly owned subsidiary of Venturi Partners Inc. VSP was a provider of temporary staffing, temp-to-hire and
direct hire services operating through branch offices located primarily in economically diverse metropolitan markets
including Boston, New York, Atlanta, Charlotte, Houston and Dallas, as well as both Southern and Northern California.
Approximately 60% of VSP’s temporary staffing revenue related to clerical staffing, 24% related to light industrial staffing
and the remaining 16% related to niche/other. Based on its geographic presence, VSP was a complementary acquisition for
Staffmark Holdings, Inc. as their combined operations did not overlap and the merger created a more national presence for
Staffmark.
In November 2006, Staffmark Holdings, Inc. acquired substantially all of the assets of Strategic Edge Solutions (“SES”).
This acquisition gave Staffmark Holdings, Inc. a presence in the Baltimore, MD area while significantly increasing its
presence in the Chicago, IL area. SES derived the majority of its revenues from the light industrial market.
On January 21, 2008, Staffmark Holdings, Inc. acquired Staffmark Investment LLC and Staffmark Investment LLC became
a wholly-owned subsidiary of Staffmark Holdings, Inc. Staffmark Investment LLC was a leading provider of commercial
staffing services in the United States. Staffmark Investment LLC provided staffing services in over 29 states through more
than 200 branches and on-site locations. The majority of Staffmark Investment LLC’s revenues were derived from light
industrial staffing, with the balance of revenues derived from administrative and transportation staffing, permanent
placement services and managed solutions. Similar to Staffmark Holdings, Inc., Staffmark Investment LLC was one of the
largest privately held staffing companies in the United States.
We purchased a majority interest in Staffmark Holdings, Inc. on May 16, 2006.
In May 2010, the name of the holding company was changed from CBS Personnel Holdings, Inc. to Staffmark Holdings
Inc.
Industry
According to Staffing Industry Analysts, Inc., the staffing industry generated approximately $92.3 billion in revenues in
2009. The staffing industry is comprised of four product lines: (i) temporary staffing; (ii) employee leasing; (iii) direct hire;
and (iv) outplacement, representing approximately 77%, 11%, 10% and 2% of the market, respectively. The temporary
staffing business declined by 26.6% in 2009 according to Staffing Industry Analysts, Inc. Over 98% of Staffmark’s
revenues are generated through temporary staffing.
43
Staffmark competes largely in the light industrial and clerical categories of the temporary staffing industry. The light
industrial category is comprised of unskilled and semi-skilled workers in manufacturing, distribution, logistics and other
similar industries. The clerical category is comprised of administrative personnel, data entry professionals, call center
employees, receptionists, clerks and similar employees.
According to the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, or BLS, net employment in the Temporary Help Services industry has
grown by approximately 70.1% from 1990 to 2009. Further, BLS has projected that the employment services sector is
expected to be the second fastest growing sector of the economy for employment growth between 2006 and 2016.
Companies today are operating in a more global and competitive environment, which requires them to respond quickly to
fluctuating demand for their products and services. As a result of the recent economic recession (2008-2009) companies
seek greater workforce flexibility translating to an increasing demand for temporary staffing services. The Temporary
Help Services Industry is cyclical though, and through September 2009, net employment declined by approximately 34.9%
before beginning to trend upward from October 2009 through December 2010.
According to BLS data from January 2011, the number of unemployed workers increased on an annualized basis from 14.3
million unemployed workers during 2009 to 14.8 million during 2010 while employment of temporary workers increased
by approximately 300,000 on an annualized basis during that same period. We believe this growing demand for temporary
staffing should remain consistent in the near future as temporary staffing becomes an integral component of corporate
human capital strategy.
Services
Staffmark provides temporary staffing services tailored to meet each client’s unique staffing requirements. Staffmark
maintains a strong reputation in its markets for providing complete staffing services that includes both high quality
candidates and superior client service. Staffmark’s management believes it is one of only a few staffing services companies
in each of its markets that is capable of fulfilling the staffing requirements of both small, local clients and larger, regional or
national accounts. To position itself as a key provider of human resources to its clients, Staffmark has developed an
approach to service that focuses on:
•
•
providing excellent service to existing clients in a consistent and efficient manner;
cross selling service offerings to existing clients to increase revenue per client;
• marketing services to prospective clients to expand the client base; and
•
providing incentives to employees through well-balanced incentive and bonus plans to encourage increased sales
per client and the establishment of new client relationships.
Staffmark offers its clients a broad range of staffing services including the following:
•
•
•
temporary staffing services in categories such as light industrial, clerical, transportation, professional and cost-per-
unit staffing;
employee leasing and related administrative services; and
temporary-to-hire and direct hire services.
Temporary Staffing Services
Staffmark endeavors to understand and address the individual staffing needs of its clients and has the ability to serve a wide
variety of clients, from small companies with specific personnel needs to large companies with extensive and varied
requirements. Staffmark devotes significant resources to the development of customized programs designed to fulfill the
client’s need for certain services with quality personnel in a prompt and efficient manner. Staffmark’s primary temporary
staffing categories are described below.
These categories have been changed from those presented in prior years. Specialty lines, which include transportation,
professional and cost-per-unit staffing, has experienced significant growth, and that category will continue to be a strategic
focus on an ongoing basis. As a result, Staffmark has revised its categories to align with that strategic direction. Historical
information presented has been updated for comparative purposes to reflect this change.
• Light Industrial — A substantial portion of Staffmark’s temporary staffing revenues are derived from the
placement of low-to mid-skilled temporary workers in the light industrial category, which comprises primarily the
distribution (“pick-and-pack” and forklift) and light manufacturing (such as assembly-line work in factories)
44
sectors of the economy. In addition Staffmark provides contract employees for positions such as line supervisors,
operations managers and quality control personnel. Approximately 72%, 68% and 69% of Staffmark’s temporary
staffing revenues were derived from light industrial in the years 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
• Clerical/Administrative — Staffmark provides temporary workers that perform clerical, administrative, contact
center, and healthcare office support services. Administrative workers are often employed at business operations
centers and corporate offices. Approximately 18%, 22% and 23% of Staffmark’s temporary staffing revenues were
derived from clerical/administrative in the years 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
•
Specialty Lines — Staffmark provides contract employees in specialty lines such as Transportation, Output
Solutions and Professional Services.
o Transportation – Staffmark is a large national supplier of drivers in the staffing industry. We provide fully
screened drivers that meet all DOT requirements through a network of 20 offices across the U.S..
o Output Solutions – provides contract employees that perform specific functions under Staffmark
supervision to meet production contract requirements for clients. Clients are charged a per unit cost versus
an hourly bill rate most common in the staffing industry.
o Professional Services – Staffmark provides contract services for higher skilled professionals in the
Engineering, IT, Finance and Accounting and Corporate Services disciplines.
Approximately 7%, 6% and 6% of Staffmark’s temporary staffing revenues were derived from Specialty Lines for
the fiscal years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
• Other — Staffmark provides administrative services to its clients by functioning as a managed services provider.
These services include managing other staffing firms as second source providers and/or payroll services. By
having Staffmark manage second source providers, the customer can rely on one company to provide all temporary
staffing needs by filling those needs either with Staffmark's employees or from temporary employees provided by
other staffing firms. Payroll service employees are recruited by the client and then become employees of Staffmark
with all employment responsibilities. Approximately 3%, 2% and 2% of Staffmark’s temporary staffing revenues
were derived from Other for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
As part of its service offerings, Staffmark provides an on-site program to clients employing, generally 75 to 100, or more of
its temporary employees. The on-site program manager generally works full-time at the client’s location to help manage
the client’s temporary staffing and related human resources needs and provides detailed administrative support and
reporting systems, which reduce the client’s workload and costs while allowing its management to focus on increasing
productivity and revenues. Staffmark’s management believes this on-site program offering creates strong relationships
with its clients by providing consistency and quality in the management of clients’ human resources and administrative
functions. In addition, through its on-site program, Staffmark often gains visibility into the demand for temporary staffing
services in new markets, which has helped management identify possible areas for geographic expansion.
Employee Leasing Services
Employee Leasing Services while accounting for less than 1% of Staffmark’s total revenue provides a valuable
complementary product offering to its temporary staffing services. Through the employee leasing and administrative
service offerings of its Employee Management Services, or EMS, division, Staffmark provides administrative services,
handling the client’s payroll, risk management, unemployment services, human resources support and employee benefit
programs, which in turn results in reduced administrative requirements for employers and, most importantly, by having
EMS take over the non-productive administrative burdens of an organization, affords clients the ability to focus on their
core businesses.
EMS also offers a full line of benefits for employers to provide to their employees, including medical, dental, vision, disability,
life insurance, 401(k) retirement and other premium options. As a result of economies of scale, clients are offered multiple
plan and premium options at affordable rates. Staffmark’s clients have the flexibility to determine what benefits to offer and
how to implement the program in order to attract more qualified employees.
Temporary-to-Hire and Direct Hire Services
Complementary to its temporary staffing and employee leasing services, Staffmark offers temporary-to-hire and direct hire
services, often as a result of requests made through its temporary staffing activities. In addition, temporary workers will
sometimes be hired on a full time basis by the clients to whom they are assigned. Staffmark earns fees for direct hires, in
addition to the revenues generated from providing these workers on a temporary basis before they are hired as full time
employees.
45
Competitive Strengths
Staffmark has established itself as strong and dependable providers of staffing and other services by responding to its
customers’ staffing needs in a timely and cost effective manner. A key to Staffmark’s success has been its long history as
well as the number of offices it operates in each of its markets. This strategy has allowed Staffmark to build a premium
reputation in each of its markets and has resulted in the following competitive strengths:
• Large Employee Database/Customer List — Over the course of its history, Staffmark’s management believes
Staffmark has built a significant presence in most of its markets in terms of both clients and employees. Staffmark
is successful in recruiting additional employees because of its reputation as having numerous job openings with a
wide variety of clients. Staffmark attracts clients due in part to its large database of reliable employees with wide
ranging skill sets. Staffmark’s employee database and client list have been built over a number of years in each of
its markets and serve as a major competitive strength in most of its markets.
• Higher Operating Margins — By establishing multiple offices in the majority of the markets in which it operates,
Staffmark is able to better leverage its selling, general and administrative expenses at the regional and field level
and create higher operating income margins than its less dense competitors.
•
Scalable Business Model — By having multiple office locations in each of its markets, Staffmark is able to
quickly scale its business model in both good and bad economic environments. In response to the recent economic
downturn, Staffmark enacted a successful strategy which included reducing costs and consolidating offices. As the
economy improves, Staffmark has not abandoned the market and therefore can take advantage of the upturn in
business.
• Marketing Synergies — By having multiple offices in the majority of its markets, Staffmark allocates additional
resources to marketing and selling and amortizes those costs over a larger office network. For example, while
many of its competitors exclusively use selling branch managers who split time between operations and sales,
Staffmark also invests in a dedicated sales force that is focused on bringing in new sales.
Business Strategies
Staffmark’s business strategy is to (i) leverage its position in its existing markets, (ii) grow specialty lines of business
through cross selling, and (iii) pursue and selectively acquire other staffing resource providers.
•
Invest in its Existing Markets — In many of its existing markets, Staffmark has multiple branch locations.
Staffmark plans on continuing to invest in these existing markets through the opening of additional branch
locations and the hiring of additional sales and operations employees when it is economically prudent to do so. In
addition, Staffmark is offering complementary human resource services to its existing clients such as full time
recruiting, consulting, and administrative outsourcing. Staffmark has implemented an incentive plan that highly
rewards its employees for selling services beyond its traditional temporary staffing services.
• Grow Specialty Lines of Business — Staffmark is focused on driving its specialty lines of business, including
transportation, cost-per-unit pricing, and professional services through cross selling efforts. Many of Staffmark’s
current clients are buyers of these multiple lines of services. Staffmark is focused on leveraging these relationships
in order to grow these business lines and deliver more value to its clients.
• Pursue Selective Acquisitions — Staffmark views acquisitions, such as the SES acquisition in
November 2006 and Staffmark in January 2008, as attractive means to enter into a new geographical market,
and in the case of Staffmark, increasing its market share in existing markets.
Clients
Staffmark serves approximately 6,000 clients in a broad range of industries, including manufacturing, technical,
transportation, retail, distribution, warehousing, automotive supply, construction, industrial, healthcare services and
financial. These clients range in size from small, local firms to large, regional or national corporations. Staffmark’s top ten
clients accounted for approximately 22.0%, 23.2% and 21.5% of gross revenues in 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
Staffmark’s client assignments can vary from a period of a few days to long-term, annual or multi-year contracts.
Staffmark’s largest client represented approximately 5% of revenues in 2010. We believe Staffmark has a strong
relationship with its clients.
46
Sales, Marketing and Recruiting Efforts
Staffmark’s marketing efforts are principally focused on branch-level development of local business relationships. Local
salespeople are incentivized to recruit new clients and increase usage by existing clients through their compensation
programs, as well as through numerous contests and competitions. Regional or corporate resources such as subject matter
experts are utilized to assist local salespeople in closing potentially large accounts, particularly where they may involve an
on-site presence by Staffmark. On a regional and national level, efforts are made to expand and align its services to fulfill
the needs of clients with multiple locations, which may also include using on-site Staffmark professionals and the opening
of additional offices to better serve a client’s broader geographic needs.
Staffmark actively recruits in each community in which it operates, through educational institutions, evening and weekend
interviewing and open houses. At the corporate level, Staffmark maintains an in-house web-based job posting and resume
process which facilitates distribution of job descriptions to national and local online job boards. Individuals may also
submit a resume through Staffmark’s website.
On an initial engagement, particularly for clients with larger temporary staffing assignments (10+ temporary workers), a
Staffmark staff member will arrive on-site to register all employees hired for a particular assignment. If, for any reason, not all
employees assigned to the job site arrive, the on-site Staffmark staff member can immediately react and oftentimes correct the
shortfall within a matter of hours, ensuring that 100% of a client’s staffing needs are fulfilled.
Staffmark’s marketing activities are designed to effectively service and reach all current and prospective clients at the local,
regional and national level, resulting in brand recognition and loyalty throughout many levels of a client’s organization.
Following a prospective employee’s identification, Staffmark systematically evaluates each candidate prior to placement.
The employee application process includes an interview, skills assessment, education verification and reference
verification, and may include drug screening and background checks depending upon customer requirements.
Staffmark’s business is somewhat seasonal. Historically, demand for temporary staffing is highest during the fiscal
quarters ending September and December. We believe this seasonality is due to increased outdoor activities and projects
during the summer months and the increased retail activity during the holiday season.
Substantially all revenue is derived from sales within the United States.
Competition
The temporary staffing industry is highly fragmented and, according to the U.S. Census Bureau’s 2007 Economic Census,
as released in December 2010, was comprised of approximately 11,500 service providers. Staffing Industry Analysts more
recently estimated that the number of providers may now be closer to 9,000, largely as a result of industry consolidation.
The vast majority of service providers generate less than $10 million in annual revenues and according to the U.S. Census
Bureau, staffing services firms with more than 10 establishments account for only 1.5% of the total number of service
providers, or 205 companies, but generate 51.6% of revenues in the temporary staffing industry. The largest publicly
owned companies specializing in temporary staffing services are Adecco, Randstad, Kelly Services Inc., Manpower, and
Robert Half. The employee leasing industry consists of approximately 4,000 service providers. Our largest national
competitors in employee leasing include Administaff, Inc., Alpha Staff, and the employee leasing divisions of large
business service companies such as Automatic Data Processing, Inc., and Paychex, Inc.
Staffmark competes with both large national and small local staffing companies in its markets for clients. Competition in
the temporary staffing industry, we believe, revolves around quality of service, reputation and price. Notwithstanding this
level of competition, Staffmark’s management believes it benefits from a number of competitive advantages, including:
• multiple offices in its core markets;
• well-recognized brands and leadership positions in its core markets;
•
•
•
•
long-standing relationships with its clients;
a large database of qualified temporary workers which enables Staffmark to fill orders rapidly;
a reputation for treating employees well and offering competitive benefits; and
expertise to fulfill a wide range of staffing services to an individual client.
47
Numerous competitors, both large and small, have exited or significantly reduced their presence in many of Staffmark’s
markets. Staffmark’s management believes that this trend has resulted from the increasing importance of scale, client
demands for broader services and reduced costs, and the difficulty that the strong positions of market leaders, such as
Staffmark, present for competitors attempting to grow their client base.
Historically, in periods of economic prosperity, the number of firms providing temporary services has increased
significantly due to the combination of a favorable economic climate and low barriers to entry. Recessionary periods
generally result in a reduction in the number of competitors through consolidation and closures; however, this reduction has
proven to be for a limited time and as such a limited window of opportunity for consolidation, as the following periods of
economic recovery have led to a return in growth in the number of competitors.
Staffmark competes for qualified employee candidates in each of the markets in which it operates. Management believes
that Staffmark’s scale and concentration in each of its markets provides it with recruiting advantages. Key among the
factors affecting a candidate’s choice of employers is the likelihood of reassignment following the completion of an initial
engagement. Staffmark typically has numerous clients with significantly different hiring patterns in each of its markets,
increasing the likelihood that it can reassign individual employees and limit the amount of time an employee is in transition.
As employee referrals are a key component of its recruiting efforts, management believes local market share is also key to
its ability to identify qualified candidates.
Trade names
Staffmark holds the following tradenames: CBS Personnel TM, CBS Personnel Services TM and Venturi Staffing Partners TM
and currently uses the tradenames Staffmark TM, Columbia Staffing TM, Columbia Healthcare Services TM. We believe these
actively used trade names have strong brand equity in their markets and have significant value to Staffmark’s business.
48
Facilities
Staffmark, headquartered in Cincinnati, Ohio, currently provides staffing services through its 195 branch offices located in
29 states. Average revenue per branch was approximately $3.9 million in 2010 and 92% of the branches were profitable.
Staffmark also operated on-site locations, which accounted for approximately $240 million in revenues in 2010. The
following table shows the number of branch offices located in each state in which Staffmark operates and the employee
hours billed by branch offices and on-site locations for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2010.
Number of
Employee
Hours
State
Branch Offices
Billed (000’s)
CA
OH
TN
AR
TX
KY
NC
PA
IL
IN
GA
SC
MD
MA
VA
NV
NJ
WA
AZ
NY
KS
MS
AL
CO
CT
OK
DE
OR
MO
WI
28
20
13
16
17
10
10
8
10
7
7
8
4
2
5
4
4
2
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
0
9,269
9,680
12,236
4,999
4,912
3,395
3,611
3,269
2,940
2,937
2,914
2,319
855
229
1,371
1,190
1,059
301
653
734
1,455
580
492
435
442
185
1,407
273
699
415
195
75,266
All of the above branch offices, along with Staffmark’s principal executive offices in Cincinnati, Ohio, are leased. Lease
terms for branch offices are generally short and can range from one to five years. Staffmark does not anticipate any
difficulty in renewing these leases or in finding alternative sites in the ordinary course of business.
Regulatory Environment
In the United States, temporary employment services firms are considered the legal employers of their temporary workers.
Therefore, state and federal laws regulating the employer/employee relationship, such as tax withholding and reporting,
social security and retirement, equal employment opportunity and Title VII Civil Rights laws and workers’ compensation,
including those governing self-insured employers under the workers’ compensation systems in various states, govern
Staffmark’s operations. By entering into a co-employer relationship with employees who are assigned to work at client
49
locations, Staffmark assumes certain obligations and responsibilities of an employer under these federal and state laws.
Because many of these federal and state laws were enacted prior to the development of nontraditional employment
relationships, such as professional employer, temporary employment, and outsourcing arrangements, many of these laws do
not specifically address the obligations and responsibilities of nontraditional employers. In addition, the definition of
“employer” under these laws is not uniform.
Although compliance with these requirements imposes some additional financial risk on Staffmark, particularly with
respect to those clients who breach their payment obligation to Staffmark, such compliance has not had a material adverse
impact on Staffmark’s business to date. Staffmark believes that its operations are in compliance in all material respects
with applicable federal and state laws.
Workers’ Compensation Program
As the employer of record, Staffmark is responsible for complying with applicable statutory requirements for workers’
compensation coverage. State law (and for certain types of employees, federal law) generally mandates that an employer
reimburse its employees for the costs of medical care and other specified benefits for injuries or illnesses, including
catastrophic injuries and fatalities, incurred in the course and scope of employment. The benefits payable for various
categories of claims are determined by state regulation and vary with the severity and nature of the injury or illness and
other specified factors. In return for this guaranteed protection, workers’ compensation is considered the exclusive remedy
and employees are generally precluded from seeking other damages from their employer for workplace injuries. Most
states require employers to maintain workers’ compensation insurance or otherwise demonstrate financial responsibility to
meet workers’ compensation obligations to employees.
In many states, employers who meet certain financial and other requirements may be permitted to self-insure. Staffmark
self-insures its workers’ compensation exposure for a portion of its employees. Regulations governing self-insured
employers in each jurisdiction typically require the employer to maintain surety deposits of government securities, letters of
credit or other financial instruments to support workers’ compensation claims in the event the employer is unable to pay for
such claims.
As an employer with self-insurance and large deductible plans for workers’ compensation, Staffmark’s workers’
compensation expense is tied directly to the incidence and severity of workplace injuries to its employees. Staffmark seeks
to contain its workers’ compensation costs through a proactive front-end client selection process in order to mitigate the
acceptance of high risk situations together with an aggressive approach to claims management, including assigning injured
workers, whenever possible, to short-term, light duty assignments which accommodate the workers’ physical limitations,
performing a thorough and prompt on-site investigation of claims filed by employees, working with physicians to
encourage efficient medical management of cases, denying questionable claims and attempting to negotiate early
settlements to mitigate contingent and future costs and liabilities. Higher costs for each occurrence, either due to increased
medical costs or duration of time, may result in higher workers’ compensation costs to Staffmark with a corresponding
material adverse effect on its financial condition, business and results of operations.
Employees
As of December 31, 2010, Staffmark employed approximately 140 individuals on its corporate staff and approximately 920
staff members in its field operations. During the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, Staffmark placed, on
average, over 41,000, 34,000 and 38,000 temporary personnel, not including leased personnel, on engagements of varying
durations on a weekly basis. Staffmark is not subject to collective bargaining agreements (Approximately 50 leased
employees are subject to a collective bargaining agreement where the client is party of interest for NLRB). We believe that
Staffmark’s relationship with its employees is good.
Temporary employees placed by Staffmark are generally Staffmark’s employees while they are working on assignments.
As the employer of its temporary employees, Staffmark maintains responsibility for applicable payroll taxes and the
administration of the employee’s share of such taxes.
Rebranding of CBS Personnel to Staffmark
On February 27, 2009 Staffmark became the new name of the combined CBS Personnel, Staffmark, and Venturi Staffing
organizations and was recognized by a new corporate identity. The decision to rebrand the three companies under the
Staffmark name was the result of twelve months of strategic planning, with emphasis on gathering broad-based feedback
from customers and employees throughout all geographic locations. Throughout this document we refer to Staffmark when
discussing the combined operations of Staffmark Holdings, Inc., Staffmark and Venturi Staffing.
50
Tridien
Overview
Tridien Medical, (formerly known as Anodyne Medical Device, Inc.) (“Tridien”) headquartered in Coral Springs, Florida,
is a leading designer and manufacturer of powered and non-powered medical therapeutic support services and patient
positioning devices serving the acute care, long-term care and home health care markets. Tridien is one of the nation’s
leading designers and manufacturers of specialty therapeutic support surfaces with manufacturing operations in multiple
locations to better serve a national customer base.
Tridien, together with its subsidiary companies, provides customers the opportunity to source leading surface technologies
from the designer and manufacturer.
Tridien develops products both independently and in partnership with large distribution intermediaries. Medical distribution
companies then sell or rent the therapeutic support surfaces, sometimes in conjunction with bed frames and accessories to
one of three end markets: (i) acute care, (ii) long term care and (iii) home health care. The level of sophistication largely
varies for each product, as some patients require simple foam mattress beds (“non-powered” support surfaces) while others
may require electronically controlled, low air loss, lateral rotation, pulmonary therapy or alternating pressure surfaces
(“powered” support surfaces). The design, engineering and manufacturing of all products are completed in-house (with the
exception of PrimaTech products, which are manufactured in Taiwan) and are FDA compliant.
For the full fiscal years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, Tridien had net sales of approximately $61.1 million,
$54.1 million and $54.2 million, and operating income of $8.0 million, $7.4 million and $4.2 million, respectively. Tridien
had total assets of $44.2 million, $49.0 million and $53.2 million at December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Net
sales from Tridien represented 3.7%, 4.3% and 3.5% of our consolidated net sales for fiscal years 2010, 2009 and 2008,
respectively.
History
Tridien was initially formed in February 2006 by CGI and Hollywood Capital, Inc., a private investment management firm
led by Tridien’s former Chief Executive Officer, to acquire AMF and SenTech, located in Corona, CA and Coral Springs,
FL, respectively. AMF Support Surfaces, Inc. is a leading manufacturer of non-powered mattress systems, seating cushions
and patient positioning devices. SenTech is a leading designer and manufacturer of advanced electronically controlled,
powered, alternating pressure, pulmonary therapy, low air loss and lateral rotation specialty support surfaces for the wound
care industry. Prior to its acquisition, SenTech had established a premium brand as a result of its proprietary technologies,
in the less price sensitive therapeutic market while AMF competed primarily in the preventive care market.
On October 5, 2006, Tridien acquired the patient positioning device business of Anatomic. The acquired operations were
merged into Tridien’s operations. Anatomic is a leading supplier of operating suite patient positioning devices and support
surfaces focused on the price sensitive long term care and home healthcare markets.
On June 27, 2007, Tridien purchased PrimaTech, a lower price-point distributor of powered medical support surfaces to the
long term care and home healthcare markets. PrimaTech’s products are predominately designed in the U.S. and
manufactured pursuant to an exclusive manufacturing agreement with an FDA registered manufacturing partner located in
Taiwan.
In October 2008, Tridien and Hollywood Capital, Inc. terminated their management services agreement which provided for,
among other things, two principals of Hollywood Capital, Inc., resigning from their roles of Chief Executive Officer and
Chief Financial Officer of Tridien. Upon termination of the agreement, Tridien appointed a new Chief Executive Officer
and a new Chief Financial Officer.
We purchased a controlling interest in Tridien from CGI on August 1, 2006.
Industry
The medical support surfaces industry is fragmented and comprised of many small participants and niche manufacturers.
Tridien’s consolidation platform allows customers to source all leading support surface technologies for the acute care, long
term care and home health care from a single source. Tridien is a vertically integrated company with engineering, design
and research, manufacturing and support performed in house to quickly bring new, innovative products and technologies to
market while maintaining high quality standards in its manufacturing process.
51
Immobility caused by injury, old age, chronic illness or obesity is the main cause for the development of pressure ulcers. In
these cases, the person lying in the same position for a long period of time puts pressure on the bony prominence of the
body surface. This pressure, if continued for a sustained period, can close blood capillaries that provide oxygen and
nutrition to the skin. Over a period of time, these cells deprived of oxygen, begin to break down and form sores. In
addition to constant or excessive pressure, other contributing factors to the development of pressure ulcers include heat,
friction and sheer, or pull on the skin due to the underlying fabric.
The prevalence rate of pressure ulcers in acute care facilities has been seen as high as 34%, with costs of treatment as high
as $70,000 per ulcer, causing an estimated burden of an additional 22 million Medicare hospital days. Further it has been
reported that another 2% to 28% of all nursing home patients suffer from decubitus ulcers. We believe that providing the
right therapeutic support surfaces is a necessary intervention for these ulcers. Management believes the need for medical
support surfaces will continue to grow due to several favorable demographic and industry trends including the increasing
incidence of obesity in the United States, increasing life expectancies and an increasing emphasis on prevention of pressure
ulcers by hospitals and long term care facilities.
According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, between the years 1980 and 2000, obesity rates more than
doubled among adults in the United States. Studies have shown that this increase in obesity has been a key factor in rising
medical costs over the last 15 years. According to one study done at Emory University, increases in obesity rates have
accounted for 27% of the increase in health care spending between 1987 and 2001. As an individual’s weight increases, so
too does the probability that the individual will become immobile and, according to studies performed at the University of
North Carolina, greater than 40% of obese adults aged 54 to 73 were at least partially immobile. As individuals become
less mobile, they are more likely to require either preventative mattresses to better disperse weight and reduce pressure
areas or therapeutic mattresses to shift weight and pressure. Similar to how obesity increases the occurrence of immobility,
so too does an aging society. As life expectancy expands in the U.S. due to improved health care and nutrition, so too does
the probability that an individual will be immobile for a portion of their lives. In addition, as individual’s age, skin
becomes more susceptible to breakdown increasing the likelihood of developing pressure ulcers.
Beyond favorable demographic trends, Tridien’s management believes healthcare institutions are placing an increased
emphasis on the prevention of pressure ulcers. According to recent Medicare guidelines, hospitals would no longer be
reimbursed for the treatment of in-house acquired wounds, resulting in management’s expectations for a greater focus by
hospitals in preventing and treating such wounds. The end result is that if an at-risk patient develops pressure ulcers while
at the hospital; the hospital is required to bear the cost of healing. As a result of increasing litigation and the high cost of
healing pressures ulcers, healthcare institutions are now focusing on using pressure relief equipment to reduce the incidence
of in-house acquired pressure ulcers.
Products and Services
Specialty beds, mattress replacements and mattress overlays (i.e. therapeutic surfaces) are the primary products currently
available for pressure relief and pressure reduction to treat and prevent decubitus ulcers. The market for specialty beds and
therapeutic surfaces include the acute care centers, long-term care centers, nursing home centers and home healthcare
settings. Medical therapeutic surfaces are designed to have preventative and/or therapeutic uses. The basic product
categories are as follows:
• Powered Support Surfaces: Mattresses which can be used for therapy or prevention and are typically manufactured
using an electronic power source with air cylinders or a combination of air cylinders and foam and provide either
Alternating Pressure, Low Air Loss, or Lateral Rotation. Alternating Pressure Systems are designed to inflate
alternate cylinders while contiguous cylinders deflate in an alternating pattern. The alternating inflation and
deflation prevents sustained pressure on an area of skin by shifting pressure from one area to another. This type of
therapy provides movement under the patient’s skin to eliminate both excessive and constant pressure, the leading
cause of bed sores. The powered control unit provides automatic changes in the distribution of air pressure.
Tridien’s Alternating Pressure Systems in the SenTech line incorporate its intellectual property in the way these
automatic changes take place. This patented technology allows for a more comfortable surface with aggressive
therapeutic alternating pressure. Another typical type of powered surface is Lateral Rotation which can aid in
laterally turning a patient to reduce risks associated with fluid building up in a patient’s lungs. A feature often found
in Powered Surfaces is Low Air Loss that allows air to flow from the mattress to address the moisture and
temperature environment on the patient’s skin, contributing factors to bed sores. Tridien currently produces
patented designs for the performance of both Alternating Pressure and Low Air Loss mattress systems which
management believes provides the optimum healing therapy for the patient. Powered support surfaces are typically
used in acute care settings and when more aggressive therapy is needed.
52
Powered Support Surfaces represented approximately 21.2% of net sales in 2010 and 2009 and 33.8% of net
sales in 2008.
• Non-Powered Support Surfaces: Consists of mattresses which have no powered elements. Their support material
can be composed of foam, air, water, gel or a combination of these. In the case of water, air or gel materials, they
are held in place with containment bladders. Non-powered mattress replacement systems help redistribute a
patient’s body weight to lessen forces on pressure points by envelopment into the surface. These products address
the excessive pressure under a patient, but do not address the constant pressure applied to an area. Non-powered
surfaces are generally used for prevention rather than treatment and currently comprise the majority of support
surfaces. Currently Tridien manufactures a broad range of non-powered mattress systems using air, foam and gel.
Non- powered support surfaces represented 53.2%, 52.7% and 45.0% of net sales in each of the years ended
December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
• Positioning devices: Positioning devices are used to position patients for procedures as well as to minimize the
likelihood of developing a pressure ulcer during those procedures. Tridien offers a complete range of foam
positioning devices. Patient positioning devices represented 25.6%, 26.1% and 21.2% of net sales in each of the
years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
Competition
The competition in the medical support surfaces market is based predominantly on product performance, features, price and
durability. Other factors may include the technological ability of a manufacturer to customize their product offering to
meet the needs of large distributors. Tridien competes with manufacturers of varying sizes who then sell predominantly
through distributors to the acute care, long term care and home health care markets. Specific competitors include Gaymar
Industries, Inc., Span America and other smaller competitors. Tridien differentiates itself from these competitors based on
its patented technologies, quality of the products it manufacturers as well as its design and engineering capabilities to
produce a full spectrum of surfaces that provide the greatest therapeutic outcome for every price point. While many
competitors specialize in the production of a single type of support surface, and often outsource certain manufacturing as
skills required to develop and manufacture products vary by materials used, Tridien is able to offer its customers a full
spectrum of support surfaces nationwide.
The companies listed below have been identified by management as Tridien’s primary competitors.
Gaymar Industries, Inc.: Gaymar, recently acquired by Stryker Corporation (NYSE: SYK), develops, manufactures and
markets medical devices for temperature and pressure ulcer management. Gaymar’s pressure ulcer management system
includes, mattress replacement systems, pressure relieving overlays, lateral rotation systems, table and stretcher pads, chair
cushions and heel care devices.
Span America Medical Systems (NASDAQ: SPAN): ($52.4 million in fiscal 2010 sales) Span America’s medical division
includes the sales of skin care products, bedside mats, and foam mattress overlays and replacement mattresses, including
the PressureGuard therapeutic mattress, Span-Aid patient positioners (used to elevate and support body parts) and Dish
pressure-relief seat cushions to aid wound healing. Span America reported that less than half their revenue in 2009 was
attributed to their therapeutic surface segment. Span America also supplies safety catheters and makes specialty packaging
products for use in outdoor furniture.
Business Strategies
Tridien’s management is focused on strategies to grow revenues, improve operating efficiency and improving gross
margins. Of particular note, Tridien has completed four acquisitions since its inception and has achieved numerous benefits
to this consolidation within the support surfaces industry. The following is a discussion of these strategies:
• Offer customers high quality, consistent product, on a national basis – Products produced by Tridien and its
competitors are typically bulky in nature and may not be conducive to shipping. Management believes that many of
its competitors do not have the scale or resources required to produce support surfaces for national distributors and
believes that customers value manufacturers with the scale and sophistication required to meet these needs. All
Tridien facilities have achieved ISO-13485, offering customers the highest standards of quality.
• Leverage scale to provide industry leading research and development – Medical therapeutic surfaces are
becoming increasingly technologically advanced. Tridien’s management believes that many smaller competitors do
not have the resources required to effectively meet the changing needs of their customers and believes that increased
53
scale and investments in engineering and technology will allow it to better serve its customers through industry
leading research, technology and development.
• Pursue cost savings through scale purchasing and operational improvements – Many of the products used to
manufacture medical support surfaces are standard in nature and management believes that increased scale achieved
through acquisitions will allow it to benefit from lower cost of materials and therefore lower cost of sales.
Research and Development
Tridien develops surfaces both independently and in partnership with large distribution intermediaries. Initial steps of
product development are typically made independently. Larger distribution market participants will typically require
further product development testing to ensure mattress systems have the desired properties while smaller distributors will
tend to buy more standardized products, especially on the non-powered products. Tridien has dedicated professionals,
including individuals focused on process engineering, design engineering, and electrical engineering, working on the
development of the company’s next generation of therapeutic surfaces and is currently investing in its future focus of
advanced wound care technologies.
Tridien is working to develop the next generation of products in surfaces as well as advanced wound care devices. The new
product development process often requires 2 to 6 months for prevention products and 12 to 24 months for treatment products,
of research, engineering and testing cooperation. Tridien will provide technical support and repair services for its products as
well, a differentiating characteristic valued by its customers. During the year ended December 31, 2010 Tridien incurred
approximately $1.3 million in research and development costs and is expected to increase this spending in 2011. The expected
increase in spending is to allow the company to focus on the next generation products as well as research and development of
new wound care technologies. During the each of the years 2009 and 2008, Tridien incurred approximately $1.0 million in
research and development costs
Sales and Marketing
Support surfaces are primarily sold through distributors, who either rent or sell to acute care (hospitals) facilities, long term
care facilities and home health care organizations. The acute care distribution market for support surfaces is dominated by
large suppliers such as Stryker Corporation, Hill-Rom Holdings Inc. and Kinetic Concepts, Inc. Other national distributors
usually provide specific types of support surface technology. Beyond national distribution intermediaries there are
numerous smaller more regional distributors who will purchase support surfaces developed by Tridien as certain brand lines
are known in the market as providing proven therapy.
Tridien has developed a full range of support surface products that are sold or rented to healthcare distributors and
occasionally sold directly to the end customer. Tridien also provides technical support and repair services for its products,
an offering valued by all customers. While contracts with large distributors typically do not include minimum purchase
orders, agreements typically call for rolling forecasts of orders to be given at the end of each month for the following three
months.
Customers
During the fourth quarter of 2010 two of Tridien’s largest customers merged. The combined entity is now Tridien’s largest
customer and accounted for 39.1% and 40% of gross sales in 2010 and 2009, respectively. Approximately 63.5%, 64.8%
and 47% of Tridien’s sales have been to its two largest customers in 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Tridien’s top ten
customers accounted for 83.8%, 81.8% and 78.6% of gross sales in 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
Substantially all revenue is derived from sales within the United States.
Tridien had approximately $2.8 million and $3.1 million in firm backlog orders at December 31, 2010 and 2009,
respectively.
Suppliers
Tridien’s two primary raw materials used in manufacturing are polyurethane foam and fabric (primarily nylon and
polycarbonate fabrics). Among Tridien’s largest raw material suppliers are Foamex International, Inc., Dartex Coatings,
Inc. and Uretek, LLC. Tridien uses multiple suppliers for foam and fabric and believes that these raw materials are in
adequate supply and are available from many suppliers at competitive prices. We expect these costs, particularly those
related to polyurethane foam to increase during fiscal 2011 due to recent trends in related commodity prices. Actions taken
by manufacturers of petro-chemical commodities such as capacity reductions could influence price changes from our
54
supplier. The cost of raw materials as a percentage of sales was approximately 46% of net sales in fiscal 2010, 2009 and
2008.
Intellectual Property
Tridien has nine patents issued, filed from 1996 to 2005, and has twelve filed and pending patents.
Regulatory Environment
The FDCA, and regulations issued or proposed there under, provide for regulation by the Food and Drug Administration
(FDA) of the marketing, manufacture, labeling, packaging and distribution of medical devices, including Tridien’s
products. These regulations require, among other things that medical device manufacturers register with the FDA, list
devices manufactured by them, and file various inspections by regulatory authorities and must comply with good
manufacturing practices as required by the FDA and state regulatory authorities. Tridien’s management believes that the
company is in substantial compliance with all applicable regulations.
Employees
As of December 31, 2010, Tridien employed 233 persons in all its locations together with 125 temporary employees. None of
Tridien’s employees are subject to collective bargaining agreements. We believe that Tridien’s relationship with its employees
is good.
55
ITEM 1A - RISK FACTORS
Risks Related to Our Business and Structure
We are a Company with limited history and may not be able to continue to successfully manage our businesses on a
combined basis.
We were formed on November 18, 2005 and have conducted operations since May 16, 2006. Although our management
team has, collectively, over 90 years of experience in acquiring and managing small and middle market businesses, our
failure to continue to develop and maintain effective systems and procedures, including accounting and financial reporting
systems, to manage our operations as a consolidated public company, may negatively impact our ability to optimize the
performance of our Company, which could adversely affect our ability to pay distributions to our shareholders. In
addition, in that case, our consolidated financial statements might not be indicative of our financial condition, business and
results of operations.
Our Chief Executive Officer has taken a temporary leave of absence
We previously announced that Joseph Massoud, our Chief Executive Officer, requested, and the Company’s Board of
Directors approved, a leave of absence to focus his attention on an informal regulatory inquiry that Mr. Massoud received
on matters unrelated to CODI. If Mr. Massoud were unable to return to the Company, or return to the Company after an
extended leave of absence, the market price for the Company’s shares may be materially adversely affected.
Our future success is dependent on the employees of our Manager and the management teams of our businesses, the
loss of any of whom could materially adversely affect our financial condition, business and results of operations.
Our future success depends, to a significant extent, on the continued services of the employees of our Manager, most of
whom have worked together for a number of years. While our Manager will have employment agreements with certain of
its employees, including our Chief Financial Officer, these employment agreements may not prevent our Manager’s
employees from leaving or from competing with us in the future. Our Manager does not have an employment agreement
with our Chief Executive Officer.
The future success of our businesses also depends on their respective management teams because we operate our
businesses on a stand-alone basis, primarily relying on existing management teams for management of their day-to-day
operations. Consequently, their operational success, as well as the success of our internal growth strategy, will be
dependent on the continued efforts of the management teams of the businesses. We provide such persons with equity
incentives in their respective businesses and have employment agreements and/or non-competition agreements with certain
persons we have identified as key to their businesses. However, these measures may not prevent the departure of these
managers. The loss of services of one or more members of our management team or the management team at one of our
businesses could materially adversely affect our financial condition, business and results of operations.
We face risks with respect to the evaluation and management of future platform or add-on acquisitions.
A component of our strategy is to continue to acquire additional platform subsidiaries, as well as add-on businesses for our
existing businesses. Generally, because such acquisition targets are held privately, we may experience difficulty in
evaluating potential target businesses as the information concerning these businesses is not publicly available. In addition,
we and our subsidiary companies may have difficulty effectively managing or integrating acquisitions. We may
experience greater than expected costs or difficulties relating to such acquisition, in which case, we might not achieve the
anticipated returns from any particular acquisition, which may have a material adverse effect on our financial condition,
business and results of operations.
We may not be able to successfully fund future acquisitions of new businesses due to the lack of availability of debt or
equity financing at the Company level on acceptable terms, which could impede the implementation of our acquisition
strategy and materially adversely impact our financial condition, business and results of operations.
In order to make future acquisitions, we intend to raise capital primarily through debt financing at the Company level,
additional equity offerings, the sale of stock or assets of our businesses, and by offering equity in the Trust or our
businesses to the sellers of target businesses or by undertaking a combination of any of the above. Since the timing and size
of acquisitions cannot be readily predicted, we may need to be able to obtain funding on short notice to benefit fully from
attractive acquisition opportunities. Such funding may not be available on acceptable terms. In addition, the level of our
56
indebtedness may impact our ability to borrow at the Company level. Another source of capital for us may be the sale of
additional shares, subject to market conditions and investor demand for the shares at prices that we consider to be in the
interests of our shareholders. These risks may materially adversely affect our ability to pursue our acquisition strategy
successfully and materially adversely affect our financial condition, business and results of operations.
While we intend to make regular cash distributions to our shareholders, the Company’s board of directors has full
authority and discretion over the distributions of the Company, other than the profit allocation, and it may decide to
reduce or eliminate distributions at any time, which may materially adversely affect the market price for our shares.
To date, we have declared and paid quarterly distributions, and although we intend to pursue a policy of paying regular
distributions, the Company’s board of directors has full authority and discretion to determine whether or not a distribution
by the Company should be declared and paid to the Trust and in turn to our shareholders, as well as the amount and timing
of any distribution. In addition, the management fee, profit allocation and put price will be payment obligations of the
Company and, as a result, will be paid, along with other Company obligations, prior to the payment of distributions to our
shareholders. The Company’s board of directors may, based on their review of our financial condition and results of
operations and pending acquisitions, determine to reduce or eliminate distributions, which may have a material adverse
effect on the market price of our shares.
We will rely entirely on receipts from our businesses to make distributions to our shareholders.
The Trust’s sole asset is its interest in the Company, which holds controlling interests in our businesses. Therefore, we are
dependent upon the ability of our businesses to generate earnings and cash flow and distribute them to us in the form of
interest and principal payments on indebtedness and, from time to time, dividends on equity to enable us, first, to satisfy
our financial obligations and, second, and to make distributions to our shareholders. This ability may be subject to
limitations under laws of the jurisdictions in which they are incorporated or organized. If, as a consequence of these
various restrictions, we are unable to generate sufficient receipts from our businesses, we may not be able to declare, or
may have to delay or cancel payment of, distributions to our shareholders.
We do not own 100% of our businesses. While the Company is to receive cash payments from our businesses which are in
the form of interest payments, debt repayment and dividends, if any dividends were to be paid by our businesses, they
would be shared pro rata with the minority shareholders of our businesses and the amounts of dividends made to minority
shareholders would not be available to us for any purpose, including Company debt service or distributions to our
shareholders. Any proceeds from the sale of a business will be allocated among us and the minority shareholders of the
business that is sold.
The Company’s board of directors has the power to change the terms of our shares in its sole discretion in ways with
which you may disagree.
As an owner of our shares, you may disagree with changes made to the terms of our shares, and you may disagree with the
Company’s board of directors’ decision that the changes made to the terms of the shares are not materially adverse to you
as a shareholder or that they do not alter the characterization of the Trust. Your recourse, if you disagree, will be limited
because our Trust Agreement gives broad authority and discretion to our board of directors. However, the Trust
Agreement does not relieve the Company’s board of directors from any fiduciary obligation that is imposed on them
pursuant to applicable law. In addition, we may change the nature of the shares to be issued to raise additional equity and
remain a fixed-investment trust for tax purposes.
Certain provisions of the LLC Agreement of the Company and the Trust Agreement make it difficult for third parties to
acquire control of the Trust and the Company and could deprive you of the opportunity to obtain a takeover premium
for your shares.
The amended and restated LLC Agreement of the Company, which we refer to as the LLC Agreement, and the amended
and restated Trust Agreement of the Trust, which we refer to as the Trust Agreement, contain a number of provisions that
could make it more difficult for a third party to acquire, or may discourage a third party from acquiring, control of the Trust
and the Company. These provisions include, among others:
•
restrictions on the Company’s ability to enter into certain transactions with our major shareholders, with the
exception of our Manager, modeled on the limitation contained in Section 203 of the Delaware General
Corporation Law, or DGCL;
• allowing only the Company’s board of directors to fill newly created directorships, for those directors who are
57
elected by our shareholders, and allowing only our Manager, as holder of the Allocation Interests, to fill vacancies
with respect to the class of directors appointed by our Manager;
•
•
requiring that directors elected by our shareholders be removed, with or without cause, only by a vote of 85% of
our shareholders;
requiring advance notice for nominations of candidates for election to the Company’s board of directors or for
proposing matters that can be acted upon by our shareholders at a shareholders’ meeting;
• having a substantial number of additional authorized but unissued shares that may be issued without shareholder
action;
• providing the Company’s board of directors with certain authority to amend the LLC Agreement and the Trust
Agreement, subject to certain voting and consent rights of the holders of trust interests and Allocation Interests;
• providing for a staggered board of directors of the Company, the effect of which could be to deter a proxy contest
for control of the Company’s board of directors or a hostile takeover; and
•
limitations regarding calling special meetings and written consents of our shareholders.
These provisions, as well as other provisions in the LLC Agreement and Trust Agreement may delay, defer or prevent a
transaction or a change in control that might otherwise result in you obtaining a takeover premium for your shares.
We may have conflicts of interest with the minority shareholders of our businesses.
The boards of directors of our respective businesses have fiduciary duties to all their shareholders, including the Company
and minority shareholders. As a result, they may make decisions that are in the best interests of their shareholders generally
but which are not necessarily in the best interest of the Company or our shareholders. In dealings with the Company, the
directors of our businesses may have conflicts of interest and decisions may have to be made without the participation of
directors appointed by the Company, and such decisions may be different from those that we would make.
Our third party credit facility exposes us to additional risks associated with leverage and inhibits our operating
flexibility and reduces cash flow available for distributions to our shareholders.
At December 31, 2010, we had approximately $74.0 million outstanding under our Term Loan Facility and $22.0 million
outstanding borrowings on our Revolving Credit Facility. We expect to increase our level of debt in the future. The terms
of our Revolving Credit Facility contains a number of affirmative and restrictive covenants that, among other things,
require us to:
• maintain a minimum level of cash flow;
• leverage new businesses we acquire to a minimum specified level at the time of acquisition;
• keep our total debt to cash flow at or below a ratio of 3.5 to 1; and
• make acquisitions that satisfy certain specified minimum criteria.
If we violate any of these covenants, our lender may accelerate the maturity of any debt outstanding and we may be
prohibited from making any distributions to our shareholders. Such debt is secured by all of our assets, including the stock
we own in our businesses and the rights we have under the loan agreements with our businesses. Our ability to meet our
debt service obligations may be affected by events beyond our control and will depend primarily upon cash produced by
our businesses. Any failure to comply with the terms of our indebtedness could materially adversely affect us.
Changes in interest rates could materially adversely affect us.
Our Credit Agreement bears interest at floating rates which will generally change as interest rates change. We bear the risk
that the rates we are charged by our lender will increase faster than the earnings and cash flow of our businesses, which
could reduce profitability, adversely affect our ability to service our debt, cause us to breach covenants contained in our
Revolving Credit Facility and reduce cash flow available for distribution, any of which could materially adversely affect
us.
58
[
We may engage in a business transaction with one or more target businesses that have relationships with our officers,
our directors, our Manager or CGI, which may create potential conflicts of interest.
We may decide to acquire one or more businesses with which our officers, our directors, our Manager or CGI have a
relationship. While we might obtain a fairness opinion from an independent investment banking firm, potential conflicts of
interest may still exist with respect to a particular acquisition, and, as a result, the terms of the acquisition of a target
business may not be as advantageous to our shareholders as it would have been absent any conflicts of interest.
We are exposed to risks relating to evaluations of controls required by Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.
We are required to comply with Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. While we have concluded that at
December 31, 2010, we have no material weaknesses in our internal controls over financial reporting we cannot assure you
that we will not have a material weakness in the future. A “material weakness” is a control deficiency, or combination of
significant deficiencies that results in more than a remote likelihood that a material misstatement of the annual or interim
financial statements will not be prevented or detected. If we fail to maintain a system of internal controls over financial
reporting that meets the requirements of Section 404, we might be subject to sanctions or investigation by regulatory
authorities such as the SEC or by the New York Stock Exchange. Additionally, failure to comply with Section 404 or the
report by us of a material weakness may cause investors to lose confidence in our financial statements and our stock price
may be adversely affected. If we fail to remedy any material weakness, our financial statements may be inaccurate, we may
not have access to the capital markets, and our stock price may be adversely affected
CGI may exercise significant influence over the Company.
CGI, through a wholly owned subsidiary, owns 6,356,000 or approximately 13.6% of our shares and may have significant
influence over the election of directors in the future.
If, in the future, we cease to control and operate our businesses, we may be deemed to be an investment company under
the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended.
Under the terms of the LLC Agreement, we have the latitude to make investments in businesses that we will not operate or
control. If we make significant investments in businesses that we do not operate or control or cease to operate and control
our businesses, we may be deemed to be an investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended,
or the Investment Company Act. If we were deemed to be an investment company, we would either have to register as an
investment company under the Investment Company Act, obtain exemptive relief from the SEC or modify our investments
or organizational structure or our contract rights to fall outside the definition of an investment company. Registering as an
investment company could, among other things, materially adversely affect our financial condition, business and results of
operations, materially limit our ability to borrow funds or engage in other transactions involving leverage and require us to
add directors who are independent of us or our Manager and otherwise will subject us to additional regulation that will be
costly and time-consuming.
Risks Relating to Our Manager
Our Chief Executive Officer, directors, Manager and management team may allocate some of their time to other
businesses, thereby causing conflicts of interest in their determination as to how much time to devote to our affairs,
which may materially adversely affect our operations.
While the members of our management team anticipate devoting a substantial amount of their time to the affairs of the
Company, only Mr. James Bottiglieri, our Chief Financial Officer, devotes substantially all of his time to our affairs. Our
Chief Executive Officer, directors, Manager and members of our management team may engage in other business
activities. This may result in a conflict of interest in allocating their time between our operations and our management and
operations of other businesses. Their other business endeavors may be related to CGI, which will continue to own several
businesses that were managed by our management team prior to our initial public offering, or affiliates of CGI as well as
other parties. Conflicts of interest that arise over the allocation of time may not always be resolved in our favor and may
materially adversely affect our operations. See the section entitled “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions”
for the potential conflicts of interest of which you should be aware.
59
Our Manager and its affiliates, including members of our management team, may engage in activities that compete with
us or our businesses.
While our management team intends to devote a substantial majority of their time to the affairs of the Company, and while
our Manager and its affiliates currently do not manage any other businesses that are in similar lines of business as our
businesses, and while our Manager must present all opportunities that meet the Company’s acquisition and disposition
criteria to the Company’s board of directors, neither our management team nor our Manager is expressly prohibited from
investing in or managing other entities, including those that are in the same or similar line of business as our businesses. In
this regard, the management services agreement and the obligation to provide management services will not create a
mutually exclusive relationship between our Manager and its affiliates, on the one hand, and the Company, on the other.
Our Manager need not present an acquisition or disposition opportunity to us if our Manager determines on its own
that such acquisition or disposition opportunity does not meet the Company’s acquisition or disposition criteria.
Our Manager will review any acquisition or disposition opportunity presented to the Manager to determine if it satisfies the
Company’s acquisition or disposition criteria, as established by the Company’s board of directors from time to time. If our
Manager determines, in its sole discretion, that an opportunity fits our criteria, our Manager will refer the opportunity to the
Company’s board of directors for its authorization and approval prior to the consummation thereof; opportunities that our
Manager determines do not fit our criteria do not need to be presented to the Company’s board of directors for
consideration. If such an opportunity is ultimately profitable, we will have not participated in such opportunity. Upon a
determination by the Company’s board of directors not to promptly pursue an opportunity presented to it by our Manager
in whole or in part, our Manager will be unrestricted in its ability to pursue such opportunity, or any part that we do not
promptly pursue, on its own or refer such opportunity to other entities, including its affiliates.
We cannot remove our Manager solely for poor performance, which could limit our ability to improve our performance
and could materially adversely affect the market price of our shares.
Under the terms of the management services agreement, our Manager cannot be removed as a result of underperformance.
Instead, the Company’s board of directors can only remove our Manager in certain limited circumstances or upon a vote by
the majority of the Company’s board of directors and the majority of our shareholders to terminate the management
services agreement. This limitation could materially adversely affect the market price of our shares.
We may have difficulty severing ties with Mr. Massoud.
Under the management services agreement, the Company’s board of directors may, after due consultation with our
Manager, at any time request that our Manager replace any individual seconded to the Company and our Manager will, as
promptly as practicable, replace any such individual. However, because Mr. Massoud is the managing member of our
Manager with a significant ownership interest therein, we may have difficulty completely severing ties with Mr. Massoud
absent terminating the management services agreement and our relationship with our Manager.
If the management services agreement is terminated, our Manager, as holder of the Allocation Interests in the
Company, has the right to cause the Company to purchase such Allocation Interests, which may materially adversely
affect our liquidity and ability to grow.
If the management services agreement is terminated at any time other than as a result of our Manager’s resignation or if our
Manager resigns on any date that is at least three years after the closing of our initial public offering, our Manager will
have the right, but not the obligation, for one year from the date of termination or resignation, as the case may be, to cause
the Company to purchase the Allocation Interests for the put price. If our Manager elects to cause the Company to
purchase its Allocation Interests, we are obligated to do so and, until we have done so, our ability to conduct our business,
including incurring debt, would be restricted and, accordingly, our liquidity and ability to grow may be adversely affected.
Our Manager can resign on 90 days’ notice and we may not be able to find a suitable replacement within that time,
resulting in a disruption in our operations that could materially adversely affect our financial condition, business and
results of operations as well as the market price of our shares.
Our Manager has the right, under the management services agreement, to resign at any time on 90 days’ written notice,
whether we have found a replacement or not. If our Manager resigns, we may not be able to contract with a new manager
or hire internal management with similar expertise and ability to provide the same or equivalent services on acceptable
terms within 90 days, or at all, in which case our operations are likely to experience a disruption, our financial condition,
60
business and results of operations as well as our ability to pay distributions are likely to be adversely affected and the
market price of our shares may decline. In addition, the coordination of our internal management, acquisition activities and
supervision of our businesses is likely to suffer if we are unable to identify and reach an agreement with a single institution
or group of executives having the expertise possessed by our Manager and its affiliates. Even if we are able to retain
comparable management, whether internal or external, the integration of such management and their lack of familiarity
with our businesses may result in additional costs and time delays that could materially adversely affect our financial
condition, business and results of operations.
The liability associated with the supplemental put agreement is difficult to estimate and may be subject to substantial
period-to-period changes, thereby significantly impacting our future results of operations.
The Company will record the supplemental put agreement at its fair value at each balance sheet date by recording any
change in fair value through its income statement. The fair value of the supplemental put agreement is largely related to
the value of the profit allocation that our Manager, as holder of Allocation Interests, will receive. The valuation of the
supplemental put agreement requires the use of complex financial models, which require sensitive assumptions and
estimates. If our assumptions and estimates result in an over-estimation or under-estimation of the fair value of the
supplemental put agreement, the resulting fluctuation in related liabilities could cause a material adverse effect on our
future results of operations.
We must pay our Manager the management fee regardless of our performance.
Our Manager is entitled to receive a management fee that is based on our adjusted net assets, as defined in the management
services agreement, regardless of the performance of our businesses. The calculation of the management fee is unrelated to
the Company’s net income. As a result, the management fee may incentivize our Manager to increase the amount of our
assets, through, for example, the acquisition of additional assets or the incurrence of third party debt rather than increase
the performance of our businesses.
[
We cannot determine the amount of the management fee that will be paid over time with any certainty.
The management fee paid to CGM for the year ended December 31, 2010, was $15.4 million. The management fee is
calculated by reference to the Company’s adjusted net assets, which will be impacted by the acquisition or disposition of
businesses, which can be significantly influenced by our Manager, as well as the performance of our businesses and other
businesses we may acquire in the future. Changes in adjusted net assets and in the resulting management fee could be
significant, resulting in a material adverse effect on the Company’s results of operations. In addition, if the performance of
the Company declines, assuming adjusted net assets remains the same, management fees will increase as a percentage of
the Company’s net income.
We cannot determine the amount of profit allocation that will be paid over time with any certainty.
We cannot determine the amount of profit allocation that will be paid over time with any certainty. Such determination
would be dependent on the potential sale proceeds received for any of our businesses and the performance of the Company
and its businesses over a multi-year period of time, among other factors that cannot be predicted with certainty at this time.
Such factors may have a significant impact on the amount of any profit allocation to be paid. Likewise, such determination
would be dependent on whether certain hurdles were surpassed giving rise to a payment of profit allocation. Any amounts
paid in respect of the profit allocation are unrelated to the management fee earned for performance of services under the
management services agreement.
The fees to be paid to our Manager pursuant to the management services agreement, the offsetting management
services agreements and transaction services agreements and the profit allocation to be paid to our Manager, as holder
of the Allocation Interests, pursuant to the LLC Agreement may significantly reduce the amount of cash available for
distribution to our shareholders.
Under the management services agreement, the Company will be obligated to pay a management fee to and, subject to
certain conditions, reimburse the costs and out-of-pocket expenses of our Manager incurred on behalf of the Company in
connection with the provision of services to the Company. Similarly, our businesses will be obligated to pay fees to and
reimburse the costs and expenses of our Manager pursuant to any offsetting management services agreements entered into
between our Manager and one of our businesses, or any transaction services agreements to which such businesses are a
party. In addition, our Manager, as holder of the Allocation Interests, will be entitled to receive profit allocations and may
be entitled to receive the put price. While it is difficult to quantify with any certainty the actual amount of any such
payments in the future, we do expect that such amounts could be substantial. See the section entitled “Certain
61
Relationships and Related Party Transactions” for more information about these payment obligations of the Company. The
management fee, profit allocation and put price will be payment obligations of the Company and, as a result, will be paid,
along with other Company obligations, prior to the payment of distributions to shareholders. As a result, the payment of
these amounts may significantly reduce the amount of cash flow available for distribution to our shareholders.
Our Manager’s influence on conducting our operations, including on our conducting of transactions, gives it the ability
to increase its fees, which may reduce the amount of cash flow available for distribution to our shareholders.
Under the terms of the management services agreement, our Manager is paid a management fee calculated as a percentage
of the Company’s adjusted net assets for certain items and is unrelated to net income or any other performance base or
measure. Our Manager, controls, may advise us to consummate transactions, incur third party debt or conduct our
operations in a manner that, in our Manager’s reasonable discretion, are necessary to the future growth of our businesses
and are in the best interests of our shareholders. These transactions, however, may increase the amount of fees paid to our
Manager. Our Manager’s ability to increase its fees, through the influence it has over our operations, may increase the
compensation paid by our Manager. Our Manager’s ability to influence the management fee paid to it by us could reduce
the amount of cash flow available for distribution to our shareholders.
Fees paid by the Company and our businesses pursuant to transaction services agreements do not offset fees payable
under the management services agreement and will be in addition to the management fee payable by the Company
under the management services agreement.
The management services agreement provides that our businesses may enter into transaction services agreements with our
Manager pursuant to which our businesses will pay fees to our Manager. See the section entitled “Certain Relationships
and Related Party Transactions” for more information about these agreements. Unlike fees paid under the offsetting
management services agreements, fees that are paid pursuant to such transaction services agreements will not reduce the
management fee payable by the Company. Therefore, such fees will be in excess of the management fee payable by the
Company.
The fees to be paid to our Manager pursuant to these transaction service agreements will be paid prior to any principal,
interest or dividend payments to be paid to the Company by our businesses, which will reduce the amount of cash flow
available for distributions to shareholders.
Our Manager’s profit allocation may induce it to make suboptimal decisions regarding our operations.
Our Manager, as holder of 100% of the Allocation Interests in the Company, will receive a profit allocation based on
ongoing cash flows and capital gains in excess of a hurdle rate. In this respect, a calculation and payment of profit
allocation may be triggered upon the sale of one of our businesses. As a result, our Manager may be incentivized to
recommend the sale of one or more of our businesses to the Company’s board of directors at a time that may not be optimal
for our shareholders.
The obligations to pay the management fee and profit allocation, including the put price, may cause the Company to
liquidate assets or incur debt.
If we do not have sufficient liquid assets to pay the management fee and profit allocation, including the put price, when
such payments are due, we may be required to liquidate assets or incur debt in order to make such payments. This
circumstance could materially adversely affect our liquidity and ability to make distributions to our shareholders.
Risks Related to Taxation
Our shareholders will be subject to tax on their share of the Company’s taxable income, which taxes or taxable income
could exceed the cash distributions they receive from the Trust.
For so long as the Company or the Trust (if it is treated as a tax partnership) would not be required to register as an
investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940 and at least 90% of our gross income for each taxable
year constitutes ‘‘qualifying income’’ within the meaning of Section 7704(d) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as
amended (the ‘‘Code’’), on a continuing basis, we will be treated, for U.S. federal income tax purposes, as a partnership
and not as an association or a publicly traded partnership taxable as a corporation. In that case our shareholders will be
subject to U.S. federal income tax and, possibly, state, local and foreign income tax, on their share of the Company’s
taxable income, which taxes or taxable income could exceed the cash distributions they receive from the Trust. There is,
62
accordingly, a risk that our shareholders may not receive cash distributions equal to their portion of our taxable income or
sufficient in amount even to satisfy their personal tax liability those results from that income. This may result from gains
on the sale or exchange of stock or debt of subsidiaries that will be allocated to shareholders who hold (or are deemed to
hold) shares on the day such gains were realized if there is no corresponding distribution of the proceeds from such sales,
or where a shareholder disposes of shares after an allocation of gain but before proceeds (if any) are distributed by the
Company. Shareholders may also realize income in excess of distributions due to the Company’s use of cash from
operations or sales proceeds for uses other than to make distributions to shareholders, including funding acquisitions,
satisfying short- and long-term working capital needs of our businesses, or satisfying known or unknown liabilities. In
addition, certain financial covenants with the Company’s lenders may limit or prohibit the distribution of cash to
shareholders. The Company’s board of directors is also free to change the Company’s distribution policy. The Company
is under no obligation to make distributions to shareholders equal to or in excess of their portion of our taxable income or
sufficient in amount even to satisfy the tax liability that results from that income.
All of the Company’s income could be subject to an entity-level tax in the United States, which could result in a material
reduction in cash flow available for distribution to holders of shares of the Trust and thus could result in a substantial
reduction in the value of the shares.
We do not expect the Company to be characterized as a corporation so long as it would not be required to register as an
investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940 and 90% or more of its gross income for each taxable
year constitutes “qualifying income.” The Company expects to receive more than 90% of its gross income each year from
dividends, interest and gains on sales of stock or debt instruments, including principally from or with respect to stock or
debt of corporations in which the Company holds a majority interest. The Company intends to treat all such dividends,
interest and gains as “qualifying income.”
If the Company fails to satisfy this “qualifying income” exception, the Company will be treated as a corporation for
U.S. federal (and certain state and local) income tax purposes, and would be required to pay income tax at regular
corporate rates on its income. Taxation of the Company as a corporation could result in a material reduction in distributions
to our shareholders and after-tax return and, thus, could likely result in a reduction in the value of, or materially adversely
affect the market price of, the shares of the Trust.
A shareholder may recognize a greater taxable gain (or a smaller tax loss) on a disposition of shares than expected
because of the treatment of debt under the partnership tax accounting rules.
We may incur debt for a variety of reasons, including for acquisitions as well as other purposes. Under partnership tax
accounting principles (which apply to the Company), debt of the Company generally will be allocable to our shareholders,
who will realize the benefit of including their allocable share of the debt in the tax basis of their investment in shares. At
the time a shareholder later sells shares, the selling shareholder’s amount realized on the sale will include not only the sales
price of the shares but also the shareholder’s portion of the Company’s debt allocable to his shares (which is treated as
proceeds from the sale of those shares). Depending on the nature of the Company’s activities after having incurred the
debt, and the utilization of the borrowed funds, a later sale of shares could result in a larger taxable gain (or a smaller tax
loss) than anticipated.
Our structure involves complex provisions of U.S. federal income tax law for which no clear precedent or authority may
be available. Our structure also is subject to potential legislative, judicial or administrative change and differing
interpretations, possibly on a retroactive basis.
The U.S. federal income tax treatment of holders of the Shares depends in some instances on determinations of fact and
interpretations of complex provisions of U.S. federal income tax law for which no clear precedent or authority may be
available. You should be aware that the U.S. federal income tax rules are constantly under review by persons involved in
the legislative process, the IRS, and the U.S. Treasury Department, frequently resulting in revised interpretations of
established concepts, statutory changes, revisions to regulations and other modifications and interpretations. The IRS pays
close attention to the proper application of tax laws to partnerships. The present U.S. federal income tax treatment of an
investment in the Shares may be modified by administrative, legislative or judicial interpretation at any time, and any such
action may affect investments and commitments previously made. For example, changes to the U.S. federal tax laws and
interpretations thereof could make it more difficult or impossible to meet the qualifying income exception for us to be
treated as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes that is not taxable as a corporation, affect or cause us to
change our investments and commitments, affect the tax considerations of an investment in us and adversely affect an
investment in our Shares. Our organizational documents and agreements permit the Board of Directors to modify our
operating agreement from time to time, without the consent of the holders of Shares, in order to address certain changes in
U.S. federal income tax regulations, legislation or interpretation. In some circumstances, such revisions could have a
63
material adverse impact on some or all of the holders of our Shares. Moreover, we will apply certain assumptions and
conventions in an attempt to comply with applicable rules and to report income, gain, deduction, loss and credit to holders
in a manner that reflects such holders’ beneficial ownership of partnership items, taking into account variation in
ownership interests during each taxable year because of trading activity. However, these assumptions and conventions may
not be in compliance with all aspects of applicable tax requirements. It is possible that the IRS will assert successfully that
the conventions and assumptions used by us do not satisfy the technical requirements of the Code and/or Treasury
regulations and could require that items of income, gain, deductions, loss or credit, including interest deductions, be
adjusted, reallocated, or disallowed, in a manner that adversely affects holders of the Shares.
Risks Relating Generally to Our Businesses
The recent disruption in the overall economy and the financial markets will adversely impact our business.
Many industries, including our businesses, have been affected by current economic factors, including the significant
deterioration of global economic conditions, declines in employment levels, and shifts in consumer spending patterns. The
recent disruptions in the overall economy and volatility in the financial markets have greatly reduced, and may continue to
reduce, consumer confidence in the economy, negatively affecting consumer spending, which could be harmful to our
financial position. Disruptions in the overall economy may also lead to a lower collection rate on billings as consumers or
businesses are unable to pay their bills in a timely fashion. Decreased cash flow generated from our products may
adversely affect our financial position and our ability to fund our operations. In addition, macro economic disruptions, as
well as the restructuring of various commercial and investment banking organizations, could adversely affect our ability to
access the credit markets. The disruption in the credit markets may also adversely affect the availability of financing to
support our strategy for growth through future acquisitions. There is a risk that government responses to the disruptions in
the financial markets will not restore consumer confidence, stabilize the markets, or increase liquidity and the availability
of credit.
Impairment of our intangible assets could result in significant charges that would adversely impact our future operating
results.
We have significant intangible assets, including goodwill with an indefinite life, which are susceptible to valuation
adjustments as a result of changes in various factors or conditions. The most significant intangible assets on our balance
sheet are goodwill, technologies, customer relationships and trademarks we acquired when we acquired our businesses and
Staffmark. Customer relationships are amortized on a straight line basis based upon the pattern in which the economic
benefits of customer relationships are being utilized. Other identifiable intangible assets are amortized on a straight-line
basis over their estimated useful lives. We assess the potential impairment of goodwill and indefinite lived intangible assets
on an annual basis, as well as whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be
recoverable. We assess definite lived intangible assets whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the
carrying value may not be recoverable.
Factors that could trigger impairment include the following:
• significant underperformance relative to historical or projected future operating results;
• significant changes in the manner of or use of the acquired assets or the strategy for our overall business;
• significant negative industry or economic trends;
• significant decline in our stock price for a sustained period;
• changes in our organization or management reporting structure could result in additional reporting units,
which ma require alternative methods of estimating fair values or greater desegregation or aggregation
in our analysis by reporting unit; and
y
• a decline in our market capitalization below net book value.
As of December 31, 2010, we had identified indefinite lived intangible assets with a carrying value in our financial
statements of $269.7 million, and goodwill of $325.9 million.
During the year ended December 31, 2010 we wrote off $35.5 million of goodwill associated with American Furniture.
We also wrote off $3.3 million in intangible assets associated with the trade name at American Furniture.
64
Further adverse changes in the operations of our businesses or other unforeseeable factors could result in an impairment
charge in future periods that would impact our results of operations and financial position in that period.
Our businesses are subject to unplanned business interruptions which may adversely affect our performance.
Operational interruptions and unplanned events at one or more of our production facilities, such as explosions, fires,
inclement weather, natural disasters, accidents, transportation interruptions and supply could cause substantial losses in our
production capacity. Furthermore, because customers may be dependent on planned deliveries from us, customers that have
to reschedule their own operations due to our delivery delays may be able to pursue financial claims against us, and we
may incur costs to correct such problems in addition to any liability resulting from such claims. Such interruptions may
also harm our reputation among actual and potential customers, potentially resulting in a loss of business. To the extent
these losses are not covered by insurance, our financial position, results of operations and cash flows may be adversely
affected by such events.
Our businesses rely and may rely on their intellectual property and licenses to use others’ intellectual property, for
competitive advantage. If our businesses are unable to protect their intellectual property, are unable to obtain or retain
licenses to use other’s intellectual property, or if they infringe upon or are alleged to have infringed upon others’
intellectual property, it could have a material adverse affect on their financial condition, business and results of
operations.
Each businesses’ success depends in part on their, or licenses to use others’, brand names, proprietary technology and
manufacturing techniques. These businesses rely on a combination of patents, trademarks, copyrights, trade secrets,
confidentiality procedures and contractual provisions to protect their intellectual property rights. The steps they have taken
to protect their intellectual property rights may not prevent third parties from using their intellectual property and other
proprietary information without their authorization or independently developing intellectual property and other proprietary
information that is similar. In addition, the laws of foreign countries may not protect our businesses’ intellectual property
rights effectively or to the same extent as the laws of the United States. Stopping unauthorized use of their proprietary
information and intellectual property, and defending claims that they have made unauthorized use of others’ proprietary
information or intellectual property, may be difficult, time-consuming and costly. The use of their intellectual property and
other proprietary information by others, and the use by others of their intellectual property and proprietary information,
could reduce or eliminate any competitive advantage they have developed, cause them to lose sales or otherwise harm their
business.
Our businesses may become involved in legal proceedings and claims in the future either to protect their intellectual
property or to defend allegations that they have infringed upon others’ intellectual property rights. These claims and any
resulting litigation could subject them to significant liability for damages and invalidate their property rights. In addition,
these lawsuits, regardless of their merits, could be time consuming and expensive to resolve and could divert
management’s time and attention. The costs associated with any of these actions could be substantial and could have a
material adverse affect on their financial condition, business and results of operations.
The operations and research and development of some of our businesses’ services and technology depend on the
collective experience of their technical employees. If these employees were to leave our businesses and take this
knowledge, our businesses’ operations and their ability to compete effectively could be materially adversely impacted.
The future success of some of our businesses depends upon the continued service of their technical personnel who have
developed and continue to develop their technology and products. If any of these employees leave our businesses, the loss
of their technical knowledge and experience may materially adversely affect the operations and research and development
of current and future services. We may also be unable to attract technical individuals with comparable experience because
competition for such technical personnel is intense. If our businesses are not able to replace their technical personnel with
new employees or attract additional technical individuals, their operations may suffer as they may be unable to keep up
with innovations in their respective industries. As a result, their ability to continue to compete effectively and their
operations may be materially adversely affected.
If our businesses are unable to continue the technological innovation and successful commercial introduction of new
products and services, their financial condition, business and results of operations could be materially adversely
affected.
The industries in which our businesses operate, or may operate, experience periodic technological changes and ongoing
product improvements. Their results of operations depend significantly on the development of commercially viable new
products, product grades and applications, as well as production technologies and their ability to integrate new
65
technologies. Our future growth will depend on their ability to gauge the direction of the commercial and technological
progress in all key end-use markets and upon their ability to successfully develop, manufacture and market products in
such changing end-use markets. In this regard, they must make ongoing capital investments.
In addition, their customers may introduce new generations of their own products, which may require new or increased
technological and performance specifications, requiring our businesses to develop customized products. Our businesses
may not be successful in developing new products and technology that satisfy their customers’ demand and their customers
may not accept any of their new products. If our businesses fail to keep pace with evolving technological innovations or
fail to modify their products in response to their customers’ needs in a timely manner, then their financial condition,
business and results of operations could be materially adversely affected as a result of reduced sales of their products and
sunk developmental costs. These developments may require our personnel staffing business to seek better educated and
trained workers, who may not be available in sufficient numbers.
Our businesses could experience fluctuations in the costs of raw materials as a result of inflation and other economic
conditions, which fluctuations could have a material adverse effect on their financial condition, business and results of
operations.
Changes in inflation could materially adversely affect the costs and availability of raw materials used in our manufacturing
businesses, and changes in fuel costs likely will affect the costs of transporting materials from our suppliers and shipping
goods to our customers, as well as the effective areas from which we can recruit temporary staffing personnel. For
example, for Advanced Circuits, the principal raw materials consist of copper and glass and represent approximately 17.9%
of net sales in 2010. Prices for these key raw materials may fluctuate during periods of high demand. The ability by these
businesses to offset the effect of increases in raw material prices by increasing their prices is uncertain. If these businesses
are unable to cover price increases of these raw materials, their financial condition, business and results of operations could
be materially adversely affected.
Our businesses do not have and may not have long-term contracts with their customers and clients and the loss of
customers and clients could materially adversely affect their financial condition, business and results of operations.
Our businesses are and may be, based primarily upon individual orders and sales with their customers and clients. Our
businesses historically have not entered into long-term supply contracts with their customers and clients. As such, their
customers and clients could cease using their services or buying their products from them at any time and for any reason.
The fact that they do not enter into long-term contracts with their customers and clients means that they have no recourse in
the event a customer or client no longer wants to use their services or purchase products from them. If a significant number
of their customers or clients elect not to use their services or purchase their products, it could materially adversely affect
their financial condition, business and results of operations.
Our businesses are and may be subject to federal, state and foreign environmental laws and regulations that expose
them to potential financial liability. Complying with applicable environmental laws requires significant resources, and
if our businesses fail to comply, they could be subject to substantial liability.
Some of the facilities and operations of our businesses are and may be subject to a variety of federal, state and foreign
environmental laws and regulations including laws and regulations pertaining to the handling, storage and transportation of
raw materials, products and wastes, which require and will continue to require significant expenditures to remain in
compliance with such laws and regulations currently in place and in the future. Compliance with current and future
environmental laws is a major consideration for our businesses as any material violations of these laws can lead to
substantial liability, revocations of discharge permits, fines or penalties. Because some of our businesses use hazardous
materials and generate hazardous wastes in their operations, they may be subject to potential financial liability for costs
associated with the investigation and remediation of their own sites, or sites at which they have arranged for the disposal of
hazardous wastes, if such sites become contaminated. Even if they fully comply with applicable environmental laws and
are not directly at fault for the contamination, our businesses may still be liable. Costs associated with these risks could
have a material adverse effect on our financial condition, business and results of operations.
Defects in the products provided by our companies could result in financial or other damages to those customers, which
could result in reduced demand for our companies’ products and/or liability claims against our companies.
Some of the products our businesses produce could potentially result in product liability suits against them. Some of our
companies manufacture products to customer specifications that are highly complex and critical to customer operations.
Defects in products could result in customer dissatisfaction or a reduction in or cancellation of future purchases or liability
claims against our companies. If these defects occur frequently, our reputation may be impaired. Defects in products could
66
also result in financial or other damages to customers, for which our companies may be asked or required to compensate
their customers. Any of these outcomes could negatively impact our financial condition, business and results of operations.
Some of our businesses are subject to certain risks associated with the movement of businesses offshore.
Some of our businesses are potentially at risk of losing business to competitors operating in lower cost countries. An
additional risk is the movement offshore of some of our businesses’ customers, leading them to procure products or
services from more closely located companies. Either of these factors could negatively impact our financial condition,
business and results of operations.
Loss of key customers of some of our businesses could negatively impact financial condition.
Some of our businesses have significant exposure to certain key customers, the loss of which could negatively impact our
financial condition, business and results of operations.
Our businesses are subject to certain risks associated with their foreign operations or business they conduct in foreign
jurisdictions.
Some of our businesses have and may have operations or conduct business outside the United States. Certain risks are
inherent in operating or conducting business in foreign jurisdictions, including exposure to local economic conditions;
difficulties in enforcing agreements and collecting receivables through certain foreign legal systems; longer payment cycles
for foreign customers; adverse currency exchange controls; exposure to risks associated with changes in foreign exchange
rates; potential adverse changes in political environments; withholding taxes and restrictions on the withdrawal of foreign
investments and earnings; export and import restrictions; difficulties in enforcing intellectual property rights; and required
compliance with a variety of foreign laws and regulations. These risks individually and collectively have the potential to
negatively impact our financial condition, business and results of operations.
Risks Related to Advanced Circuits
Unless Advanced Circuits is able to respond to technological change at least as quickly as its competitors, its services
could be rendered obsolete, which could materially adversely affect its financial condition, business and results of
operations.
The market for Advanced Circuits’ services is characterized by rapidly changing technology and continuing process
development. The future success of its business will depend in large part upon its ability to maintain and enhance its
technological capabilities, retain qualified engineering and technical personnel, develop and market services that meet
evolving customer needs and successfully anticipate and respond to technological changes on a cost-effective and timely
basis. Advanced Circuits’ core manufacturing capabilities are for 2 to 12 layer printed circuit boards. Trends towards
miniaturization and increased performance of electronic products are dictating the use of printed circuit boards with
increased layer counts. If this trend continues Advanced Circuits may not be able to effectively respond to the
technological requirements of the changing market. If it determines that new technologies and equipment are required to
remain competitive, the development, acquisition and implementation of these technologies may require significant capital
investments. It may be unable to obtain capital for these purposes in the future, and investments in new technologies may
not result in commercially viable technological processes. Any failure to anticipate and adapt to its customers’ changing
technological needs and requirements or retain qualified engineering and technical personnel could materially adversely
affect its financial condition, business and results of operations.
Advanced Circuits’ customers operate in industries that experience rapid technological change resulting in short
product life cycles and as a result, if the product life cycles of its customers slow materially, and research and
development expenditures are reduced, its financial condition, business and results of operations will be materially
adversely affected.
Advanced Circuits’ customers compete in markets that are characterized by rapidly changing technology, evolving industry
standards and continuous improvement in products and services. These conditions frequently result in short product life
cycles. As professionals operating in research and development departments represent the majority of Advanced Circuits’
net sales, the rapid development of electronic products is a key driver of Advanced Circuits’ sales and operating
performance. Any decline in the development and introduction of new electronic products could slow the demand for
Advanced Circuits’ services and could have a material adverse effect on its financial condition, business and results of
operations.
67
Electronics manufacturing services corporations are increasingly acting as intermediaries, positioning themselves
between PCB manufacturers and OEMS, which could reduce operating margins.
Advanced Circuits’ OEM customers are increasingly outsourcing the assembly of equipment to third party manufacturers.
These third party manufacturers typically assemble products for multiple customers and often purchase circuit boards from
Advanced Circuits in larger quantities than OEM manufacturers. The ability of Advanced Circuits to sell products to these
customers at margins comparable to historical averages is uncertain. Any material erosion in margins could have a material
adverse effect on Advanced Circuits’ financial condition, business and results of operations.
Risks Related to American Furniture Manufacturing
Competition from larger furniture manufacturers may adversely affect American Furniture Manufacturing’s business
and operating results.
The residential upholstered furniture industry is highly competitive. Certain of American Furniture Manufacturing’s
competitors are larger, have broader product lines and offer widely-advertised, well-known, branded products. If such
larger competitors introduce additional products in the promotional segment of the upholstered furniture market, the
segment in which American Furniture Manufacturing primarily participates, it may negatively impact American Furniture
Manufacturing’s market share and financial performance.
Risks Related to Tridien
Certain of Tridien’s products are subject to regulation by the FDA.
Certain of Tridien’s mattress products are Class II devices within Section 201(h) of the Federal FDCA (21 USC §321(h),
and, as such, are subject to the requirements of the FDCA and certain rules and regulations of the FDA. Prior to our
acquisition of Tridien, one of its subsidiaries received a warning letter from the FDA in connection with certain
deficiencies identified during a regular FDA audit, including noncompliance with certain design control requirements,
certain of the good manufacturing practice regulations defined in 21 C.F.R. 820 and certain record keeping requirements.
Tridien’s subsidiary has undertaken corrective measures to address the deficiencies and continues to fully cooperate with
the FDA. Tridien is vulnerable to actions that may be taken by the FDA which have a material adverse effect on Tridien
and/or its business. The FDA has the authority to inspect without notice, and to take any disciplinary action that it sees fit.
A change in Medicare Reimbursement Guidelines may reduce demand for Tridien’s products.
Certain changes in Medicare Reimbursement Guidelines may reduce demand for medical support surfaces and have a
material effect on Tridien’s operating performance.
Two of Tridien’s largest customers represented approximately 63.5% of its gross sales in 2010.
Tridien has significant exposure to two key customers. The loss of either customer could negatively impact Tridien’s
financial condition, business and results of operations.
Risks Related to Fox
Growth in popularity of alternative recreational activities may reduce demand for mountain bikes and off road products
which would reduce demand for Fox’s products.
Mountain biking and other off-road sports compete against numerous recreational activities for share of time and spend of
enthusiasts. Any growth in popularity of other outdoor activities at the expense of mountain biking and off-road sports
could lead to a decrease in demand for the company’s product’s and could materially adversely affect Fox’s financial
condition, business and results of operations.
68
Risks Related to HALO
Increases in the portion of existing customers and potential customers buying directly from manufacturers or
exclusively over the internet could have a material adverse effect on the business of HALO.
The promotional products industry supply chain is comprised of multiple levels. As a distributor, HALO does not
manufacturer or decorate the promotional products it sells. Additionally, in recent years there have been a number of
suppliers and distributors who have attempted to sell directly to customers over the internet with varying levels of success.
Though management believes distributors and account executives play crucial roles in the industry supply chain, increases
in the portion of end customers buying directly from manufacturers or exclusively through the internet could have a
material adverse effect on the business of HALO.
The loss of a significant number of account executives could adversely affect the business of HALO.
HALO relies on its large staff of account executives to develop and maintain relationships with end customers. HALO’s
sales force is comprised of both full time employees and sub-contractors. These professionals have relationships with
customers of varying sizes and profitability. Though management believes its compensation structure and support of its
sales forces is comparable or better than many industry participants, there can be no assurances that HALO will be able to
retain their continuing services. The loss of a significant number of account executives could adversely affect the business
of HALO.
HALO relies on suppliers for the timely delivery of products to end customers. Delays in the delivery of promotional
products to customers could adversely affect HALO’s results of operations.
HALO often relies on many of its suppliers to ship directly to its end customers (“drop-shipments”). Delays in the
shipment of products or supply shortages in promotional products in high demand could affect HALO’s standing with its
end customers and adversely affect HALO’s results of operations.
Risks Related to Staffmark
Staffmark’s business depends on its ability to attract and retain qualified staffing personnel that possess the skills
demanded by its clients.
As a provider of temporary staffing services, the success of Staffmark’s business depends on its ability to attract and retain
qualified staffing personnel who possess the skills and experience necessary to meet the requirements of its clients or to
successfully bid for new client projects. Staffmark must continually evaluate and upgrade its base of available qualified
personnel through recruiting and training programs to keep pace with changing client needs and emerging technologies.
Staffmark’s ability to attract and retain qualified staffing personnel could be impaired by rapid improvement in economic
conditions resulting in lower unemployment, increases in compensation or increased competition. During periods of
economic growth, Staffmark faces increasing competition for retaining and recruiting qualified staffing personnel, which in
turn leads to greater advertising and recruiting costs and increased salary expenses. If Staffmark cannot attract and retain
qualified staffing personnel, the quality of its services may deteriorate and its financial condition, business and results of
operations may be materially adversely affected.
Customer relocation of positions filled by Staffmark may materially adversely affect Staffmark’s financial condition,
business and results of operations
Many companies have built offshore operations, moved their operations to offshore sites that have lower employment costs
or outsourced certain functions. If Staffmark’s customers relocate positions filled by Staffmark, this would have a material
adverse effect on the financial condition, business and results of operations of Staffmark.
Staffmark assumes the obligation to make wage, tax and regulatory payments for its employees, and as a result, it is
exposed to client credit risks.
Staffmark generally assumes responsibility for and manages the risks associated with its employees’ payroll obligations,
including liability for payment of salaries and wages (including payroll taxes), as well as group health and retirement
benefits for its leased employees. These obligations are fixed, whether or not its clients make payments required by
69
services agreements, which exposes Staffmark to credit risks of its clients, primarily relating to uncollateralized accounts
receivables. If Staffmark fails to successfully manage its credit risk, its financial condition, business and results of
operations may be materially adversely affected.
Staffmark is exposed to employment-related claims and costs and periodic litigation that could materially adversely
affect its financial condition, business and results of operations.
The temporary services business entails employing individuals and placing such individuals in clients’ workplaces.
Staffmark’s ability to control the workplace environment of its clients is limited. As the employer of record of its
temporary employees, it incurs a risk of liability to its temporary employees and clients for various workplace events,
including claims of misconduct or negligence on the part of its employees; discrimination or harassment claims against its
employees, or claims by its employees of discrimination or harassment by its clients; immigration-related claims; claims
relating to violations of wage, hour and other workplace regulations; claims relating to employee benefits, entitlements to
employee benefits, or errors in the calculation or administration of such benefits; and possible claims relating to misuse of
customer confidential information, misappropriation of assets or other similar claims. Staffmark may incur fines and other
losses and negative publicity with respect to any of these situations. Some of the claims may result in litigation, which is
expensive and distracts management’s attention from the operations of Staffmark’s business. Furthermore, while
Staffmark maintains insurance with respect to many of these items, it, may not be able to continue to obtain insurance at a
cost that does not have a material adverse effect upon it. As a result, such claims (whether by reason of it not having
insurance or by reason of such claims being outside the scope of its insurance) may have a material adverse effect on
Staffmark’s financial condition, business and results of operations.
Staffmark’s workers’ compensation loss reserves may be inadequate to cover its ultimate liability for workers’
compensation costs.
Staffmark self-insures its workers’ compensation exposure for certain employees. The calculation of the workers’
compensation reserves involves the use of certain actuarial assumptions and estimates. Accordingly, reserves do not
represent an exact calculation of liability. Reserves can be affected by both internal and external events, such as adverse
developments on existing claims or changes in medical costs, claims handling procedures, administrative costs, inflation,
and legal trends and legislative changes. As a result, reserves may not be adequate.
If reserves are insufficient to cover the actual losses, Staffmark would have to increase its reserves and incur charges to its
earnings that could be material.
Any significant economic downturn could result in our clients using fewer temporary and contract workers or becoming
unable to pay us for our services on a timely basis or at all, which would materially adversely affect our business.
Because demand for recruitment services is sensitive to changes in the level of economic activity, our business may suffer
during economic downturns. As economic activity begins to slow down, companies tend to reduce their use of temporary
and contract workers before undertaking layoffs of their regular employees, resulting in decreased demand for temporary
and contract workers. Significant declines in demand, and thus in revenues, can result in expense de-leveraging, which
would result in lower profit levels.
In addition, during economic downturns companies may slow the rate at which they pay their vendors or become unable to
pay their debts as they become due. If any of our significant clients does not pay amounts owed to us in a timely manner or
becomes unable to pay such amounts to us at a time when we have substantial amounts receivable from such client, our
cash flow and profitability may suffer.
State unemployment insurance expense is a direct cost of doing business in the Staffing Industry. State unemployment tax
rates are established based on a company’s specific experience rate of unemployment claims and a state’s required funding
for total claims. Economic downturns may result in a higher occurrence of unemployment claims resulting in higher state
unemployment tax rates. Additionally, as states are paying more in total prolonged claims during an economic downturn,
states may increase unemployment tax rates to employers, regardless of the employer’s specific experience. This would
result in higher direct costs to Staffmark.
70
ITEM 1B. UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS
NONE
71
ITEM 2. – PROPERTIES
Advanced Circuits
Advanced Circuits operations are located in a 61,058 square foot building in Aurora, Colorado and a 29,942 square foot
building in Tempe. Arizona. These facilities are leased and comprise both the factory and office space. The lease terms are
for approximately 15 years with a renewal option at the Aurora, Colorado location for an additional 10 years.
American Furniture
American Furniture operates primarily from a manufacturing and warehousing facility located in Ecru, MS, of which
approximately 750,000 square feet was refurbished in 2008 as a result of damage caused by a fire in 2008. This 1.1 million
square foot facility includes 350,000 square feet of manufacturing space, 750,000 square feet of warehouse space and 82
shipping docks. AFM can add additional manufacturing lines within its existing footprint to accommodate demand during
peak times. In addition to AFM’s primary manufacturing facility, AFM leases approximately 300,000 square feet of
warehouse and small manufacturing space within the vicinity of its primary Ecru facility. AFM also leases showroom
space in High Point, North Carolina, Tupelo, Mississippi and Las Vegas, Nevada, allowing it to showcase its products to
buyers during trade shows held in the area.
ERGObaby
ERGObaby operates out of four offices. Its corporate headquarters is in Pukalani, HI where it leases 2,426 square feet.
ERGObaby’s European headquarters is located in Hamburg, Germany where it leases approximately 2,790 square feet.
ERGObaby also leases two sales offices in Paris, France and Stockholm, Sweden.
Fox
Fox’s corporate headquarters and main manufacturing facilities are located in an 86,000 square foot facility located in
Watsonville, California. In addition, Fox leases six other smaller facilities totaling approximately 120,000 square feet in
the surrounding Watsonville area.
HALO
HALO distributes its products through a leased 25,000 square foot office facility and a 72,000 square foot fulfillment
warehouse, both of which are located in Sterling, IL. Due to its high percentage of drop shipments, HALO is able to
operate from a much smaller warehouse than a similarly sized company with a traditional inventory-based business model.
HALO also maintains a small IT department in Oak Brook, IL and an office for its CEO in Chicago.
The following table shows the number of offices located in each state and the function of each office as of December 31,
2010.
State
Function
Offices Square feet
California
Illinois
Louisiana
Ohio
Tennessee
Missouri
Kansas
Maryland
Florida
Oklahoma
Georgia
Sales and warehouse
Administration
Information Technology
Warehousing
Sales
Administration
Sales
Administration
Sales
Sales
Sales
Administration
Sales
3 11,222
2 25,450
1 4,766
2 72,000
1 1,919
2 3,796
1 8,804
1 5,960
1 2,618
1 4,000
1 1,000
1 5,500
1 1,550
Liberty Safe
Liberty Safe leases offices and warehouse facilities at three locations in Payson, Utah. The corporate headquarters and
manufacturing facility is located in a 204,000 square foot building. Liberty leases two additional warehouse facilities
totaling approximately 15,600 square feet.
Staffmark
Staffmark’s principal executive offices are located in Cincinnati, Ohio where it leases 38,867 square feet of office space.
Staffmark provides staffing services through 195 branch offices located in 29 states. Lease terms for the branch offices
typically run from 3 to 5 years.
72
Tridien
Tridien leases a 33,000 square foot facility in Coral Springs, Florida, which houses its manufacturing and distribution
operations for the east coast. It also leases an 81,000 square foot facility in Corona, California, which houses the
manufacturing and distribution facilities for the west coast.
Our corporate offices are located in Westport, Connecticut, where we lease approximately 1,500 square feet from our
Manager.
We believe that our properties at each of our businesses are sufficient to meet our present needs and we do not anticipate
any difficulty in securing additional space, as needed, on acceptable terms.
73
ITEM 3. - LEGAL PROCEEDINGS
In the normal course of business, we are involved in various claims and legal proceedings. While the ultimate resolution of
these matters has yet to be determined, we do not believe that their outcome will have a material adverse effect on our
financial position or results of operations.
74
ITEM 4. - REMOVED AS RESERVED
RESERVED
75
Part II
Item 5. - Market for Registrants’ Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of
Equity Securities
Market Information
Our Trust stock trades on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “CODI” since November 1, 2010. Previously,
our stock was traded on the NASDAQ Global Select Market under the symbol “CODI.” The following table sets forth the
high and low sales prices per share as reported on the NASDAQ Global Select Market until November 1, 2010, at which
time our shares began trading on the NYSE, and thereafter on the NYSE. The highest and lowest sales prices per share of
Trust stock were $6.89 and $18.16, respectively, for the periods presented below:
Quarter Ended
December 31, 2010
September 30, 2010
June 30, 2010
March 31, 2010
December 31, 2009
September 30, 2009
June 30, 2009
March 31, 2009
High
18.16
16.30
16.30
16.08
13.33
11.15
10.32
12.20
Low
Distribution
Declared
15.92
13.03
11.00
11.45
9.87
7.94
7.63
6.89
0.34
0.34
0.34
0.34
0.34
0.34
0.34
0.34
COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE OF SHARES OF TRUST STOCK
The performance graph shown below compares the change in cumulative total shareholder return on shares of Trust
stock with the NYSE Composite Index, the NYSE Financial Sector Index, the NASDAQ Other Finance Index and the
NASDAQ Stock Market Index from May 16, 2006, when we completed our initial public offering, through the quarter
ended December 31, 2010. The graph sets the beginning value of shares of Trust stock and the indices at $100, and assumes
that all quarterly dividends were reinvested at the time of payment. This graph does not forecast future performance of
shares of Trust stock.
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
5/16/2006
6/30/2006
9/29/2006
12/29/2006
3/31/07
6/29/07
9/28/07
12/31/07
3/31/08
6/30/08
9/30/08
12/31/08
3/31/09
6/30/09
9/30/09
12/31/09
3/31/10
6/30/10
9/30/10
12/31/10
Compass Diversified Holdings
NASDAQ Other Finance Index (US)
NASDAQ Stock Market Index (US)
NYSE Financial Sector Index
NYSE Composite Index
76
Data
Compass Diversified Holdings
NASDAQ Stock Market Index
NASDAQ Other Finance Index
NYSE Financial Sector Index
NYSE Composite Index
Data
Compass Diversified Holdings
NASDAQ Stock Market Index
NASDAQ Other Finance Index
NYSE Financial Sector Index
NYSE Composite Index
Data
Compass Diversified Holdings
NASDAQ Stock Market Index
NASDAQ Other Finance Index
NYSE Financial Sector Index
NYSE Composite Index
Data
Compass Diversified Holdings
NASDAQ Stock Market Index
NASDAQ Other Finance Index
NYSE Financial Sector Index
NYSE Composite Index
Data
Compass Diversified Holdings
NASDAQ Stock Market Index
NASDAQ Other Finance Index
NYSE Financial Sector Index
NYSE Composite Index
Shareholders
June 30, 2006
$ 94.88
$ 97.44
$ 94.03
$ 96.28
$ 97.39
September 30,
2006
$ 102.73
$ 101.31
$ 104.02
$ 102.56
$ 100.98
December 31,
2006
$ 117.00
$ 108.35
$ 107.59
$ 109.91
$ 108.96
March 31, 2007
$ 116.32
$ 108.64
$ 104.70
$ 108.12
$ 110.42
March 31, 2008
$ 98.39
$ 102.24
$ 86.86
$ 83.31
$ 104.88
March 31, 2009
$ 73.55
$ 68.57
$ 55.01
$ 33.01
$ 59.39
March 31, 2010
$ 139.58
$ 107.57
$ 77.58
$ 58.00
$ 88.80
June 30, 2007
$ 125.83
$ 116.78
$ 112.86
$ 110.18
$ 117.71
June 30, 2008
$ 87.54
$ 102.86
$ 85.52
$ 71.39
$ 103.25
June 30, 2009
$ 68.75
$ 82.32
$ 68.57
$ 44.86
$ 70.40
June 30, 2010
$ 124.69
$ 94.62
$ 67.39
$ 49.31
$ 77.13
September 30,
2007
$ 115.41
$ 121.19
$ 107.18
$ 106.81
$ 119.69
September 30,
2008
$ 109.45
$ 93.84
$ 90.56
$ 69.23
$ 89.81
September 30,
2009
$ 91.64
$ 95.21
$ 74.63
$ 56.70
$ 82.39
December 31,
2007
$ 109.10
$ 118.98
$ 108.11
$ 95.51
$ 116.13
December 31,
2008
$ 90.41
$ 70.75
$ 57.91
$ 44.28
$ 68.64
December 31,
2009
$ 114.42
$ 101.80
$ 75.76
$ 54.32
$ 85.66
September 30,
2010
December 31,
2010
$ 152.90
$ 106.26
$ 70.23
$ 53.76
$ 86.81
$ 169.77
$ 119.01
$ 84.52
$ 57.05
$ 94.95
As of February 25, 2011 we had 46,725,000 shares of Trust stock outstanding that were held by fourteen holders of record;
however, we believe the number of beneficial owners of our shares is over 20,000.
77
Distributions
For the years 2009 and 2010 we have declared and paid quarterly cash distributions to holders of record as follows:
Quarter Ended
Declaration Date
Payment Date
Distribution Per Share
December 31, 2010
January 5, 2011
January 28, 2011
$0.34
September 30, 2010
October 7, 2010
October 29, 2010
$0.34
June 30, 2010
July 9, 2010
July 30, 2010
$0.34
March 31, 2010
April 8, 2010
April 30, 2010
$0.34
December 31, 2009
January 11, 2010
January 28, 2010
$0.34
September 30, 2009
October 8, 2009
October 29, 2009
$0.34
June 30, 2009
July 10, 2009
July 30, 2009
$0.34
March 31, 2009
April 9, 2009
April 30, 2009
$0.34
We currently intend to continue to declare and pay regular quarterly cash distributions on all outstanding shares through
fiscal 2011. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations - Liquidity and
Capital Resources” in Part II, Item 7.
78
ITEM 6. - SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA
The following table sets forth selected historical and other data of the Company and should be read in conjunction with the
more detailed consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this report.
Selected financial data below includes the results of operations, cash flow and balance sheet data of the Company for the
years ended December 31, 2010, 2009, 2008, 2007 and 2006. We completed our IPO on May 16, 2006 and used the
proceeds of the IPO and separate private placement transactions that closed in conjunction with our IPO, and from our third
party credit facility, to purchase controlling interests in four of our initial operating subsidiaries. The following table
details our acquisitions and dispositions subsequent to our IPO.
Acquisitions:
Advanced Circuits(1)
CBS Personnel(1)
Crosman(1)
Silvue(1)
Tridien
Aeroglide
HALO
American Furniture
Fox
Staffmark LLC(2)
Liberty
ERGObaby
(1) Represent initial operating subsidiaries.
(2) Staffmark LLC was acquired by Staffmark.
Acquisition Date
May 16, 2006
May 16, 2006
May 16, 2006
May 16, 2006
August 1, 2006
February 28, 2007
February 28, 2007
August 31, 2007
January 4, 2008
January 21, 2008
March 31, 2010
September 16, 2010
Disposition Date
n/a
n/a
January 5, 2007
June 25, 2008
n/a
June 24, 2008
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
The operating results for Crosman are reflected as discontinued operations in 2006 and are not included in the operating
data below. The operating results for Aeroglide are reflected as discontinued operations in 2008 and 2007 and are not
included in the continuing operations data below. The operating results for Silvue are reflected as discontinued operations
in 2008, 2007 and 2006 and as such are not included in the continuing operations data below. Financial data included
below only includes activity in our operating subsidiaries from their respective dates of acquisition.
Year ended December 31,
2010
$ 1,657,609
1,302,202
355,407
2009
$ 1,248,740
976,991
271,749
2008
$ 1,538,473
1,196,206
342,267
2007
$ 841,791
636,008
205,783
2006
$ 395,173
307,014
88,159
Statements of Operations Data:
Net sales ...................................................................................................................
Cost of sales .............................................................................................................
Gross profit ..............................................................................................................
Operating expenses:..................................................................................................
Staffing .....................................................................................................................
Selling, general and administrative ............................................................................
Supplemental put expense (reversal).........................................................................
Management fees ......................................................................................................
Amortization expense ...............................................................................................
Impairment expense (3).............................................................................................
Operating income (loss) ............................................................................................
81,250
179,154
32,516
15,380
29,312
38,835
$ (21,040)
74,279
145,948
(1,329)
13,100
24,609
59,800
$ (44,658)
Income (loss) from continuing operations..................................................................
$ (44,770)
$ (39,645)
Income and gain from discontinued operations ..........................................................
Net income (loss)......................................................................................................
Net income (loss) attributable to noncontrolling interest ............................................
Net income (loss) attributable to Holdings (1), (2)
-
(44,770)
3,987
$ (48,757)
-
(39,645)
(13,375)
$ (26,270)
Basic and fully diluted income (loss) per share attributable to Holdings:
102,438
165,768
6,382
15,205
24,605
-
$ 27,869
$ 3,817
77,970
81,787
3,493
$ 78,294
56,207
94,426
7,400
10,120
12,679
-
$ 24,951
$ 10,051
41,314
51,365
10,997
$ 40,368
34,345
31,605
22,456
4,158
5,814
-
$ (10,219)
$ (27,973)
9,831
(18,142)
1,107
$ (19,249)
Continuing operations..........................................................................................
Discontinued operations......................................................................................
Basic and fully diluted income (loss) per share attributable to Holdings.....................
$ (1.19)
-
$ (1.19)
$ (0.76)
-
$ (0.76)
$ 0.01
2.47
$ 2.48
$ (0.04)
1.50
$ 1.46
$ (2.29)
0.77
$ (1.52)
Cash Flow Data:
$ 40,549
Cash provided by operating activities .......................................................................
(24,793)
Cash used in investing activities ...............................................................................
(37,561)
Cash (used in) provided by financing activities .........................................................
(21,885)
Net (decrease) increase in cash and cash equivalents.................................................
(1) Includes gains on the sales of Aeroglide and Silvue in 2008 of $34.0 million and $39.4 million, respectively, and Crosman in 2007 of $36.0 million.
(2) Includes a charge to net income of $10.0 million for distributions made at the subsidiary (ACI) level in excess of cumulative earnings in 2007.
(3) Includes goodwill and intangible asset impairment at AFM during the year ended December 31, 2010, and includes goodwill impairment and intangible asset impairment at
Staffmark during the year ended December 31, 2009.
$ 20,213
(4,982)
(81,209)
(65,978)
$ 44,841
(182,392)
119,592
(17,959)
$ 41,772
(114,158)
184,882
112,352
$ 20,563
(362,286)
351,073
9,610
79
2010
2009
Balance Sheet Data:
Current assets ...........................................................................................................
Total assets ..............................................................................................................
Current liabilities ......................................................................................................
Long-term debt .........................................................................................................
Total liabilities ..........................................................................................................
Noncontrolling interests ............................................................................................
Shareholders’ equity attributable to Holdings.............................................................
$
333,339
984,041
151,404
94,000
408,131
87,840
488,070
$
275,027
831,012
129,887
74,000
322,946
70,905
437,161
December 31,
2008
$
335,201
984,336
139,370
151,000
440,458
79,431
464,447
2007
2006
$
299,241
828,002
106,613
148,000
373,285
21,867
432,850
$ 135,121
496,382
155,534
-
221,934
17,734
255,711
80
ITEM 7. - MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
This item 7 contains forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements in this Annual Report on Form 10-K are
subject to a number of risks and uncertainties, some of which are beyond our control. Our actual results, performance,
prospects or opportunities could differ materially from those expressed in or implied by the forward-looking statements.
Additional risks of which we are not currently aware or which we currently deem immaterial could also cause our
actual results to differ, including those discussed in the sections entitled “Forward-Looking Statements” and “Risk
Factors” included elsewhere in this Annual Report.
Overview
Compass Diversified Holdings, a Delaware statutory trust, was incorporated in Delaware on November 18, 2005. Compass
Group Diversified Holdings, LLC, a Delaware limited liability Company, was also formed on November 18, 2005. In
accordance with the Trust Agreement, the Trust is sole owner of 100% of the Trust Interests (as defined in the LLC
Agreement) of the Company and, pursuant to the LLC Agreement, the Company has outstanding, the identical number of
Trust Interests as the number of outstanding shares of the Trust. The Manager is the sole owner of the Allocation Interests
of the Company. The Company is the operating entity with a board of directors and other corporate governance
responsibilities, similar to that of a Delaware corporation.
The Trust and the Company were formed to acquire and manage a group of small and middle-market businesses
headquartered in North America. We characterize small and middle market businesses as those that generate annual cash
flows of up to $60 million. We focus on companies of this size because we believe that these companies are more able to
achieve growth rates above those of their relevant industries and are also frequently more susceptible to efforts to improve
earnings and cash flow.
In pursuing new acquisitions, we seek businesses with the following characteristics:
• North American base of operations;
•
stable and growing earnings and cash flow;
• maintains a significant market share in defensible industry niche (i.e., has a “reason to exist”);
•
•
•
solid and proven management team with meaningful incentives;
low technological and/or product obsolescence risk; and
a diversified customer and supplier base.
Our management team’s strategy for our subsidiaries involves:
•
•
•
•
•
utilizing structured incentive compensation programs tailored to each business in order to attract, recruit and retain
talented managers to operate our businesses;
regularly monitoring financial and operational performance, instilling consistent financial discipline, and
supporting management in the development and implementation of information systems to effectively achieve
these goals;
assisting management in their analysis and pursuit of prudent organic cash flow growth strategies (both revenue
and cost related);
identifying and working with management to execute attractive external growth and acquisition opportunities; and
forming strong subsidiary level boards of directors to supplement management in their development and
implementation of strategic goals and objectives.
Based on the experience of our management team and its ability to identify and negotiate acquisitions, we believe we are
well positioned to acquire additional attractive businesses. Our management team has a large network of approximately
81
2,000 deal intermediaries to whom it actively markets and who we expect to expose us to potential acquisitions. Through
this network, as well as our management team’s active proprietary transaction sourcing efforts, we typically have a
substantial pipeline of potential acquisition targets. In consummating transactions, our management team has, in the past,
been able to successfully navigate complex situations surrounding acquisitions, including corporate spin-offs, transitions of
family-owned businesses, management buy-outs and reorganizations. We believe the flexibility, creativity, experience and
expertise of our management team in structuring transactions provides us with a strategic advantage by allowing us to
consider non-traditional and complex transactions tailored to fit a specific acquisition target.
In addition, because we intend to fund acquisitions through the utilization of our Revolving Credit Facility, we do not
expect to be subject to delays in or conditions by closing acquisitions that would be typically associated with transaction
specific financing, as is typically the case in such acquisitions. We believe this advantage is a powerful one and is highly
unusual in the marketplace for acquisitions in which we operate.
Initial public offering and Company formation
On May 16, 2006, we completed our initial public offering of 13,500,000 shares of the Trust at an offering price of $15.00
per share (the “IPO”). Total net proceeds from the IPO, after deducting the underwriters’ discounts, commissions and
financial advisory fee, were approximately $188.3 million. On May 16, 2006, we also completed the private placement of
5,733,333 shares to CGI for approximately $86.0 million and completed the private placement of 266,667 shares to Pharos
I LLC, an entity that was controlled by Mr. Massoud, and owned by our management team, for approximately $4.0 million.
The Pharos I LLC entity was dissolved during 2010 and its shares were distributed to its individual members. CGI also
purchased 666,667 shares for $10.0 million through the IPO.
Subsequent to the IPO the Company’s board of directors engaged the Manager to externally manage the day-to-day
operations and affairs of the Company, oversee the management and operations of the businesses and to perform those
services customarily performed by executive officers of a public company.
From May 16, 2006 through December 31, 2010, we purchased eleven businesses (each of our businesses is treated as a
separate business segment) and disposed of three, as follows:
Acquisitions
• On May 16, 2006, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Staffmark Holdings, Inc., which we
refer to as Staffmark, for approximately $128 million. As of December 31, 2010, we own approximately 76.2%
of the common stock on a primary basis and 68.5% on a fully diluted basis.
• On May 16, 2006, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Crosman for approximately $73
million representing at the time of purchase approximately 75.4% of the outstanding common stock on both a
primary and fully diluted basis.
• On May 16, 2006, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Advanced Circuits for approximately
$81 million. As of December 31, 2010, we own approximately 69.6% of the common stock on a primary basis
and 69.4% fully diluted basis.
• On May 16, 2006, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Silvue for approximately $36 million,
representing at the time of purchase approximately 72.3% of the outstanding stock on both a primary and fully
diluted basis.
• On August 1, 2006, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Tridien for approximately $31
million. As of December 31, 2010, we own approximately 73.9% of the common stock on a primary basis and
61.8% on a fully diluted basis.
• On February 28, 2007, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Aeroglide for approximately $58
million, representing at the time of purchase approximately 88.9% of the outstanding stock on a primary basis and
approximately 73.9% on a fully diluted basis.
• On February 28, 2007, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in HALO for approximately $62
million. As of December 31, 2010, we own approximately 88.7% of the common stock on a primary basis and
72.8% on a fully diluted basis.
• On August 28, 2007, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in American Furniture for
approximately $97 million. As of December 31, 2010, we own approximately 99.9% of the common stock on a
primary basis and 91.4% on a fully diluted basis.
82
• On January 4, 2008, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Fox for approximately $80.4
million. As of December 31, 2010, we own approximately 75.7% of the common stock on a primary basis and
68.1% on a fully diluted basis.
• On March 31, 2010, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Liberty Safe for approximately
$70.2 million. As of December 31, 2010 we own approximately 96.2% on a primary basis and 87.7% on a fully
diluted basis.
• On September 16, 2010, we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in ERGObaby for approximately
$85.2 million. As of December 31, 2010, we own approximately 83.9% on a primary basis and 79.9% on a fully
diluted basis.
Dispositions
• On January 5, 2007, we sold all of our interest in Crosman, for approximately $143 million. We recorded a gain
on the sale in the first quarter of 2007 of approximately $36 million.
• On June 24, 2008, we sold all of our interest in Aeroglide, for approximately $95 million. We recorded a gain on
the sale in the second quarter of 2008 of approximately $34 million.
• On June 25, 2008, we sold all of our interest in Silvue, for approximately $95 million. We recorded a gain on the
sale in the second quarter of 2008 of approximately $39 million.
We are dependent on the earnings of, and cash receipts from, the businesses that we own in order to meet our corporate
overhead and management fee expenses and to pay distributions. These earnings and distributions, net of any non
controlling interest in these businesses, are available to:
•
•
•
meet capital expenditure requirements, management fees and corporate overhead charges;
fund distributions from the businesses to the Company; and
be distributed by the Trust to shareholders.
2010 Highlights
Acquisitions
• On March 11, 2010, our majority owned subsidiary Advanced Circuits, acquired Circuit Express, Inc. (“Circuit
Express”), based in Tempe, Arizona for approximately $16.1 million. Circuit Express focuses on quick-turn
manufacturing of prototype and low-volume quantities of rigid PCBs primarily for aerospace and defense related
customers. We incurred approximately $0.3 million in transaction costs.
• On March 31, 2010, we purchased a controlling interest in Liberty Safe and Security Products, Inc. (“Liberty” or
“Liberty Safe”), with headquarters in Payson, Utah. Liberty is a premier designer, manufacturer and marketer of
home and gun safes in North America. Liberty manufactures and sells a wide range of home and gun safes in a
broad assortment of sizes, features and styles which are sold in various sporting goods, farm and fleet and home
improvement retailers. We made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Liberty for approximately $70.2
million, representing approximately 88% of the equity in Liberty on a fully diluted basis. We incurred
approximately $1.5 million in transaction costs.
• On September 16, 2010, we purchased a controlling interest in ERGO Baby Carrier, Inc. (“ERGObaby”) with
headquarters in Pukalani, Hawaii. ERGObaby is a premier designer, marketer and distributor of baby wearing
products and accessories. ERGObaby offers a broad range of wearable baby carriers and related products that are
sold through more than 800 retailers and web shops in the United States and internationally in approximately 20
countries. We made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in ERGObaby for approximately $85.2 million,
representing approximately 84% of the equity in ERGObaby on a fully diluted basis. We incurred approximately
$2.0 million in transaction costs.
Common stock offerings
• On April 13, 2010, we completed a public offering of 5,250,000 Trust shares (including the underwriters’ over-
allotment completed April 23, 2010) at an offering price of $15.10 per share. The net proceeds to us, after
deducting underwriters’ discount and offering costs, totaled approximately $75.0 million. We used $70.0 million
of the net proceeds to pay down our Revolving Credit Facility.
83
• On November 12, 2010, we completed a public offering of 4,850,000 Trust shares (including the underwriters’
over-allotment completed December 8, 2010) at an offering price of $16.90 per share. The net proceeds to us,
after deducting underwriters’ discount and offering costs, totaled approximately $78.0 million. We used $70.0
million of the net proceeds to pay down our Revolving Credit Facility.
Impairment charge
We test goodwill at interim dates if events or circumstances indicate that goodwill might be impaired at any of our
reporting units. As a result, we conducted an interim test for impairment at American Furniture based on results of
operations which had deteriorated significantly during the second and third quarter of 2010. The domestic economy has
undergone a significant period of economic uncertainty which has resulted in limited access to credit markets and lower
consumer spending. The retail furniture market has been, and continues to be, severely impacted by these conditions,
particularly as it relates to the housing market. Retail furniture sales rely heavily on consumer spending for new furniture
when they move into a new home. The uptick in sales and results of operations that we anticipated at the beginning of this
year, which we believed would coincide with the overall modest economic rebound in 2010 has not occurred in the
furniture industry and we do not at this time believe it will occur in the near future. Accordingly, we adjusted our forecast
for American Furniture to reflect a revised outlook assuming continued pressure on sales and gross margins in the furniture
industry. The revised forecast, which is used to populate a discounted cash flow analysis, led to the conclusion that it was
more likely than not that the fair value of American Furniture was below its carrying amount.
Based on the results of our interim impairment tests which is a two step process, we determined that the carrying value of
American Furniture’s goodwill exceeded its fair value by approximately $35.5 million. In addition, based on the results of
the second step of the analysis we determined that the carrying value of American Furniture’s trade name exceeded its fair
value by approximately $3.3 million. As a result of these shortfalls, we recorded a $38.8 million impairment charge, which
is reflected in our consolidated results of operations for the year ended December 31, 2010.
2010 Distributions
For the 2010 fiscal year we declared distributions to our shareholders totaling $1.36 per share.
Areas for focus in 2011
The areas of focus for 2011, which are generally applicable to each of our businesses, include:
• Taking advantage, where possible, of the recent economic downturn by growing market share in each of our market
niche leading companies at the expense of less well capitalized competitors;
• Achieving sales growth, technological excellence and manufacturing capability through global expansion;
• Continuing to grow through disciplined, strategic acquisitions and rigorous integration processes;
• Continue to pursue expense reduction and cost savings through contraction in discretionary spending, and reductions
in workforce and production levels in response to lower production volume; and
• Driving free cash flow through increased net income and effective working capital management enabling continued
investment in our businesses, strategic acquisitions, and enabling us to return value to our shareholders.
84
Results of Operations
We were formed on November 18, 2005 and acquired our existing businesses (segments) as follows:
May 16, 2006
August 1, 2006
February
2007
28,
August 31, 2007
January 4, 2008 March 31, 2010
Advanced Circuits
Tridien
HALO
American
Furniture
Fox
Liberty Safe
Staffmark
September 16,
2010
ERGObaby
Fiscal 2010, 2009 and 2008 each represent a full year of operating results included in our consolidated results of operations
for six of our businesses. The remaining two businesses were acquired during fiscal 2010 (see table above). As a result,
we cannot provide a meaningful comparison of our actual historical consolidated results of operations for the year ended
December 31, 2010 with the two prior years. In the following results of operations, we provide (i) our actual consolidated
results of operations for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, which includes the historical results of
operations of our businesses (operating segments) from the date of acquisition and (ii) comparative historical results of
operations for each of our businesses on a stand-alone basis, for each of the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and for
the six businesses purchased prior to January 1, 2010, we include a comparative 2008 fiscal year as well. All years
presented include relevant pro-forma adjustments and explanations where appropriate.
Consolidated Results of Operations — Compass Diversified Holdings
Net sales
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Staffing, selling, general and administrative expense
Management fees
Supplemental put expense (reversal)
Amortization of intangibles
Impairment expense
Operating income (loss)
Years Ended December 31,
2010
2009
2008
$ 1,657,609
1,302,202
355,407
(in thousands)
$ 1,248,740
976,991
271,749
$ 1,538,473
1,196,206
342,267
260,404
15,380
32,516
29,312
38,835
$ (21,040)
220,227
13,100
(1,329)
24,609
59,800
$ (44,658)
268,206
15,205
6,382
24,605
-
$ 27,869
Net sales
On a consolidated basis net sales increased approximately $408.9 million in the year ended December 31, 2010 compared
to 2009. This increase in net sales in 2010 is due to increased revenues at each of our subsidiary businesses, particularly
Staffmark and the net sales attributable to our 2010 acquisitions and the add-on acquisition Circuit Express by our
subsidiary Advanced Circuits, offset slightly by a decrease in net sales at American Furniture. On a consolidated basis net
sales decreased approximately $289.7 million in the year ended December 31, 2009 compared to 2008 due principally to
decreased revenues at our subsidiary businesses Staffmark, Advanced Circuits, Tridien, Fox and Halo offset in part by
increased net sales at American Furniture. Revenues at Staffmark decreased $261.0 million during the year ended
December 31, 2009 compared with the same period in 2008. Refer to “Results of Operations – Our Businesses” for a
more detailed analysis of net sales and revenues by operating segment.
We do not generate any revenues apart from those generated by the businesses we own. We may generate interest income
on the investment of available funds, but expect such earnings to be minimal. Our investment in our businesses is typically
in the form of loans from the Company to such businesses, as well as equity interests in those companies. Cash flows
coming to the Trust and the Company are the result of interest payments on those loans, amortization of those loans and,
dividends on our equity ownership. However, on a consolidated basis these items are eliminated.
85
Cost of sales
On a consolidated basis cost of sales increased approximately $325.2 million in the year ended December 31, 2010
compared to 2009 and decreased approximately $219.2 million in the year ended December 31, 2009 compared to 2008.
These charges are due almost entirely to the corresponding decrease/increase in net sales referred to above. Refer to
“Results of Operations – Our Businesses” for a more detailed analysis of cost of sales by operating segment.
Staffing, selling, general and administrative expense
On a consolidated basis, staffing, selling, general and administrative expense increased approximately $40.2 million in the
year ended December 31, 2010 compared to 2009. The 2010 vs. 2009 year over year increase is due principally to (i)
increases in costs directly and indirectly linked to sales increases and increased operating activity at our subsidiary
businesses; (ii) selling, general and administrative costs related to our 2010 acquisitions and the Circuit Express acquisition
($13.8 million); (iii) acquisition transaction costs incurred related to the 2010 acquisitions and Circuit Express ($3.9
million); (iv) non-cash compensation cost at Advanced Circuits resulting from options granted to senior management ($3.8
million); and, (v) settlement of a lawsuit at Staffmark ($2.1 million). On a consolidated basis staffing, selling, general and
administrative costs decreased approximately $48.0 million in the year ended December 31, 2009 compared to the same
period in 2008. The 2009 vs. 2008 year over year decrease is due principally to cost cutting measures enacted at the
operating segment level in response to the softening economy and its negative impact on sales and operating income in
2009. Additionally, costs directly tied to sales, such as commission expense, declined as a direct result of the decrease in
net sales in 2009. At the corporate level general and administrative costs increased approximately $0.4 million for the
year ended December 31, 2010 compared to the same period in 2009 due principally to a non-cash charge totaling
approximately $1.0 million related to the increase in value of a call option granted to the former CEO of Tridien ($1.0
million) offset in part by a decrease in professional fees principally related to Sarbanes Oxley compliance. For the year
ended December 31, 2009 costs at the corporate level decreased approximately $1.3 million compared to the comparable
period in 2008 due principally to lower costs for professional fees incurred in 2009 in connection with Sarbanes Oxley
compliance. - Please refer to “Results of Operations – Our Businesses” for a more detailed analysis of staffing, selling,
general and administrative expense by operating segment.
Management fees
Pursuant to the Management Services Agreement, we pay CGM a quarterly management fee equal to 0.5% (2.0%
annualized) of our adjusted net assets, which is defined in the Management Services Agreement (see Related Party
Transactions). For the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008 we incurred approximately $15.4 million, $13.1
million and $15.2 million, respectively, in expense for these fees. The increase in management fees in 2010 compared to
2009 is due principally to the inclusion of the 2010 acquisitions in our consolidated adjusted net assets, offset in part by the
$38.8 million impairment charge at American Furniture. The decrease in Management fees in 2009 compared to 2008 is
due principally to the decrease in consolidated assets used as a component in calculating the Management fee at December
31, 2009 resulting from the $75.0 million pay down of our Term Loan Facility with available cash in February 2009 and
the $59.8 million impairment charge in 2009. Staffmark incurred approximately $0.1 million, $0.3 million and $0.5
million in management fees during the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively, to the predecessor
owner of Staffmark. - Please refer to “Related Party Transactions and Certain Transactions Involving our Businesses” for
more information about the Management Services Agreement.
Supplemental put expense
In 2006 we entered into a Supplemental Put Agreement with our Manager pursuant to which our Manager has the right to
cause us to purchase the Allocation Interests then owned by them upon termination of the Management Services
Agreement. The Company accrued approximately $32.5 million and $6.4 million in expense during the years ended
December 31, 2010 and 2008, respectively, and reversed approximately $1.3 million in expense during 2009 in connection
with this agreement. This expense represents that portion of the estimated increase/decrease in the fair value of our
businesses over our original basis in those businesses that our Manager is entitled to if the Management Services
Agreement were terminated or those businesses were sold. The significant increase in this liability in 2010 is principally
the result of the significant increase in fair value of our Staffmark segment at December 31, 2010 compared to 2009 -
Please refer to “Related Party Transactions and Certain Transactions Involving our Businesses” for more information about
the Supplemental Put Agreement. Please also refer to “Critical Accounting Estimates” for more information about the
supplemental put liability calculation.
Impairment expense
We incurred an impairment charge at American Furniture in the year ended December 31, 2010 totaling $38.8 million. We
conducted an interim test for impairment at American Furniture which was triggered based on results of operations which
had deteriorated significantly during the second and third quarter of 2010. Based on the results of the second step of the
86
impairment test at American Furniture, we determined that the carrying value of American Furniture goodwill exceeded its
fair value by approximately $35.5 million. As a result of this shortfall, we recorded a $35.5 million pretax goodwill
impairment charge. The remaining $3.3 million charge reflects a write down of the unamortized American Furniture trade
name to its fair value.
Based on the results of our annual impairment tests performed as of March 31, 2009 an indication of impairment existed at
the Staffmark reporting unit. In each of our other businesses (reporting units) the result of the annual goodwill impairment
test indicated that the fair value of the business exceeded its carrying value. Based on the results of the second step of the
impairment test at Staffmark, we estimated that the carrying value of Staffmark goodwill exceeded its fair value by
approximately $50.0 million. As a result of this shortfall, we recorded a $50.0 million pretax goodwill impairment charge
for 2009.
In connection with the 2009 annual goodwill impairment tests, we tested other indefinite-lived intangible assets at our
Staffmark reporting unit. As a result of this analysis we determined that the carrying value exceeded the fair value of the
CBS Personnel trade name, based principally on the discontinuance of the use of the CBS Personnel trade name and
rebranding of the reporting units business to Staffmark beginning in February 2009. During 2009, we recorded an asset
impairment charge of approximately $9.8 million at the corporate level to decrease the carrying value of the CBS personnel
trade name to its fair value.
The results of the annual impairment tests performed as of April 30, 2008 indicated that the fair values of the reporting
units (businesses) exceeded their carrying values and, therefore goodwill was not impaired. Accordingly, there were no
charges for goodwill impairment in 2008.
Results of Operations — Our Businesses
As previously discussed, we acquired our businesses on various acquisition dates beginning May 16, 2006 (see table
above). As a result, our consolidated operating results only include the results of operations since the acquisition date
associated with each of our businesses. The following discussion reflects a comparison of the historical results of
operations for each of our initial businesses (segments), the 2007 acquisitions and the 2008 acquisitions for the complete
fiscal years ending December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008. In addition, the historical results of operations for Staffmark
include the results of Staffmark (acquired on January 21, 2008) as if Staffmark acquired Staffmark LLC as of January 1,
2008. For the 2010 acquisitions, the following discussion reflects comparative historical results of operations for the
entire fiscal years ending December 31, 2010 and 2009 as if we had acquired the businesses on January 1, 2009. When
appropriate, relevant pro-forma adjustments are reflected in the historical operating results. Adjustments to depreciation
and amortization resulting from purchase allocations that are not “pushed down” to a business are not included as a
component of operating results. We believe this presentation enhances the discussion and provides a more meaningful
comparison of operating results. The following operating results of our businesses are not necessarily indicative of the
results to be expected for a full year, going forward.
Advanced Circuits
Overview
Advanced Circuits is a provider of prototype, quick-turn and volume production PCBs to customers throughout the United
States. Collectively, prototype and quick-turn PCBs represent approximately 66.0% of Advanced Circuits’ gross revenues.
Prototype and quick-turn PCBs typically command higher margins than volume production PCBs given that customers
require high levels of responsiveness, technical support and timely delivery of prototype and quick-turn PCBs and are
willing to pay a premium for them. Advanced Circuits is able to meet its customers’ demands by manufacturing custom
PCBs in as little as 24 hours, while maintaining over 98.0% error-free production rates and real-time customer service and
product tracking 24 hours per day.
While global demand for PCBs has remained strong in recent years, industry wide domestic production has declined over
50% since 2000. In contrast, Advanced Circuits’ revenues increased steadily through 2008 (2009 saw a slight reduction)
and increased again in 2010, as its customers’ prototype and quick-turn PCB requirements, such as small quantity orders
and rapid turnaround, are less able to be met by low cost volume manufacturers in Asia and elsewhere. Advanced Circuits’
management anticipates that demand for its prototype and quick-turn printed circuit boards will remain strong and
anticipates that demand will be impacted less by current economic conditions than by its longer lead time production
business, which is driven more by consumer purchasing patterns and capital investments by businesses.
We purchased a controlling interest in Advanced Circuits on May 16, 2006.
87
On March 11, 2010, Advanced Circuits acquired Circuit Express based in Tempe, Arizona for approximately $16.1
million. Circuit Express focuses on quick-turn manufacturing of prototype and low-volume quantities of rigid PCBs
primarily for aerospace and defense related customers.
Net sales for Circuit Express from its acquisition date through December 31, 2010 included in the discussion below were
approximately $15.8 million in 2010. The breakdown in Circuit Express’s sales by product sector were as follows: quick-
turn PCBs ($6.3 million), prototype PCBs ($6.0 million), and Long-lead PCBs ($3.5 million).
Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the statement of operations for Advanced Circuits for the fiscal years ending December 31,
2010, 2009 and 2008.
Year Ended December 31,
2010
Net sales ......................................................................................... $ 74,481
Cost of sales ...................................................................................
33,396
Gross profit ...............................................................................
41,085
Selling, general and administrative expenses ................................
17,333
Management fees ........................................................................... 500
Amortization of intangibles ...........................................................
2,864
Income from operations ............................................................ $ 20,388
2009
(in thousands)
$ 46,518
19,958
26,560
7,367
375
2,521
$ 16,297
2008
$ 55,449
23,781
31,668
10,872
500
2,631
$ 17,665
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2010 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2009
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 were approximately $74.5 million compared to approximately $46.5
million for the year ended December 31, 2009, an increase of $28.0 million or 60.1%. The increase in net sales is
principally due to increased sales in quick-turn ($7.0 million), prototype ($7.0 million) and long-lead ($10.4 million)
production PCBs. In addition, sub-contract and assembly sales increased approximately $3.1 million. Quick-turn
production PCBs represented approximately 32.6% of gross sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 compared to
approximately 36.3% for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2009. Prototype production represented approximately
28.9% of gross sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 compared to approximately 30.6% for the same period in 2009.
Assembly sales represented approximately 6.6% of gross sales in 2010 compared to approximately 4.8% in 2009.
The increase in net sales in both the quick turn and prototype categories in 2010 when compared to 2009 is largely the
result of sales attributable to Circuit Express. The increase in net sales in long-lead production is attributable to the overall
turnaround in the economy.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2010 was approximately $33.4 million compared to approximately
$20.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, an increase of approximately $13.4 million or 67.3%. The increase in
cost of sales was largely due to the increase in net sales. Gross profit as a percentage of net sales for the year ended
December 31, 2010 was 55.2% compared to 57.1% in 2009. The decrease in gross profit as a percentage of sales in 2010
is the result of lower margins earned on the Circuit Express product during the year and increases in lower margin
assembly and long-lead time sales as a percentage of sales.
Selling, general and administrative expenses
Selling, general and administrative expenses increased approximately $10.0 million during the year ended December 31,
2010 compared to the corresponding period in 2009. Approximately $3.3 million of the increase is attributable to costs
incurred at the Circuit Express operations. In addition to costs incurred directly at Circuit Express, salaries and wages
increased $2.7 million and commissions increased $0.3 million in 2010 as compared to 2009. These increases are largely
the result of supporting the operations associated with the significant increase in net sales in 2010 compared to 2009.
Lastly, non-cash stock compensation costs resulting from options issued to senior management totaling approximately $3.8
million were incurred and are included in general and administrative costs in 2010. No such costs were incurred in 2009.
88
Income from operations
Income from operations for the year ended December 31, 2010 was $20.4 million compared to $16.3 million for the year
ended December 31, 2009, an increase of $4.1 million. This increase primarily was the result of increased net sales and
other factors described above.
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2009 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2008
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2009 were approximately $46.5 million compared to approximately $55.4
million for the year ended December 31, 2008, a decrease of approximately $8.9 million or 16.1%. The decrease in net
sales was due to decreased sales in quick-turn ($2.1 million) and prototype ($3.4 million) production PCBs. In addition,
long-lead and sub-contract sales decreased approximately $4.7 million. These decreases were offset in part by an increase
in assembly sales of $1.1 million. Quick-turn production PCBs represented approximately 36.3% of gross sales for the year
ended December 31, 2009 compared to approximately 34.4% for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2008. Prototype
production represented approximately 30.6% of gross sales for the year ended December 31, 2009 compared to
approximately 31.6% for the same period in 2008. Long-lead production and sub-contract sales as a percentage of gross
sales decreased to approximately 28.3% of gross sales for the fiscal year 2009 compared to approximately 31.7% for fiscal
2008. Assembly sales represented approximately 4.8% of gross sales in 2009 compared to approximately 2.3% in 2008.
The decline in net sales in each of the PCB categories in 2009 when compared to 2008 is attributable to the economic
slowdown in 2009 and the adverse impact it had on our customers during the year.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2009 was approximately $20.0 million compared to approximately
$23.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2008, a decrease of approximately $3.8 million or 16.1%. The decrease in
cost of sales was largely due to the decrease in net sales. Gross profit as a percent of net sales in each of the years ended
December 31, 2009 and 2008 was approximately 57.1%.
Selling, general and administrative expenses
Selling, general and administrative expenses decreased approximately $3.5 million during the year ended December 31,
2009 compared to the corresponding period in 2008. Approximately $2.2 million of the decrease is attributable to reduced
loan forgiveness charges in 2009, compared to 2008, which include a reversal of prior year charges totaling approximately
$1.6 million. The remaining decrease of approximately $1.3 million is principally due to decreases in personnel, salaries
and wages and associated benefits due principally to lower net sales in 2009. See Significant Related Party Transactions –
Advanced Circuits.
Income from operations
Income from operations for the year ended December 31, 2009 was $16.3 million compared to $17.7 million for the year
ended December 31, 2008, a decrease of $1.4 million. This decrease primarily was the result of decreased net sales and
other factors described above.
American Furniture
Overview
Founded in 1998 and headquartered in Ecru, Mississippi, American Furniture is a leading U.S. manufacturer of upholstered
furniture, focused exclusively on the promotional segment of the furniture industry. American Furniture offers a broad
product line of stationary and motion furniture, including sofas, loveseats, sectionals, recliners and complementary
products, sold primarily at retail price points ranging between $199 and $1,399. American Furniture is a low-cost
manufacturer and is able to ship any product in its line to over 800 customers within 48 hours of receiving an order.
On February, 12, 2008, American Furniture’s 1.1 million square foot corporate office and manufacturing facility in Ecru,
MS was partially destroyed in a fire. Approximately 750 thousand square feet of the facility was impacted by the fire. The
executive offices were fundamentally unaffected. The recliner and motion plant, although largely unaffected, suffered
some smoke damage but resumed operations on February 21, 2008. There were no injuries related to the fire.
The Company temporarily moved its stationary production lines into other facilities. In addition to its 45 thousand square
foot ‘flex’ facility, management secured 320 thousand square feet of additional manufacturing and warehouse space in the
surrounding Pontotoc area. These temporary stationary production facilities provided the company with approximately
90% of the pre-fire stationary production capabilities for the months of April, through November. Orders for motion and
89
recliner products were addressed by the production facilities that were largely unaffected by the fire at the Ecru, MS
facility. On November 7, 2008 the damaged manufacturing facility was fully restored and operating.
American Furniture’s products are adapted from established designs in the following categories: (i) motion and recliner;
(ii) stationary; (iii) occasional chair and; (iv) accent tables and rugs. American Furniture’s products are manufactured from
common components and offer proven select fabric options, providing manufacturing efficiency and resulting in limited
design risk or inventory obsolescence.
Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the results of operations for American Furniture for the fiscal years ending December 31,
2010, 2009 and 2008. We purchased a controlling interest in American Furniture on August 31, 2007.
Year Ended December 31,
2010
Net sales ................................................................................................. $ 136,901
115,003
Cost of sales ............................................................................................
Gross profit .......................................................................................
21,898
Selling, general and administrative expenses .........................................
17,468
Management fees .................................................................................... 500
Amortization of intangibles ....................................................................
2,183
Impairment expense ...............................................................................
38,835
Income (loss) from operations .......................................................... $ (37,088)
2009
(in thousands)
$ 141,971
114,345
27,626
18,081
375
2,683
-
$ 6,487
2008
$ 130,949
104,540
26,409
17,853
500
2,933
-
$ 5,123
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2010 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2009
Net sales
Net sales for the twelve months ended December 31, 2010 decreased approximately $5.1 million or 3.6% over the
corresponding period in 2009. Stationary product net sales were flat for the period while motion and recliner sales
decreased $4.6 million. Occasional chairs, accent tables and rug sales decreased $0.4 million in 2010 compared to 2009.
The decrease in motion product sales ($4.0 million) is the result of the softer retail environment in the more expensive
product categories such as our motion products and the increasing presence of Asian import product which often offers a
better overall value proposition to customers. The more modest decrease in net sales of recliners, chairs, tables and rugs in
2010 are due to an overall weaker retail market for furniture in 2010 than in 2009. The retail furniture market continues to
absorb downward pressure from lower consumer spending on new furniture due principally to the limited access to credit
available to new home buyers. Retail furniture sales rely heavily on consumer spending for new furniture when they move
into a new home.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales increased by approximately $0.7 million in the year ended December 31, 2010 compared to the same period
of 2009 despite a corresponding decrease in sales. Gross profit as a percentage of sales was 16.0% in the year ended
December 31, 2010 compared to 19.5% in the corresponding period in 2009. The decrease in gross profit as a percentage
of sales of approximately 350 basis points in 2010 is attributable to business interruption insurance proceeds recorded in
2009 which accounts for a third of the year over year increase. Excluding the insurance proceeds in 2009 gross profit
decreased approximately 234 basis points in 2010. The remainder of this decrease in gross profit as a percentage of revenue
is the result of increased raw material cost of 160 basis points with the remainder of the increase principally resulting from
significant increases in ocean cargo shipping rates incurred in 2010 especially in conjunction with the increased number of
cut and sewn kits being imported from China. We anticipate higher costs for both raw materials and oceangoing shipping
rates in fiscal 2011.
Selling, general and administrative expense
Selling, general and administrative expense for the year ended December 31, 2010, decreased approximately $0.6 million
compared to the same period of 2009. This decrease in the period over period expense is primarily due to decreases in
insurance expense ($0.7 million), drivers pay ($0.2 million), commission expense ($0.3 million) and other administrative
costs ($0.2 million) as a result of decreases in net sales. These decreases were offset in part by increases in bad debt
expense ($0.5 million) and advertising expense ($0.4 million). The increase in bad debt expense is due to write offs of two
retailer’s balances.
90
Amortization of intangibles
Intangible amortization decreased approximately $0.5 million in the year ended December 31, 2010 compared to the same
period in 2009 due to the expiration of non-compete agreements that were being amortized in 2009.
Impairment expense
American Furniture incurred an impairment charge to its goodwill and unamortized trade name during the year ended
December 31, 2010 aggregating $38.8 million. We conducted an interim test for impairment at American Furniture which
was triggered based on results of operations which had deteriorated significantly during the second and third quarter of
2010. The portion of the impairment charge that was attributable to impaired goodwill at American Furniture was $35.5
million. The remaining $3.3 million reflected a write off of a portion of the unamortized American Furniture trade name.
There were no impairment charges for American Furniture in 2009.
Income (loss) from operations
Loss from operations totaled approximately $37.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 compared to income from
operations of approximately $6.5 million for the same period in 2009 due to the factors described above, including the non-
cash impairment charge of $38.8 million in 2010.
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2009 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2008
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2009 were $142.0 million compared to $130.9 million for the same period in
2008, an increase of $11.0 million or 8.4%. Stationary product sales increased approximately $16.7 million for the year
ended December 31, 2009 compared to the same period in 2008. Motion and recliner product sales decreased
approximately $4.5 million, while table and occasional sales decreased $1.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2009
compared to the same period in 2008. The increase in net sales of stationary product was principally due to the inability to
ship product in 2008 as a result of the lack of product resulting from the fire that destroyed the finished goods warehouse
and most of the manufacturing facilities in February 2008. The decrease in net sales of motion product in 2009 was the
result of the continuing soft retail environment in the more expensive retail categories and a larger presence of Asian
import product in the motion category in 2009. Stationary product represented 70% of net sales in 2009 compared to
63.5% in 2008.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales increased approximately $9.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2009 compared to the same period of
2008 and was due principally to the corresponding increase in sales. Gross profit as a percentage of sales was 19.5% for the
year ended December 31, 2009 compared to 20.2% in the corresponding period in 2008. The decrease in gross profit as a
percentage of sales of 0.7% for the year ended December 31, 2009 compared to the same period in 2008 is attributable to
an increase in third-party shipping cost (2.0%) and raw material costs (0.8%) offset in part by labor efficiencies achieved
due to the increased volume and a greater use of imported cut and sew kits (1.9%). During the year ended December 31,
2009 management estimates that it utilized third-party carriers for approximately 70% of its customer shipments compared
to approximately 50% during 2008. Historically, American Furniture has charged third-party shipping costs to cost of sales
and in-house shipping costs to selling expense. (See below for offsetting variance in in-house shipping costs).
Selling, general and administrative expenses
Selling, general and administrative expenses for the year ended December 31, 2009 increased approximately $0.2 million
over the corresponding period in 2008. This increase was largely a product of the business interruption insurance proceeds
recorded during 2008 totaling approximately $3.1 million (none was recorded in selling, general and administrative
expense in 2009), increases in sales commissions and insurance expense totaling $0.8 million in 2009 offset by a reduction
in in-house shipping costs totaling $3.7 million in 2009.
Income from operations
Income from operations increased approximately $1.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2009 over the
corresponding period in 2008, primarily due to the increase in net sales, and other factors as described above.
91
ERGObaby
Overview
ERGObaby, with headquarters in Pukalani, Hawaii, is a premier designer, marketer and distributor of baby wearing
products and accessories. ERGObaby offers a broad range of wearable baby carriers and related products that are sold
through more than 800 retailers and web shops in the United States and internationally in approximately 20 countries.
ERGObaby has two main product lines: baby carriers and accessories.
On September 16, 2010 we made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in ERGObaby for approximately $85.2
million, representing approximately 84% of the equity in ERGObaby. ERGObaby’s reputation for product innovation,
reliability and safety has lead to numerous awards and accolades from consumer surveys and publications, including
Parenting Magazine, Pregnancy magazine and Wired magazine.
Pro-forma Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the pro-forma results of operations for ERGObaby for the full fiscal years ended December
31, 2010 and 2009. We acquired ERGObaby on September 16, 2010. The following operating results are reported as if we
acquired ERGObaby on January 1, 2009.
(in thousands)
Year ended December 31,
2010
(Pro-forma)
2009
(Pro-forma)
Net sales ................................................................................................. $ 34,472
Cost of sales (a) ......................................................................................
10,833
Gross profit .......................................................................................
23,639
Selling, general and administrative expenses (b) ..................................
11,985
Management fees (c) .............................................................................. 500
Amortization of intangibles (d) .............................................................
1,715
Income from operations .................................................................... $ 9,439
$ 22,767
6,055
16,712
7,976
500
1,716
$ 6,520
Pro-forma results of operations of ERGObaby for the annual periods ended December 31, 2010 and 2009 include the following pro-
forma adjustment applied to historical results:
(a) Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 does not include $3.8 million of amortization expense associated with the
inventory fair value step-up recorded in 2010 as a result of and derived from the purchase price allocation in connection with
our purchase of ERGObaby.
(b) Selling, general and administrative costs were reduced by approximately $10.0 million in the year ended December 31, 2010,
representing an adjustment for one-time transaction costs incurred as a result of our purchase.
(c) Represents management fees that would have been payable to the Manager.
(d) An increase in amortization of intangible assets totaling $1.2 million in 2010 and $1.7 million in 2009. This adjustment is a
result of and was derived from the purchase price allocation in connection with our acquisition of ERGObaby.
Pro forma year ended December 31, 2010 compared to the pro forma year ended December 31, 2009.
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 were $34.5 million, an increase of $11.7 million or 51.4% compared to the
same period in 2009. Domestic sales were approximately $15.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 compared
to approximately $11.0 million in the same period for 2009 as the number of domestic retail outlets for the company’s
products increased from 648 in 2009 to 863 in 2010. International sales increased to $19.0 million for the year ended
December 31, 2010 compared to $11.8 million in the same period in 2009. The increase of $7.2 million was primarily
attributable to increased sales to distributors in Asia. Baby carriers represented 87% of sales in 2010 compared to 89% in
2009. The remaining net sales in each of the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2009 reflects accessory sales.
92
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 increased to $10.8 million from $6.1 million in the same period in
2009. The increase is due to the increase in sales in the same period. Gross profit as a percentage of sales decreased from
73.4% for the year ended 2009 to 68.6% for 2010. The decrease is attributable to a change in the product sales mix and an
unfavorable customer mix. Throughout 2010 there was an increase in the sales of organic baby carriers versus baby
carriers. The dollar margins are similar but the organic baby carriers have a higher cost and thus an over 10% lower gross
profit percentage than other baby carriers. In addition, much of the sales growth in 2010 was in sales to international
distributors which have a lower selling price point than wholesale and online customers, further reducing the gross profit
percentage.
Selling, general and administrative expenses
Selling, general and administrative expense for the year ended December 31, 2010 increased to approximately $12.0
million or 34.8% of sales versus $8.0 million or 35.0% of sales for 2009. The increase is due principally to increases in
marketing, salary expense and sales commissions in 2010, commensurate with the increase in net sales.
Income from operations
Income from operations for the year ended December 31, 2010 increased approximately $2.9 million to $9.4 million
compared to the corresponding period in 2009 based principally on the significant increase in net sales and other factors
described above.
Fox
Overview
Fox, headquartered in Watsonville, California, is a branded action sports company that designs, manufactures and markets
high-performance suspension products for mountain bikes and power sports, which include: snowmobiles, motorcycles,
all-terrain vehicles ATVs, and other off-road vehicles.
Fox’s products are recognized by manufacturers and consumers as being among the most technically advanced suspension
products currently available in the marketplace. Fox’s technical success is demonstrated by its dominance of award
winning performances by professional athletes across its suspension products. As a result, Fox’s suspension components
are incorporated by OEM customers on their high-performance models at the top of their product lines in the mountain
bike and power sports sector. OEMs capitalize on the strength of Fox’s brand to maintain and expand their own sales and
margins. In the Aftermarket segment, customers seeking higher performance select Fox’s suspension components to
enhance their existing equipment.
Fox sells to more than 200 OEM and 7,600 Aftermarket customers across its market segments. In each of the years 2010,
2009 and 2008, approximately 78%, 76% and 76% of net sales were to OEM customers. The remaining net sales were to
Aftermarket customers. Sales of suspension components to the bicycle sector represent a significant majority of both
OEM and Aftermarket sales in each of the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008.
Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the results of operations for Fox for the fiscal years ending December 31, 2010, 2009 and
2008. We purchased a controlling interest in Fox on January 4, 2008.
Year Ended December 31,
2010
Net sales .................................................................................................. $ 170,983
122,373
Cost of sales ..........................................................................................
Gross profit .......................................................................................
48,610
Selling, general and administrative expenses ........................................
23,317
Management fees ................................................................................... 500
Amortization of intangibles ....................................................................
5,217
Income from operations .................................................................... $ 19,576
2009
(in thousands)
$ 121,519
87,038
34,481
18,231
375
5,217
$ 10,658
2008
$ 131,734
95,844
35,890
19,182
500
5,501
$ 10,707
93
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2010 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2009
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 increased approximately $49.5 million, or 40.7%, versus the
corresponding period in 2009. OEM sales increased $41.7 million to $134.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2010
compared to $92.5 million for the same period in 2009. The increase in OEM net sales is attributable to increases in sales
in the mountain biking sector totaling $28.8 million and increases in sales in the powered vehicles sector totaling
approximately $12.9 million. The increase in sales in the mountain biking sector during the year ended December 31, 2010
is due to the rebound from the impact of the global economic recession experienced in 2009 which had created excess
capacity in the industry. The increase in sales to the powered vehicle sector during 2010 is the result of an increase in sales
to Ford Motor Company for use in its F-150 Raptor Off-road pickup truck and increases in sales of suspension components
to the ATV market. Aftermarket sales increased approximately $7.8 million to $36.8 million for the year ended December
31, 2010 compared to $29.0 million in the same period in 2009. This increase is largely attributable to increases in net sales
in the powered vehicles sector ($5.0 million).
International OEM and Aftermarket sales were $113.6 million in 2010 compared to $84.0 million in 2009, an increase of
$29.6 million or 35.2%.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 increased approximately $35.3 million, or 40.6%, compared to the
corresponding period in 2009. The increase in cost of sales is attributable to the increase in net sales for the same period.
Gross profit as a percentage of sales is approximately 28.4% in each of the years 2010 and 2009.
Selling, general and administrative expenses
Selling, general and administrative expenses for the year ended December 31, 2010 increased approximately $5.1 million
over the corresponding period in 2009. This increase is the result of increases in (i) marketing costs ($0.7 million), (ii)
engineering costs ($1.3 million), and (iii) other administrative costs ($2.4 million), compared to 2009, principally to
support the significant increase in sales.
Income from operations
Income from operations for the year ended December 31, 2010 increased approximately $8.9 million to $19.6 million
compared to the corresponding period in 2009, based principally on the significant increase in net sales, offset in part by
the increases in selling, general and administrative costs, as described above.
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2009 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2008
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2009 decreased $10.2 million, or 7.8%, versus the corresponding period in
2008. OEM sales declined $7.8 million to $92.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2009 compared to $100.3
million for the same period in 2008. The decrease in net sales was attributable to a decrease in sales in the mountain biking
sector totaling $12.7 million, offset in part by increases in sales to the powered vehicles sector totaling approximately $4.9
million. The decrease in sales in the mountain biking sector during the year ended December 31, 2009 was due to the
impact of the global economic recession experienced in 2009 which created excess capacity in the industry, particularly in
the first half of the year. The increase in sales to the powered vehicle sector during 2009 was the result of sales of new
suspension components to Ford Motor Company for use in its F-150 Raptor Off-road pickup and increases in sales of
suspension components to the ATV market. Aftermarket sales declined $2.4 million to $29.0 million for the year ended
December 31, 2009 compared to $31.4 million in the same period in 2008. This decrease was largely attributable to
decreases in net sales in the mountain bike sector due to the negative impact of the global recession.
International OEM and Aftermarket sales were $84.0 million in 2009 compared to $92.5 million in 2008 a decrease of $8.5
million or 9.2%. This decrease was due to the global economic recession experienced in 2009 resulting in a temporary
oversupply issue in the industry.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2009 decreased approximately $8.8 million, or 9.2%, compared to the
corresponding period in 2008. The decrease in cost of sales is primarily attributable to the decrease in net sales for the
same period. Gross profit as a percentage of sales increased to 28.4% at December 31, 2009 from 27.2% at December 31,
2008, largely due to lower material and component costs in 2009 together with lower freight costs as supply chain
94
improvements reduced the necessity to air ship product and to lower product warranty costs as high quality products
continued to reduce these costs.
Selling, general and administrative expenses
Selling, general and administrative expenses for the year ended December 31, 2009 decreased approximately $1.0 million
over the corresponding period in 2008. This decrease was the result of decreases in 2009 in (i) marketing costs ($0.5
million), (ii) a decline in bad debt expense ($0.25 million), and decreases in other administrative costs compared to 2008.
Income from operations
Income from operations for the year ended December 31, 2009 decreased less than $0.1 million compared to the
corresponding period in 2008, based principally on the decline in net sales, offset by the cost savings described above.
HALO
Overview
Operating under the brand names of HALO and Lee Wayne, headquartered in Sterling, IL, HALO is an independent
provider of customized drop-ship promotional products in the U.S. Through an extensive group of dedicated sales
professionals, HALO serves as a one-stop shop for over 40,000 customers throughout the U.S. HALO is involved in the
design, sourcing, management and fulfillment of promotional products across several product categories, including apparel,
calendars, writing instruments, drink ware and office accessories. HALO’s sales professionals work with customers and
vendors to develop the most effective means of communicating a logo or marketing message to a target audience.
Approximately 90% of products sold are drop shipped, resulting in minimal inventory risk. HALO has established itself as
a leader in the promotional products and marketing industry through its focus on service through its approximately 870
account executives.
HALO acquired the promotional products distributor Relay Gear in February 2010.
HALO acquired Goldman Promotions, a promotional products distributor, in April 2008, the promotional products
distributor division of Eskco, Inc., in November 2008 and the promotional products distributor AdNov in March 2009.
Distribution of promotional products is seasonal. Typically, HALO expects to realize approximately 45% of its sales and
70% of its operating income in the months of September through December, due principally to calendar sales and corporate
holiday promotions.
Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the results of operations for HALO for the fiscal years ending December 31, 2010, and 2009
and 2008. We purchased a controlling interest in HALO on February 28, 2007.
Year Ended December 31,
2010
Net sales .................................................................................................. $ 159,940
97,264
Cost of sales ............................................................................................
Gross profit .......................................................................................
62,676
Selling, general and administrative expenses .......................................
54,887
Management fees ................................................................................... 500
Amortization of intangibles ..................................................................
2,419
Income from operations .................................................................... $ 4,870
2009
(in thousands)
$ 139,317
84,883
54,434
48,714
375
2,498
$ 2,847
2008
$ 159,797
98,845
60,952
52,806
500
2,357
$ 5,289
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2010 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2009
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 were $159.9 million, compared to $139.3 million for the same period in
2009, an increase of $20.6 million or 14.8%. Sales increases attributable to accounts acquired in 2010 accounted for
95
approximately $4.7 million of the increased sales in 2010. Sales to existing customer accounts increased $15.9 million
during the year ended 2010 compared to the same period in 2009. The increase in sales to existing customers is
attributable to increased promotional spending in 2010 compared to 2009 due to more favorable economic conditions in
2010.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 increased approximately $12.4 million compared to the same period in
2009. The increase in cost of sales is primarily attributable to the increase in net sales for the same period. Gross profit as
a percentage of net sales totaled approximately 39.2% and 39.1% of net sales for the years ended December 31, 2010 and
2009, respectively. The slight increase in gross profit as a percentage of sales in 2010 is due to a favorable sales mix in
2010 compared to 2009.
Selling, general and administrative expenses
Selling, general and administrative expenses for the year ended December 31, 2010, increased approximately $6.2 million
compared to the same period in 2009. This increase is largely the result of increases in direct sales commission expense
and incentives in 2010 ($4.3 million) as a result of the increase in net sales over 2009, increases in administrative payroll
($0.4 million) to support the increased sales volume in 2010 and increases in group health insurance expense ($0.6
million).
Amortization expense
Amortization expense for the year ended December 31, 2010 decreased approximately $0.1 million compared to the same
period in 2009. This decrease is principally due to the amortization expense of intangible assets recognized in prior years
which have become fully amortized.
Income from operations
Income from operations increased approximately $2.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 compared to the same
period in 2009 due principally to the increase in net sales to existing customers offset in part by higher selling, general and
administrative costs, as described above.
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2009 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2008
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2009 were $139.3 million compared to $159.8 million for the same period in
2008, a decrease of $20.5 million or 12.8%. Sales increases attributable to accounts acquired in 2008 and 2009 accounted
for approximately $9.4 million of increased sales in 2009, offset by a decrease in sales to existing customers totaling
approximately $29.9 million in 2009 as compared to 2008. This decrease in sales to existing customers was attributable to
decreases in sales order volume as customers of all sizes have cut back on merchandising expenditures in response to the
economic recession which began in the latter half of 2008 and continued through 2009.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2009 decreased approximately $14.0 million compared to the same period in
2008. The decrease in cost of sales is primarily attributable to the decrease in net sales for the same period. Gross profit as
a percentage of net sales totaled approximately 39.1% and 38.1% of net sales in each of the years ended December 31,
2009 and 2008, respectively. The increase in gross profit as a percentage of sales is due to (i) a favorable sales mix in 2009
compared to 2008, (ii) efficiencies realized in shipping and increased supplier rebates during 2009, and (iii) the
procurement of more favorable pricing from calendar suppliers.
Selling, general and administrative expenses
Selling, general and administrative expenses for the year ended December 31, 2009, decreased approximately $4.1 million
compared to the same period in 2008. This decrease was largely the result of decreases in the year ended December 31,
2009 compared to the same period in 2008 for sales commission expense and salaries and wages attributable to the decline
in net sales and cost cutting measures ($4.3 million) and other overhead costs ($0.6 million), offset in part by increases in
2009 for health insurance costs ($0.5 million) and bad debt expense ($0.3 million).
Amortization expense
Amortization expense for the year ended December 31, 2009 increased approximately $0.1 million compared to the same
period in 2008. This increase was principally due to the amortization expense of intangible assets recognized in
connection with a March 2009 acquisition.
96
Income from operations
Income from operations decreased approximately $2.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2009 compared to the
same period in 2008 due principally to the decrease in net sales to existing customers offset in part by lower selling,
general and administrative costs, as described above.
Liberty Safe
Overview
Based in Payson, Utah and founded in 1988, Liberty Safe is the premier designer, manufacturer and marketer of home and
gun safes in North America. From its over 200,000 square foot manufacturing facility, Liberty Safe produces a wide range
of home and gun safe models in a broad assortment of sizes, features and styles ranging from an entry level product to
good, better and best products. Products are marketed under the Liberty brand, as well as a portfolio of licensed and private
label brands, including Remington, Cabela’s and John Deere. Liberty Safe’s products are the market share leader and are
sold through an independent dealer network (“Dealer sales”) in addition to various sporting goods and home improvement
retail outlets (“National sales”). Liberty has the largest independent dealer network in the industry.
Historically, approximately 60% of Liberty Safe’s net sales are National sales and 40% are Dealer sales.
Pro-forma Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the pro-forma results of operations for Liberty Safe for the full fiscal years ended December
31, 2010 and 2009. We acquired Liberty Safe on March 31, 2010. The following operating results are reported as if we
acquired Liberty Safe on January 1, 2009.
(in thousands)
Year ended December 31,
2010
(Pro-forma)
2009
(Pro-forma)
Net sales ................................................................................................. $ 64,899
Cost of sales (a) ......................................................................................
48,404
Gross profit .......................................................................................
16,495
Selling, general and administrative expenses (b) ..................................
8,092
Management fees (c) .............................................................................. 500
Amortization of intangibles (d) .............................................................
5,177
Income from operations .................................................................... $ 2,726
$ 73,839
54,081
19,758
8,211
500
5,160
$ 5,887
Pro-forma results of operations of Liberty Safe for the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2009 include the following pro-forma
adjustments applied to historical results:
(a) Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 does not include $0.4 million of amortization expense associated with the
inventory fair value step-up recorded in 2010 as a result of and derived from the purchase price allocation in connection with
our purchase of Liberty.
(b) Selling, general and administrative costs were reduced by approximately $1.6 million in the year ended December 31, 2010,
representing an adjustment for one-time transaction costs incurred as a result of our purchase.
(c) Represents management fees that would have been payable to the Manager.
(d) An increase in amortization of intangible assets totaling $1.3 million in 2010 and $2.3 million in 2009. This adjustment is a
result of and was derived from the purchase price allocation in connection with our acquisition of Liberty.
97
Pro-forma year ended December 31, 2010 compared to the pro-forma year ended December 31, 2009.
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 decreased approximately $8.9 million or 12.1% compared to the
corresponding year ended December 31, 2009. National sales were approximately $40.3 million in the year ended
December 31, 2010 compared to $45.9 million in the same period in 2009, representing a decrease of $5.6 million or
12.2%. Dealer sales totaled approximately $24.6 million in the year ended December 31, 2010 compared to $27.9 million
in the same period in 2009, representing a decrease of $3.3 million or 12.0%. The decrease in National sales in 2010 is
principally the result of one customer who experienced low demand for their private label product safes, which represented
a new product line supplied by Liberty Safe. Historically, this customer represented approximately 23% of Liberty Safe’s
National sales. This customer has returned to selling Liberty branded safes and management believes that sales from this
customer will increase in 2011. Other National sales are down from last year as the economy remained sluggish in 2010
for more substantial products such as safes. The decline in Dealer sales is due to less product demand in 2010 overall
compared to 2009 due to greater than average sales in 2009 resulting from customer’s anticipation of stricter gun laws
being enacted by the new Federal administration in 2009.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 decreased approximately $5.7 million. The decrease in cost of sales is
primarily attributable to the decrease in net sales for the same period. Gross profit as a percentage of net sales totaled
approximately 25.4% and 26.8% of net sales for the years ended December 31, 2010 and December 31, 2009, respectively.
The decrease in gross profit as a percentage of sales of 1.4% for the year ended December 31, 2010 compared to 2009 is
attributable to a less favorable sales mix and higher raw material costs in 2010 including rising freight costs. Sales of
Liberty’s larger more expensive safes declined in 2010 compared to 2009 in favor of smaller safes as consumers continued
to avoid larger ticket items. Liberty’s larger models generally carry higher margins than smaller, entry level models.
Selling, general and administrative expense
Selling, general and administrative expense for the year ended December 31, 2010, decreased approximately $0.1 million
compared to the same period in 2009. This decrease is largely the result of lower compensation expense driven by lower
commissions and bonuses, together with lower co-op advertising costs as a result of the decline in net sales during 2010
offset in part by higher advertising costs ($0.5 million) in connection with a successful national radio advertising campaign
in the third and fourth quarter of 2010.
Income from operations
Income from operations decreased $3.2 million in the year ended December 31, 2010 compared to the year ended
December 31, 2009 based on the factors described above, particularly the decline in net sales.
Staffmark
Overview
Staffmark a provider of temporary staffing services in the United States provides a wide range of human resource services,
including temporary staffing services, employee leasing services, and permanent staffing and temporary-to-hire placement
services. Staffmark serves approximately 6,000 corporate and small business clients and during an average week places
over 41,000 employees in a broad range of industries, including manufacturing, transportation, retail, distribution,
warehousing, automotive supply, construction, industrial, healthcare and financial sectors.
Staffmark’s business strategy includes maximizing production in existing offices, increasing the number of offices within a
market when conditions warrant, and expanding organically into contiguous markets where it can benefit from shared
management and administrative expenses. Staffmark typically enters new markets through acquisition. In keeping with
these strategies, on January 21, 2008, Staffmark Holdings, Inc. acquired Staffmark Investment LLC and its subsidiaries.
The acquisition essentially doubled the revenues of Staffmark. This acquisition gave CBS Personnel a presence in
Arkansas, Tennessee, Colorado, Oklahoma, and Arizona, while significantly increasing its presence in California, Texas,
the Carolinas, New York and the New England area. While no specific acquisitions are currently contemplated at this time,
Staffmark continues to view acquisitions as an attractive means to enter new geographic markets.
Fiscal 2008 and 2009 were extremely challenging years for the temporary staffing industry. The already-weak economic
conditions and employment trends in the U.S., present during 2008, continued to worsen as the year progressed and
continued through the first three quarters of 2009. Economic conditions and employment trends in the staffing industry
showed positive signs of improvement in the fourth quarter of 2009 and continued through 2010.
98
According to U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics data from January 2011, the number of unemployed workers increased from
14.3 million unemployed workers on an annualized basis during 2009 to 14.8 million during 2010 while employment of
temporary workers increased by approximately 300,000 on an annualized basis during that same period.
Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the income from operations for Staffmark for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and
pro-forma results of operations for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2008. We purchased a controlling interest in
Staffmark Holdings, Inc. on May 16, 2006 and Staffmark LLC on January 21, 2008. The following operating results were
prepared as if Staffmark was acquired on January 1, 2008.
Year Ended December 31,
2010
2009
2008
Pro-forma
Service revenues ..................................................................................... $ 1,002,511
854,698
Cost of services ......................................................................................
Gross profit .......................................................................................
147,813
Staffing, selling, general and administrative expenses .........................
117,252
Management fees ................................................................................... 429
Amortization of intangibles (a) ..............................................................
4,903
Impairment expense ...............................................................................
-
Income (loss) from operations .......................................................... $ 25,229
(in thousands)
$ 745,340
632,800
112,540
112,358
931
4,854
(50,000)
$ 1,037,418
859,026
178,392
155,453
1,761
5,082
-
$ (55,603) $ 16,096
Combined results of operations of CBS Personnel and Staffmark for the year ended December 31, 2008 includes the following pro-forma
adjustment to historical results:
(a) An increase in amortization of intangible assets totaling $0.3 million in 2008 reflecting increased amortization expense as a result of,
and derived from, the purchase price allocation in connection with CBS Personnel’s acquisition of Staffmark LLC in January 2008.
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2010 compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2009
Revenues
Revenues for the year ended December 31, 2010 increased approximately $257.2 million or 34.5% over the corresponding
revenues in the year ended December 31, 2009. This increase in revenues reflects increased demand for temporary staffing
services (primarily light industrial). Approximately $2.3 million of the increase is related to increased revenues for permanent
staffing services. We have continued to witness temporary staffing job creation and signs of a strengthening economy
throughout the past year.
Cost of revenues
Direct cost of revenues for the year ended December 31, 2010 increased approximately $221.9 million compared to the
same period a year ago. This increase is principally the direct result of the increase in service revenues. Gross profit as a
percentage of service revenue was approximately 14.7% and 15.1% for the year ended December 31, 2010 and 2009,
respectively. The Hiring Incentives to Restore Employment Act H.R. 2847 (HIRE) enacted March 18, 2010, provided for
exemptions from the employer’s portion of social security taxes for certain eligible new hires during the year. This
exemption was short term and expired December 31, 2010. Excluding those exemptions recognized in the year, the gross
profit as a percentage of service revenue would have been approximately 14.3% for the year ended December 31, 2010, a
decrease of 80 basis points compared to 2009. The majority of the decrease in the gross profit margin is the result of two
factors: (i) higher unemployment tax rates in 2010 as a result of increased funding required for various states’ depleted
unemployment reserves; and (ii) continued downward market pricing pressure from customers, resulting from and carried
over from the recent economic downturn.
Selling, general and administrative expense
Selling, general and administrative expense for the year ended December 31, 2010 increased approximately $4.9 million
compared to the same period a year ago. Management made a conscious, extensive effort to reduce overhead costs,
consolidate facilities and shut down unprofitable branches in 2009 in order to mitigate the negative impact of the weak
economic environment throughout 2009. Management continues to control its costs, limiting its spending increases to areas
required to support increased service volumes and financial performance. The increases in 2010 reflect; (i) increased
overhead costs commensurate with the significant increase in revenues and overall operations primarily related to staffing
99
expense; and (ii) a settlement of a lawsuit in California for $2.1 million in connection with a potential class action suit
involving former and current staff members.
Management fees
Management fees for the year ended December 31, 2010 decreased approximately $0.5 million over the corresponding year
ended December 31, 2009. This decrease is principally a result of an amendment to the Management Services Agreements
that temporarily reduced the 2010 fee to approximately 25% of the full-year fees.
Impairment expense
Based on the results of our annual goodwill impairment test in March 2009 we determined that the carrying amount of
Staffmark exceeded its fair value by approximately $50.0 million as of March 31, 2009. Therefore, we recorded a
$50.0 million pretax goodwill impairment charge for the year ended December 31, 2009. We performed the annual
goodwill impairment test as of March 31, 2010 and our results indicate that no impairment of goodwill was evident as of
March 31, 2010. At December 31, 2010, no triggering events occurred at Staffmark that would warrant interim testing.
Income from operations
Income from operations increased approximately $80.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 compared to the
year ended December 31, 2009 based principally on the factors described above.
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2009 compared to Pro-forma Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2008
Service revenues
Revenues for the year ended December 31, 2009 decreased approximately $292.1 million, or 28.2%, compared to the same
period in 2008. The reduction in revenues reflected reduced demand for temporary staffing services (primarily clerical and
light industrial) as a result of the downturn in the economy. Approximately $7.5 million of the decrease was related to
reduced revenues for permanent staffing services as clients were affected by weaker economic conditions. In the fourth
quarter of 2009 we witnessed modest temporary staffing job creation, although significant uncertainty remained.
Permanent staffing revenues have historically lagged rebounds in temporary staffing revenues.
Cost of services
Cost of services for the year ended December 31, 2009 decreased approximately $226.2 million compared to the same
period in 2008. This decrease was principally the direct result of the decrease in service revenues. Gross margin was
approximately 15.1% and 17.2% of revenues for the years ended December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2008, respectively.
The decrease in margins was primarily the result of (i) reduced permanent staffing services, which carries a significantly
higher profit margin, (ii) downward pricing pressure experienced from our temporary staffing services clients, and (iii)
increases in workers’ compensation and unemployment insurance costs. The significant reduction in permanent staffing
services is responsible for approximately 1.0% of the 2.1% margin decrease.
Staffing, selling, general and administrative expenses
Staffing, selling, general and administrative expenses for the year ended December 31, 2009 decreased approximately
$43.1 million compared to the same period in 2008. Management had taken measures to reduce overhead costs,
consolidate facilities and close unprofitable branches in order to mitigate the negative impact that the current weak
economic environment had on our top-line revenues. We incurred approximately $2.0 million in one-time cost for non-
recurring expenses related to the integration of Staffmark and CBS Personnel and one-time non-recurring restructuring
costs associated with the reduction in overhead costs during the year ended December 31, 2009. For the year ended
December 31, 2008, costs associated with the Staffmark integration totaled approximately $7.4 million.
Management fees
Management fees are based on a formula of gross revenues. The decrease in management fees in 2009 compared to 2008
was principally the result of the significant decrease in revenues in 2009 compared to 2008.
Impairment expense
Based on the results of our annual goodwill impairment test performed as of March 31, 2009, an indication of goodwill
impairment existed. Based on the results of the second step of the goodwill impairment test, we calculated that the carrying
amount of goodwill exceeded its fair value by approximately $50.0 million. Therefore, we recorded a $50.0 million pretax
goodwill impairment charge during the year ended December 31, 2009. The carrying amount of goodwill exceeded the fair
value due to the recent and projected significant decrease in revenue and operating profit at Staffmark resulting from the
negative impact on temporary staffing and permanent placement revenues due to the depressed macroeconomic conditions
and downward employment trends.
100
Income (loss) from operations
The weakened economy significantly affected our operating results in fiscal 2009. For the year ended December 31, 2009,
income from operations decreased approximately $71.7 million to a loss of approximately $55.6 million compared to the
same period in 2008, principally as a result of the impairment charge and the significant decline in revenues.
Tridien
Overview
Tridien Medical, (formerly known as Anodyne Medical Device, Inc.) (“Tridien”) headquartered in Coral Springs, Florida,
is a leading designer and manufacturer of powered and non-powered medical therapeutic support services and patient
positioning devices serving the acute care, long-term care and home health care markets. Tridien is one of the nation’s
leading designers and manufacturers of specialty therapeutic support surfaces with manufacturing operations in multiple
locations to better serve a national customer base.
Tridien, together with its subsidiary companies, provides customers the opportunity to source leading surface technologies
from the designer and manufacturer.
Tridien develops products both independently and in partnership with large distribution intermediaries. Medical
distribution companies then sell or rent the therapeutic support surfaces, sometimes in conjunction with bed frames and
accessories to one of three end markets: (i) acute care, (ii) long term care and (iii) home health care. The level of
sophistication largely varies for each product, as some patients require simple foam mattress beds (“non-powered” support
surfaces) while others may require electronically controlled, low air loss, lateral rotation, pulmonary therapy or alternating
pressure surfaces (“powered” support surfaces). The design, engineering and manufacturing of all products are completed
in-house (with the exception of PrimaTech products, which are manufactured in Taiwan) and are FDA compliant.
Results of Operations
The table below summarizes the results of operations for Tridien for the fiscal years ending December 31, 2010, 2009 and
2008.
Year Ended December 31,
2010
2009
2008
(in thousands)
Net sales ......................................................................................... $ 61,101
43,183
Cost of sales ...................................................................................
Gross profit ...............................................................................
17,918
Selling, general and administrative expenses ................................
7,646
Management fees ............................................................................ 350
Amortization of intangibles ............................................................
1,909
Income from operations ............................................................ $ 8,013
$ 54,075
37,982
16,093
6,947
263
1,483
$ 7,400
$ 54,199
40,683
13,516
7,455
350
1,483
$ 4,228
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2010 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2009
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2010 were approximately $61.1 million compared to approximately
$54.1 million for the same period in 2009, an increase of $7.0 million or 13.0%. Sales of non-powered products (including
patient positioning devices) totaled $48.1 million during the year ended December 31, 2010 representing an increase of
$5.5 million compared to the same period in 2009. Non-powered sales represented approximately 78.7% of net sales in
2010 essentially unchanged compared with 2009. Sales of powered products totaled $13.0 million during the year ended
December 31, 2010, a $1.5 million increase when compared to the same period in 2009. Powered sales represented
approximately 21.3% of net sales for 2010 and 2009. The increase in overall sales in 2010 reflects modest continued
improvement in healthcare institutional spending. We believe that these purchasing levels have stabilized and current
indications suggest a potential for modest increases in powered product sales in 2011 compared to 2010.
101
Cost of sales
Cost of sales increased approximately $5.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 compared to the same period in
2009. Gross profit as a percentage of sales was 29.3% for the year ended December 31, 2010 compared to 29.8% in the
corresponding period in 2009. The decrease in gross profit as a percentage of sales was primarily due to cost pressures
from large key customers resulting in price reductions and lower margins (0.9%) and higher warranty and raw material
costs (1.1%), that were offset in part by favorable overhead absorption from increased volume and product mix (1.5%).
Additional pricing pressures from customers, combined with recent increases in raw material costs are projected to have an
unfavorable impact to margins in 2011.
Selling, general and administrative expenses
Selling, general and administrative expenses for the year ended December 31, 2010 increased approximately $0.7 million
compared to the same period in 2009. This increase is principally due to increases in spending on research and
development ($0.7 million) as Tridien continues to focus on innovation, and to a lesser extent, separation costs in
connection with senior management changes that occurred during the fourth quarter of 2010, offset by savings realized
from the closure of one of its distribution facilities.
Amortization expense
Amortization expense for the year ended December 31, 2010 increased approximately $0.4 million compared to the same
period in 2009. This increase is entirely due to a write down of an intangible asset (ongoing favorable supplier agreement)
in 2010 that management does not expect to benefit from in the future.
Income from operations
Income from operations increased approximately $0.6 million to $8.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2010
compared to the same period in 2009, principally as a result of the increase in net sales.
Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2009 Compared to Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2008
Net sales
Net sales for the year ended December 31, 2009 were approximately $54.1 million compared to approximately $54.2
million for the same period in 2008, a decrease of $0.1 million. Sales of non-powered products (including patient
positioning devices) totaled $42.6 million during the year ended December 31, 2009 representing an increase of $6.8
million compared to the same period in 2008. Non-powered product sales attributable to new product offerings were $1.4
million in the year ended December 31, 2009. The remaining increase in sales of non-powered products in 2009 was
principally attributable to sales of a modified 2008 product release to a key existing customer’s new national account.
Non-powered sales represented approximately 78.7% of net sales in 2009 compared to 66.1% in 2008. Sales of powered
products totaled $11.4 million during the year ended December 31, 2009, a $6.9 million decrease when compared to the
same period in 2008. The significant decrease in powered sales in 2009 reflected substantial cutbacks in healthcare
institutional spending experienced during the period, particularly in the higher priced, more capital intensive products such
as our powered product offerings. Powered sales represented approximately 21.3% of net sales in 2009 compared to
33.9% in 2008.
Cost of sales
Cost of sales decreased approximately $2.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2009 compared to the same period in
2008. Gross profit as a percentage of sales was 29.8% for the year ended December 31, 2009 compared to 24.9% in the
corresponding period in 2008. The decrease in cost of sales together with the significant increase in gross profit as a
percentage of sales of 4.9% in 2009 was principally due to (i) lower raw material costs (3.7%) (ii) labor and material
manufacturing efficiencies realized in 2009 (4.2%), particularly as it related to a portion of new product sales in 2008 and
(ii) other reductions in manufacturing overhead offset in part by an unfavorable sales mix in 2009 (3.0%), as powered
products carry a higher margin than non-powered.
Selling, general and administrative expenses
Selling, general and administrative expenses for the year ended December 31, 2009 decreased approximately $0.5 million
compared to the same period in 2008. This decrease was principally due to a reduction in costs attributable to Hollywood
Capital, a former management group that was comprised of the previous CEO and CFO. The Hollywood Capital
management services agreement was terminated in October 2008.
Income from operations
Income from operations increased approximately $3.2 million to $7.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2009
compared to the same period in 2008, principally as a result of the significant increase in gross profit margins, the
reduction in overhead cost and other factors described above.
102
Liquidity and Capital Resources
For the year ended December 31, 2010, on a consolidated basis, cash flows provided by operating activities totaled
approximately $44.8 million, which reflects the results of operations of all eight of our businesses during the year ended
December 31, 2010. Consolidated net loss in 2010 totaling $44.8 million coupled with $26.6 million in negative cash flow
attributable to working capital was more than offset by non-cash charges included in the consolidated net loss for the year.
Significant non-cash charges in 2010 included (i) depreciation and amortization - $42.1 million; (ii) supplemental put
expense - $32.5 million and; (iii) impairment charges at American Furniture - $38.8 million. Cash flows provided by
operations in 2009 totaled approximately $20.2 million. The $25.6 million increase in operating cash flow is attributable to
an increase in sales and net income at our subsidiary operating segments with the exception of American Furniture.
Cash flows used in investing activities totaled approximately $182.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, which
reflects cash used for both platform and add-on acquisitions made during 2010 totaling $173.7 million together with capital
expenditures at our businesses totaling $8.7 million. We expect to use more cash in investing activities in 2011 related to
increased capital expenditures at most of our businesses.
Cash flow provided by financing activities in 2010 totaled approximately $119.6 million for the year ended December 31,
2010, principally reflecting: (i) two common stock offerings during the year which yielded $153.0 million in net proceeds;
(ii) net borrowings on our Credit Facility totaling $19.5 million, and (iii) net proceeds from non-controlling interests
totaling $2.7 million offset in part by distributions to shareholders totaling $55.2 million.
At December 31, 2010 we had approximately $13.5 million of cash and cash equivalents on hand. The majority of our
cash is invested in short-term securities and corporate debt securities and is maintained in accordance with the Company’s
investment policy, which identifies allowable investments and specifies credit quality standards. The primary objective of
our investment activities is the preservation of principal and minimizing risk. We do not hold any investments for trading
purposes.
At December 31, 2010 we had the following outstanding loans due from each of our businesses:
• Advanced Circuits — $84.1 million;
• American Furniture — $26.2 million;
• ERGObaby — $47.5 million;
• Fox — $33.7 million;
• Halo — $41.4 million
• Liberty — $42.0 million
• Staffmark — $75.4 million; and
• Tridien — $5.8 million
Each loan has a scheduled maturity and each business is entitled to repay all or a portion of the principal amount of the
outstanding loans, without penalty, prior to maturity. At December 31, 2010, all of our businesses were in compliance with
their financial covenants with us.
In December 2010, we amended the Advanced Circuits intercompany credit agreement with us, which, among other things,
increased Advanced Circuits’ term borrowings by $40.0 million and permitted the use of the proceeds to fund shareholder
distributions totaling $48.6 million. Our share of the cash distribution was approximately $33.8 million with
approximately $14.8 million being distributed to non-controlling shareholders. See “Related Party Transactions”.
In December 2010, we amended our intercompany credit agreement with American Furniture, which, among other things,
recapitalized a portion of American Furniture long-term debt by exchanging $49.7 million of revolving debt and term debt
for American Furniture common stock. As a result of this transaction, our ownership percentage of the outstanding
common stock of American Furniture increased. See “Related Party Transactions”.
In May 2009, we amended the Staffmark intercompany credit agreement which, among other things, recapitalized a portion
of Staffmark’s long-term debt by exchanging $35.0 million of unsecured debt for common stock in Staffmark. A
noncontrolling shareholder participated in this exchange. As a result of this transaction, we currently own 76.2% of the
outstanding common stock of Staffmark on a primary basis and 68.5% on a fully diluted basis.
Our primary source of cash is from the receipt of interest and principal on our outstanding loans to our businesses.
Accordingly, we are dependent upon the earnings and cash flow of these businesses, which are available for (i) operating
103
expenses; (ii) payment of principal and interest under our Credit Agreement; (iii) payments to CGM due or potentially due
pursuant to the Management Services Agreement, the LLC Agreement, and the Supplemental Put Agreement; (iv) cash
distributions to our shareholders and (v) investments in future acquisitions. Payments made under (iii) above are required
to be paid before distributions to shareholders and may be significant and exceed the funds held by us, which may require
us to dispose of assets or incur debt to fund such expenditures. A liability of approximately $44.6 million is reflected in
our consolidated balance sheet, which represents our estimated liability for potential obligation to CGM at December 31,
2010.
On June 9, 2009, we completed an equity offering of 5,100,000 Trust shares at an offering price of $8.85 per share. Our
net proceeds after deducting underwriters’ discount and offering costs totaled approximately $42.1 million.
On April 13, 2010, we completed a public offering of 5,250,000 Trust shares (including the underwriters’ over-allotment
completed April 23, 2010) at an offering price of $15.10 per share. The net proceeds to us, after deducting underwriters’
discount and offering costs, totaled approximately $75.0 million. We used $70.0 million of the net proceeds to pay down
our Revolving Credit Facility.
On November 12, 2010 we completed a public offering of 4,850,000 Trust shares (including the underwriters’ over-
allotment completed December 8, 2010) at an offering price of $16.90 per share. The net proceeds to us, after deducting
underwriters’ discount and offering costs, totaled approximately $78 million. We used $70.0 million of the net proceeds to
pay down our Revolving Credit Facility.
We believe that we currently have sufficient liquidity and capital resources, which include amounts available under our
Revolving Credit Facility, to meet our existing obligations, including regular quarterly distributions to our shareholders, as
approved by our Board of Directors, over the next twelve months.
The current Credit Agreement provides for a Revolving Credit Facility totaling $340 million which matures in December
2012 and a Term Loan Facility totaling $74.0 million. The Term Loan Facility requires quarterly payments of $0.5 million
that commenced March 31, 2008 with a final payment of the outstanding principal balance due on December 7, 2013.
The Revolving Credit Facility allows for loans at either base rate or the London Interbank Offer Rate, or LIBOR. Base rate
loans bear interest at a fluctuating rate per annum equal to the greater of (i) the prime rate of interest published by the Wall
Street Journal and (ii) the sum of the Federal Funds Rate plus 0.5% for the relevant period, plus a margin ranging from
1.50% to 2.50% based upon the ratio of total debt to adjusted consolidated earnings before interest expense, tax expense,
and depreciation and amortization expenses for such period (the “Total Debt to EBITDA Ratio”). LIBOR loans bear
interest at a fluctuating rate per annum equal to for the relevant period plus a margin ranging from 2.50% to 3.50% based
on the Total Debt to EBITDA Ratio. We are required to pay commitment fees ranging between 0.75% and 1.25% per
annum on the unused portion of the Revolving Credit Facility. At December 31, 2010 we had $22.0 million in borrowings
outstanding under our Revolving Credit Facility and $248.3 million available.
The Term Loan Facility bears interest at either base rate or LIBOR. Base rate loans bear interest at a fluctuating rate per
annum equal to the greater of (i) the prime rate of interest published by the Wall Street Journal and (ii) the sum of the
Federal Funds Rate plus 0.5% for the relevant period plus a margin of 3.0%. LIBOR loans bear interest at a fluctuating
rate per annum equal to the LIBOR, for the relevant period plus a margin of 4.0%. At December 31, 2010 we had $74.0
million in borrowings outstanding under our Term Loan Facility.
The following table reflects required and actual financial ratios as of December 31, 2010 included as part of the affirmative
covenants in our Credit Agreement:
Description of Required Covenant Ratio
Covenant Ratio Requirement
Actual Ratio
Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio
Interest Coverage Ratio
Leverage Ratio
greater than or equal to 1.5:1.0
greater than or equal to 2.75:1.0
less than or equal to 3.5:1.0
6.39:1.0
9.75:1.0
1.17:1.0
On January 22, 2008 we entered into a three-year interest rate swap agreement with our bank lenders, fixing the rate of
$140 million at 7.35% on a like amount of variable rate Term Loan Facility borrowings. The interest rate swap is intended
to mitigate the impact of fluctuations in interest rates and effectively converts $140 million of our floating-rate Term Loan
Facility to a fixed rate basis for a period of three years. On February 18, 2009, we terminated $70.0 million of our
outstanding interest rate swap in connection with the repayment of $75.0 million of our Term Loan Facility. Termination
104
fees totaled $2.5 million, which represented the fair value of the terminated portion of the swap as of February 18, 2009.
The Swap expired on January 22, 2011.
Our Term Loan Facility received a B1 rating from Moody’s Investors Service (“Moody’s”), and a BB- rating from
Standard and Poor’s Rating Services and our Revolving Credit Facility received a Ba1 rating from Moody’s, reflective of
our strong cash flow relative to debt, and industry diversification of our businesses.
We intend to use the availability under our Revolving Credit Facility to pursue acquisitions of additional platform and add-
on businesses in 2011 and beyond, to the extent permitted under our Credit Agreement, and to provide for working capital
needs.
On March 8, 2011, we declared a distribution of $0.36 per share to be paid April 12, 2011 to holders of record as of March
29, 2011.
105
The table below details cash receipts and payments that are not reflected on our income statement in order to provide an
additional measure of management’s estimate of cash flow available for distribution (“CAD”). CAD is a non-GAAP
measure that we believe provides additional information to our shareholders in order to enable them to evaluate our ability
to make anticipated quarterly distributions. Because other entities do not necessarily calculate CAD the same way we do,
our presentation of CAD may not be comparable to similarly titled measures provided by other entities. We believe that
our historic and future CAD, together with our cash balances and access to cash via our debt facilities, will be sufficient to
meet our anticipated distributions over the next twelve months. The table below reconciles CAD to net income and to cash
flow provided by operating activities, which we consider to be the most directly comparable financial measure calculated
and presented in accordance with GAAP.
(in thousands)
Net loss
Year Ended
December 31,
2010
Year Ended
December 31,
2009
Adjustment to reconcile net loss to cash provided by operating activities ..............................
Depreciation and amortization ..............................................................................................
Supplemental put expense (reversal) ....................................................................................
Noncontrolling shareholders’ notes and other .....................................................................
Deferred taxes ......................................................................................................................
Amortization of debt issuance cost .......................................................................................
Loss on debt extinguishment ................................................................................................
Impairment charges ..............................................................................................................
Other ....................................................................................................................................
Changes in operating assets and liabilities ..........................................................................
$ (44,770)
42,120
32,516
7,637
(7,146)
1,789
-
38,835
441
(26,581)
$ (39,645)
32,996
(1,329)
1,555
(24,964)
1,776
3,652
59,800
107
(13,735)
Net cash provided by operating activities
Plus:
44,841
20,213
Unused fee on Revolving Credit Facility (1) .........................................................................
Staffmark integration and restructuring ................................................................................
Successful acquisition costs (2) ..............................................................................................
Changes in operating assets and liabilities ...........................................................................
3,022
-
3,974
26,581
3,454
4,076
-
13,735
Less:
Interest income due from noncontrolling shareholders at Advanced Circuits (3) ................
Less:
Maintenance capital expenditures (4)
-
1,047
Advanced Circuits ............................................................................................................
American Furniture .........................................................................................................
ERGObaby .......................................................................................................................
Fox ...................................................................................................................................
Halo ..................................................................................................................................
Liberty .............................................................................................................................
Staffmark .........................................................................................................................
Tridien ..............................................................................................................................
Estimated cash flow available for distribution (CAD) ...............................................................
781
236
75
877
554
617
3,142
838
$ 71,298
251
501
-
741
496
-
901
513
$ 37,028
Distribution paid April ..............................................................................................................
Distribution paid July ................................................................................................................
Distribution paid October ..........................................................................................................
Distribution paid January ..........................................................................................................
$ (14,238)
(14,238)
(14,238)
(15,886)
$ (10,718)
(12,452)
(12,453)
(12,452)
Total distributions
$ (58,600)
$ (48,075)
(1) Represents the commitment fee on the unused portion of our Revolving Credit Facility.
(2) Represents acquisition transaction costs for the 2010 acquisitions.
(3) Represents interest income on loans to Advanced Circuit’s management (see Related Party Transactions).
(4) Represents maintenance capital expenditures that were funded from operating cash flow and excludes
approximately $1.6 million of growth capital expenditures incurred by Fox for the year ended December 31,
2010.
106
Cash flows of certain of our businesses are seasonal in nature. Cash flows from American Furniture are typically highest
in the months of January through April of each year, coinciding with homeowners’ tax refunds. Cash flows from Staffmark
are typically lower in the first quarter of each year than in other quarters due to reduced seasonal demand for temporary
staffing services and to lower gross margins during that period associated with the front-end loading of certain taxes and
other payments associated with payroll paid to our employees. Cash flows from HALO are typically highest in the months
of September through December of each year primarily as the result of calendar sales and holiday promotions. HALO
generates approximately two-thirds of its operating income in the months of September through December. Revenue and
earnings from Fox are typically highest in the third quarter, coinciding with the delivery of product for the new bike year.
Related Party Transactions and Certain Transactions Involving our Businesses
We have entered into the following related party transactions with our Manager, CGM:
• Management Services Agreement
•
LLC Agreement
Supplemental Put Agreement
Cost Reimbursement and Fees
•
•
Management Services Agreement
We entered into a management services agreement (“Management Services Agreement”) with CGM effective May 16,
2006. The Management Services Agreement provides for, among other things, CGM to perform services for us in
exchange for a management fee paid quarterly and equal to 0.5% of our adjusted net assets. The management fee is
required to be paid prior to the payment of any distributions to shareholders. For the year ended December 31, 2010, 2009
and 2008, we incurred $15.4 million, $13.1 million and $15.2 million, respectively, in management fees to CGM.
Pursuant to the management services agreement, CGM is entitled to enter into off-setting management service agreements
with each of our operating segments. The amount of the fee is negotiated between CGM and the operating management of
each segment and is based upon the value of the services to be provided. The fees paid directly to CGM by the segments
offset on a dollar for dollar basis the amount due to CGM by the Company under the Management Services Agreement.
LLC Agreement
As distinguished from its provision of providing management services to us, pursuant to the Management Services
Agreement, CGM is the owner of 100% of the Allocation Interests in us. CGM paid $0.1 million for these Allocation
Interests and has the right to cause us to purchase the Allocation Interests it owns. The Allocation Interests give CGM the
right to distributions pursuant to a profit allocation formula upon the occurrence of certain events. Certain events include,
but are not limited to, the dispositions of subsidiaries. In connection with the dispositions of Silvue and Aeroglide in 2008
we paid CGM a profit allocation of $14.9 million. In connection with the disposition of Crosman in 2006, we paid CGM a
profit allocation of $7.9 million. No profit allocations were paid to CGM in 2009 or 2010.
Supplemental Put Agreement
Concurrent with the IPO, we and CGM entered into a Supplemental Put Agreement, which may require us to acquire the
Allocation Interests, described above, upon termination of the Management Services Agreement. Essentially, the put rights
granted to CGM require us to acquire CGM’s Allocation Interests in us at a price based on a percentage of the increase in
fair value in our businesses over our original basis in those businesses. Each fiscal quarter we estimate the fair value of our
businesses for the purpose of determining our potential liability associated with the Supplemental Put Agreement. Any
change in the potential liability is accrued currently as a non-cash adjustment to earnings. For the year ended December
31, 2010 and 2008 we recognized $32.5 million and $6.4 million in expense, respectively, related to the Supplemental Put
Agreement and in 2009 we reversed $1.3 million in previously accrued charges.
Cost Reimbursement and Fees
We reimbursed our Manager, CGM, approximately $2.8 million, $2.7 million and $2.6 million, principally for occupancy
and staffing costs incurred by CGM on our behalf during the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
CGM acted as an advisor for each of the 2010 acquisitions (Liberty and ERGObaby) for which it received transaction
service and expense payments in an aggregate amount of approximately $1.6 million. CGM acted as an advisor for each of
the 2008 acquisitions (Fox and Staffmark) for which it received transaction service and expense payments in an aggregate
amount of approximately $2.0 million. No advisor fees were paid to CGM in 2009 or 2010.
107
We have entered into the following significant related party transactions with our businesses:
Advanced Circuits
In connection with the acquisition of Advanced Circuits by CGI in September 2005, Advanced Circuits loaned certain
officers and members of management of Advanced Circuits $3.4 million for the purchase of 136,364 shares of Advanced
Circuits’ common stock. On January 1, 2006, Advanced Circuits loaned certain officers and members of management of
Advanced Circuits $4.8 million for the purchase of an additional 193,366 shares of Advanced Circuits’ common stock.
The notes beared interest at 6% and interest is added to the notes. The notes were due in September 2010 and December
2010 and were subject to mandatory prepayment provisions if certain conditions were met.
In connection with the issuance of the notes as described above, Advanced Circuits implemented a performance incentive
program whereby the notes could either be partially or completely forgiven based upon the achievement of certain pre-
defined financial performance targets. The measurement date for determination of any potential loan forgiveness is based
on the financial performance of Advanced Circuits for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2010. During each of the fiscal
years 2008, 2007 and 2006, ACI accrued approximately $1.6 million for this loan forgiveness. This expense has been
classified as a component of general and administrative expense.
On January 12, 2010 the promissory notes and loan forgiveness arrangements referred to above were amended as follows:
(i) $5.8 million of the outstanding loans and interest were forgiven with the remaining balance, $4.7 million repaid in Class
A common stock valued at $47.50 per share, and (ii) 99,738 stock options were granted at an exercise price of $89.27 per
share. The options are outstanding for ten years and vested at the grant date.
On December 9, 2010, we entered into an amendment to our inter-company loan agreement (the “Amendment”) with
Advanced Circuits (the “Loan Agreement”). The Loan Agreement was amended to (i) provide for additional term loan
borrowings of $40.0 million and a special short term facility of $8.65 million and to permit the proceeds thereof to fund
cash distributions totaling $48.6 million by ACI to Compass AC Holdings, Inc. (“ACH”), ACI’s sole shareholder, and by
ACH to its shareholders, including us, (ii) extend the maturity dates of the term loans under the Loan Agreement, and (iii)
modify borrowing rates under the Loan Agreement. Our share of the cash distribution was approximately $33.8 million
with approximately $14.8 million being distributed to ACH’s non-controlling shareholders. All other material terms and
conditions of the Loan Agreement were unchanged. 96,982 stock options issued on January 12, 2010 were exercised at the
time of the distribution.
American Furniture
AFM’s largest supplier, Independent Furniture Supply (“Independent”), is 50% owned by Mike Thomas, AFM's CEO.
AFM purchases poly foam from Independent on an arms-length basis and AFM performs regular audits to verify market
pricing. AFM does not have any long-term supply contracts with Independent. Total purchases from Independent during
2010, 2009 and 2008 totaled approximately $17.6 million, $19.4 million and $18.4 million, respectively.
On December 30, 2010, we entered into an amendment to our inter-company loan agreement with American Furniture
wherein we contributed $50.7 million in additional equity contributions in exchange for the following:
•
•
•
$1.0 million in unpaid M=management fees;
$35.5 million in outstanding term loans; and
$14.2 million in outstanding revolving loans.
As a result of this transaction, our ownership percentage of the outstanding common stock of American Furniture increased
to approximately 99.9% on a primary basis and 91.4% on a fully diluted basis.
Fox
Fox leases its principal manufacturing and office facilities in Watsonville, California from Robert Fox, a founder, Chief
Engineering Officer and non-controlling shareholder of Fox. The term of the lease is through July of 2018 and the rental
payments can be adjusted annually for a cost-of-living increase based upon the consumer price index. Fox is responsible
for all real estate taxes, insurance and maintenance related to this property. The leased facilities are 86,000 square feet and
Fox paid rent under this lease of approximately $1.1 million $1.1 million for each of the years ended December 31, 2010
and 2009, respectively.
Staffmark
In April 2009, we amended the Staffmark intercompany credit agreement which, among other things, recapitalized a
portion of Staffmark’s long-term debt by exchanging $35.0 million of debt for Staffmark common stock. As a result of this
108
transaction, the Company’s ownership percentage of the outstanding stock of Staffmark increased. In addition, as a result
of the exchange the Company received cash from a non controlling shareholder and recorded an increase to noncontrolling
interest of $4.9 million.
Tridien
On August 8, 2008 we exchanged a note due August 15, 2008, totaling approximately $6.9 million (including accrued
interest) due from Mark Bidner, the former CEO of Tridien in exchange for shares of stock of Tridien held by the CEO. In
addition, Mr. Bidner was granted an option to purchase approximately 10% of the outstanding shares of Tridien, at a strike
price exceeding the exchange price, from us in the future for which Mr. Bidner exchanged Tridien stock valued at $0.2
million (the fair value of the option at the date of grant) as consideration.
On August 5, 2008 we exchanged $1.5 million in term debt due from Tridien for 15,500 shares of common stock and
13,950 shares of convertible preferred stock of Tridien.
We lease two facilities from noncontrolling shareholders of Tridien. The term of the leases are through September of 2013
and February of 2014. Tridien paid rent under these leases of approximately $0.9 million for each of the years ended
December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008.
Contractual Obligations and Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements
We have no special purpose entities or off balance sheet arrangements, other than operating leases entered into in the
ordinary course of business.
Long-term contractual obligations, except for our long-term debt obligations, are generally not recognized in our
consolidated balance sheet. Non-cancelable purchase obligations are obligations we incur during the normal course of
business, based on projected needs.
The table below summarizes the payment schedule of our contractual obligations at December 31, 2010 (in thousands).
Total
Less than 1 Year
1-3 Years
3-5 Years
5 Years
More than
Long-term debt obligations (a)
$
115,618
$
10,594
$
105,024
$
-
$
-
Capital lease obligations
Operating lease obligations (b)
Purchase obligations (c)
Supplemental put obligation (d)
693
61,779
188,874
240
12,120
118,629
436
18,271
36,845
17
11,827
33,400
-
19,561
-
44,598
411,562
$
-
141,583
$
-
160,576
$
-
45,244
$
-
19,561
$
(a) Reflects commitment fees and letter of credit fees under our Revolving Credit Facility and amounts due, together with interest on our Revolving
Credit Facility and Term Loan Facility.
(b) Reflects various operating leases for office space, manufacturing facilities and equipment from third parties.
(c) Reflects non-cancelable commitments as of December 31, 2010, including: (i) shareholder distributions of $67.3 million, (ii) estimated management
fees of $16.7 million per year over the next five years and; (iii) other obligations, including amounts due under employment agreements.
Distributions to our shareholders are approved by our board of directors each fiscal quarter. The amount approved for future quarters may differ
from the amount included in this schedule.
(d) The supplemental put obligation represents the long-term portion of an estimated liability accrued as if our Management Services Agreement with
CGM had been terminated. This agreement has not been terminated and there is no basis upon which to determine a date in the future, if any, that
this amount will be paid.
The table does not include the long-term portion of the actuarially developed reserve for workers’ compensation, which
does not provide for annual estimated payments beyond one year. This liability, totaling approximately $40.6 million at
December 31, 2010, is included in our consolidated balance sheet.
109
Critical Accounting Estimates
The following discussion relates to critical accounting policies for the Company, the Trust and each of our businesses.
The preparation of our financial statements in conformity with GAAP will require management to adopt accounting
policies and make estimates and judgments that affect the amounts reported in the financial statements and accompanying
notes. Actual results could differ from these estimates under different assumptions and judgments and uncertainties, and
potentially could result in materially different results under different conditions. Our critical accounting estimates are
discussed below. These critical accounting estimates are reviewed by our independent auditors and the audit committee of
our board of directors.
Supplemental Put Agreement
In connection with our Management Services Agreement, we entered into a Supplemental Put Agreement with our
Manager pursuant to which our Manager has the right to cause the Company to purchase the Allocation Interests then
owned by our Manager upon termination of the Management Services Agreement for a price to be determined in
accordance with the Supplemental Put Agreement. The fair value of the supplemental put is determined using a model that
multiplies the trailing twelve-month earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization (“EBITDA”) for each
reporting unit by an estimated enterprise value multiple to determine an estimated selling price of that reporting unit. We
then deduct estimated selling and disposal costs in arriving at a net estimated selling price that is then input into an iterative
supplemental put calculation which takes into account, among other things, contractually defined cumulative contribution
based profit in order to arrive at the estimated Manager’s profit allocation accrual required, reflected on the balance sheet
as the supplemental put liability.
We review the model quarterly and make updates to EBITDA and cumulative contribution based profit. When appropriate
we may change the estimated enterprise value multiple if the market for the particular reporting unit has changed. We
review the model and assumptions with our Manager each quarter. Since some of our Manager’s functions are to (i)
identify, evaluate, manage, perform due diligence on, negotiate and oversee the acquisitions of target businesses by us and
(ii) evaluate, manage, negotiate and oversee the disposition of all or any part of our property, assets or investments,
including dispositions of all or any part of our reporting units, we feel that our Manager is particularly skilled at reviewing
and commenting on this data. Annually, we prepare a detailed analysis of the estimated enterprise value multiple for each
of our reporting units, which is one of the primary drivers used to calculate the estimated selling price. In addition,
annually, we engage an independent investment banking firm to review the estimated enterprise value multiple for
reasonableness taking into account comparable company data, comparable transactions and discounted cash flow analyses
(“DCF”).
The methodology and results employed in the market approach for goodwill impairment testing for each of our reporting
units is most similar to the methodology and results reflected in calculating the estimated selling price of each of our
reporting units for the purpose of estimating the fair value of the supplemental put.
We typically assign a higher weighting to the market approach as opposed to the DCF in calculating the estimated selling
price of the reporting units for the purpose of estimating the fair value of the supplemental put than we do for estimating
the fair value of our reporting units for the purpose of goodwill impairment testing, which accounts for the major
differences in value. The higher weighting is based on the premise that because the Manager can unilaterally resign, the
Company will be required to remit the profit allocation (supplemental put value) as of a specific point in time. This one-
sided put on behalf of the Manager is the principle reason that we are required to reflect this liability on our balance sheet.
The impact of over-estimating or under-estimating the value of the supplemental put agreement could have a material
effect on operating results. In addition, the value of the supplemental put agreement is subject to the volatility of our
operations which may result in significant fluctuation in the value assigned to this supplemental put agreement.
Revenue Recognition
We recognize revenue when it is realized or realizable and earned. We consider revenue realized or realizable and earned
when it has persuasive evidence of an arrangement, the product has been shipped or the services have been provided to the
customer, the sales price is fixed or determinable and collectability is reasonably assured. Provisions for customer returns
and other allowances based on historical experience are recognized at the time the related sale is recognized.
Staffmark recognizes revenue for temporary staffing services at the time services are provided by Staffmark employees and
reports revenue based on gross billings to customers. Revenue from Staffmark employee leasing services is recorded at the
110
time services are provided. Such revenue is reported on a net basis (gross billings to clients less worksite employee
salaries, wages and payroll-related taxes). We believe that net revenue accounting for leasing services more closely depicts
the transactions with its leasing customers and is consistent with guidelines outlined in authoritative guidance. The effect
of using this method of accounting is to report lower revenue than would be otherwise reported.
Business Combinations
The acquisitions of our businesses are accounted for under the purchase method of accounting. The amounts assigned to
the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed in connection with acquisitions are based on estimated fair values as
of the date of the acquisition, with the remainder, if any, to be recorded as identifiable intangibles or goodwill. The fair
values are determined by our management team, taking into consideration information supplied by the management of the
acquired entities and other relevant information. Such information typically includes valuations supplied by independent
appraisal experts for significant business combinations. The valuations are generally based upon future cash flow
projections for the acquired assets, discounted to present value. The determination of fair values requires significant
judgment both by our management team and by outside experts engaged to assist in this process. This judgment could
result in either a higher or lower value assigned to amortizable or depreciable assets. The impact could result in either
higher or lower amortization and/or depreciation expense.
Goodwill and Intangible Assets
Goodwill represents the excess of the purchase price over the fair value of the assets acquired. We are required to perform
impairment reviews at least annually and more frequently in certain circumstances.
The goodwill impairment test is a two-step process, which requires management to make judgments in determining certain
assumptions used in the calculation. The first step of the process consists of estimating the fair value of each of our
reporting units based on a discounted cash flow model using revenue and profit forecast and a market approach which
compares peer data and multiples. We then compare those estimated fair values with the carrying values, which include
allocated goodwill. If the estimated fair value is less than the carrying value, a second step is performed to compute the
amount of the impairment by determining an “implied fair value” of goodwill. The determination of a reporting unit’s
“implied fair value” of goodwill requires the allocation of the estimated fair value of the reporting unit to the assets and
liabilities of the reporting unit. Any unallocated fair value represents the “implied fair value” of goodwill, which is then
compared to its corresponding carrying value. We cannot predict the occurrence of certain future events that might
adversely affect the reported value of goodwill and/or intangible assets. Such events include, but are not limited to,
strategic decisions made in response to economic and competitive conditions, the impact of the economic environment on
our customer base, and material adverse effects in relationships with significant customers. We determine fair values for
each of our reporting units using both the income and market approach. For purposes of the income approach, fair value
was determined based on the present value of estimated future cash flows, discounted at an appropriate risk-adjusted rate.
We use our internal forecasts to estimate future cash flows and include an estimate of long-term future growth rates based
on our most recent views of the long-term outlook for each business. Discount rates are derived by applying market derived
inputs and analyzing published rates for industries comparable to our reporting units. We use discount rates that are
commensurate with the risks and uncertainty inherent in the financial markets generally and in the internally developed
forecasts. Discount rates used in these reporting unit valuations ranged from approximately 15% to 16% in our most recent
annual impairment reviews. Valuations using the market approach reflect prices and other relevant observable information
generated by market transactions involving businesses comparable to our reporting units. We assess the valuation
methodologies under the market approach based upon the relevance and availability of data at the time of performing the
valuation and weigh the methodologies appropriately.
The impact of over-estimating or under-estimating the implied fair value of goodwill at any of our reporting units could
have a material effect on our operating results. In addition, the value of the implied goodwill is subject to the volatility of
our operations which may result in significant fluctuation in the value assigned at a point in time.
We completed our annual goodwill impairment testing as of March 31, 2010. At each of our reporting units, the units’ fair
value exceeded its carrying value. We test goodwill at interim dates if events or circumstances indicate that goodwill might
be impaired at any of our reporting units. As a result, we conducted an interim test for impairment at American Furniture
as of September 30, 2010, which was triggered based on results of operations at the reporting unit which had deteriorated
significantly during the second and third quarter of 2010. The domestic economy has undergone a significant period of
economic uncertainty which has resulted in limited access to credit markets and lower consumer spending. The retail
furniture market has been, and continues to be, severely impacted by these conditions, particularly as it relates to the
housing market. Retail furniture sales rely heavily on consumer spending for new furniture when they move into a new
home. The uptick in sales and results of operations that we anticipated at the beginning of this year, which we believed
would coincide with the overall modest economic rebound, has not occurred in the furniture industry and we do not at this
111
time believe it will occur in the near future. Accordingly, we adjusted our forecast for American Furniture to reflect a
revised outlook assuming continued pressure on sales and gross margins in the furniture industry. The revised forecast,
which is used to populate a discounted cash flow analysis, led to the conclusion that it was more likely than not that the fair
value of American Furniture was below its carrying amount.
The carrying value of American Furniture exceeded its fair value at September 30, 2010 due primarily to the significant
decrease in revenue and operating profit together with management’s revised outlook on near term operating results. As a
result, we performed the second step of the goodwill impairment test in order to determine the amount of impairment loss.
The second step of the goodwill impairment test involved comparing the implied fair value of American Furniture’s
goodwill with the carrying value of that goodwill. This comparison resulted in a goodwill impairment charge of $35.5
million, which was recorded in impairment expense on the consolidated statement of operations. The balance of goodwill
subsequent to the impairment charge remaining on the balance sheet of American Furniture at December 31, 2010 is $5.9
million. Further, the results of this analysis indicated that the carrying value of American Furniture’s trade name exceeded
its fair value by approximately $3.3 million. The fair value of the American Furniture trade name was determined by
applying the relief from royalty technique to forecasted revenues at the American Furniture reporting unit.
As of December 31, 2010, no indications of impairment exist at any of our reporting units and we do not believe that any
of our reporting units is at risk of failing step one of the annual goodwill impairment test performed March 31 of each year.
We completed our annual goodwill impairment testing as of March 31, 2009. At each of our reporting units, the units’ fair
value exceeded carrying value with the exception of Staffmark. The carrying amount of Staffmark exceeded its fair value
due primarily to the significant decrease in revenue and operating profit at Staffmark resulting from the negative impact on
temporary staffing and permanent placement revenues due to macroeconomic conditions and downward employment
trends experienced in 2008 and 2009. As a result, we performed the second step of the goodwill impairment test in order to
determine the amount of impairment loss. The second step of the goodwill impairment test involved comparing the implied
fair value of Staffmark’s goodwill with the carrying value of that goodwill. This comparison resulted in a goodwill
impairment charge of $50.0 million, which was recorded in impairment expense on the consolidated statement of
operations.
In connection with the annual goodwill impairment testing, we tested other indefinite-lived intangible assets at our
Staffmark reporting unit. As a result of this analysis we determined that the carrying value exceeded the fair value of the
CBS Personnel trade name (an indefinite-lived asset), based principally on the discontinuance of the CBS Personnel trade
name and rebranding of the reporting unit to Staffmark in February 2009. The fair value of the CBS Personnel trade name
was determined by applying the relief from royalty technique to forecasted revenues at the Staffmark reporting unit. The
result of this analysis indicated that the carrying value of the trade name ($10.6 million) exceeded its fair value ($0.8
million) by $9.8 million. Therefore, an impairment charge of $9.8 million is recorded in impairment expense on the
consolidated statement of operations for the year ended December 31, 2009. The remaining balance ($0.8 million) of the
CBS Personnel trade name is being amortized over 2.75 years. (See footnote G to our consolidated financial statements).
Long-lived intangible assets subject to amortization, including customer relationships, non-compete agreements and
technology are amortized using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the intangible assets, which we
determine based on the consideration of several factors including the period of time the asset is expected to remain in
service. We evaluate the carrying value and remaining useful lives of intangible assets subject to amortization whenever
indications of impairment are present.
The determination of fair values and estimated useful lives requires significant judgment both by our management team
and by outside experts engaged to assist in this process. This judgment could result in either a higher or lower value
assigned to our reporting units and intangible assets. The impact could result in either higher or lower amortization and/or
the incurrence of an impairment charge
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
The Company records an allowance for doubtful accounts on an entity-by-entity basis with consideration for historical loss
experience, customer payment patterns and current economic trends. The Company reviews the adequacy of the allowance
for doubtful accounts on a periodic basis and adjusts the balance, if necessary. The determination of the adequacy of the
allowance for doubtful accounts requires significant judgment by management. The impact of either over or under
estimating the allowance could have a material effect on future operating results.
112
Workers’ Compensation Liability
Staffmark is an employer with both self-insurance and large deductible plans for its workers’ compensation exposure.
Staffmark establishes reserves based upon its experience and expectations as to its ultimate liability for those claims using
developmental factors based upon historical claim experience. Staffmark continually evaluates the potential for change in
loss estimates with the support of qualified actuaries. As of December 31, 2010, Staffmark had approximately $58.8
million in workers’ compensation liability related to claims, reserves and settlements. The ultimate settlement of this
liability could differ materially from the assumptions used to calculate this liability, which could have a material adverse
effect on future operating results.
Deferred Tax Assets
Several of our majority owned subsidiaries have deferred tax assets recorded at December 31, 2010 which in total amount
to approximately $28.5 million. These deferred tax assets are comprised primarily of reserves not currently deductible for
tax purposes. The temporary differences that have resulted in the recording of these tax assets may be used to offset
taxable income in future periods, reducing the amount of taxes we might otherwise be required to pay. Realization of the
deferred tax assets is dependent on generating sufficient future taxable income. Based upon the expected future results of
operations, we believe it is more likely than not that we will generate sufficient future taxable income to realize the benefit
of existing temporary differences, although there can be no assurance of this. The impact of not realizing these deferred
tax assets would result in an increase in income tax expense for such period when the determination was made that the
assets are not realizable. (See Note K – “Income taxes in the Notes to consolidated financial statements”)
Recent Accounting Pronouncements
Refer to footnote B to our consolidated financial statements.
113
ITEM 7A. - Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk
Interest Rate Sensitivity
At December 31, 2010, we were exposed to interest rate risk primarily through borrowings under our Credit Agreement
because borrowings under this agreement are subject to variable interest rates. We had outstanding $74.0 million under the
Term Loan Facility and $22.0 million outstanding under the Revolving Credit Facility portions of our Credit Agreement at
December 31, 2010. Our exposure to fluctuation in variable interest on the outstanding balances of our Term and
Revolving Debt is not deemed to be material to our financial condition or results of operations.
We expect to borrow under our Revolving Credit Facility in the future in order to finance our short term working capital
needs and future acquisitions.
Exchange Rate Sensitivity
At December 31, 2010, we were not exposed to significant foreign currency exchange rate risks that could have a material
effect on our financial condition or results of operations.
Credit Risk
We are exposed to credit risk associated with cash equivalents, investments, and trade receivables. We do not believe that
our cash equivalents or investments present significant credit risks because the counterparties to the instruments consist of
major financial institutions and we manage the notional amount of contracts entered into with any one counterparty. Our
cash and cash equivalents at December 31, 2010 consists principally of (i) treasury backed securities, (ii) insured prime
money market funds, (iii) FDIC insured Certificates of Deposit, and (iv) cash balances in several non-interest bearing
checking accounts. Substantially all trade receivable balances of our businesses are unsecured. The concentration of credit
risk with respect to trade receivables is limited by the large number of customers in our customer base and their dispersion
across various industries and geographic areas. Although we have a large number of customers who are dispersed across
different industries and geographic areas, a prolonged economic downturn could increase our exposure to credit risk on our
trade receivables. We perform ongoing credit evaluations of our customers and maintain an allowance for potential credit
losses.
114
ITEM 8. – FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA
The consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedules referred to in the index contained on page F-1 of
this report are incorporated herein by reference.
115
ITEM 9. – CHANGES AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND
FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE
NONE
116
ITEM 9A – CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES
Disclosure Controls and Procedures
(a) Management’s Evaluation of Disclosure Controls and Procedures. The Company’s management, with the
participation of the Company’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, has evaluated the effectiveness of the
Company’s disclosure controls and procedures (as such term is defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the
Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”)) as of the end of the period covered by this report.
Based on such evaluation, the Company’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer have concluded that, as of
December 31, 2010, the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures are effective in recording, processing, summarizing
and reporting, on a timely basis, information required to be disclosed by the Company in the reports that it files or submits
under the Exchange Act and in ensuring that information required to be disclosed by the Company in such reports is
accumulated and communicated to the Company’s management, including the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial
Officer, as appropriate to allow timely discussions regarding require disclosure.
(b) Information with respect to Report of Management on Internal Control over Financial Reporting is contained on page
F- 2 of this Annual Report on Form 10-K and is incorporated herein by reference.
(c) Information with respect to Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm on Internal Control over
Financial Reporting is contained on page F- 3 of this Annual Report on Form 10-K and is incorporated herein by
reference.
(d) Changes in Internal Control over Financial Reporting. There have not been any changes in the Company’s internal
control over financial reporting (as such term is defined in Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) under the Exchange Act) during
our fourth fiscal quarter to which this Annual Report on Form 10-K relates that have materially affected, or are reasonably
likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.
117
ITEM 9B. – OTHER INFORMATION
None
118
PART III
ITEM 10. – DIRECTORS, EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Information concerning our executive officers is incorporated herein by reference to information included in the Proxy
Statement for our 2011 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.
Information with respect to our directors and the nomination process is incorporated herein by reference to information
included in the Proxy Statement for our 2011 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.
Information regarding our audit committee and our audit committee financial experts is incorporated herein by reference to
information included in the Proxy Statement for our 2011 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.
Information required by Item 405 of Regulation S-K is incorporated herein by reference to information included in the
Proxy Statement for our 2011 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.
The audit committee operates under a written charter, which reflects the New York Stock Exchange listing standards and
Sarbanes-Oxley Act requirements regarding audit committees. A copy of the charter is available on the company’s website
at www.compassdiversifiedholdings.com. We intend to satisfy any disclosure requirement under Item 5.05 of Form 8-K
regarding an amendment to, or waiver from, a provision of this charter by posting such information on our web site at the
address and location specified above.
ITEM 11. – EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION
Information with respect to executive compensation is incorporated herein by reference to information included in the
Proxy Statement for our 2011 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.
ITEM 12. - SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT
AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS
Information with respect to security ownership of certain beneficial owners and management is incorporated herein by
reference to information included in the Proxy Statement for our 2011 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.
ITEM 13. - CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS, AND
DIRECTOR INDEPENDENCE
Information with respect to such contractual relationships and independence is incorporated herein by reference to the
information in the Proxy Statement for our 2011 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.
ITEM 14. – PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES
Information with respect to principal accounting fees and services and pre-approval policies are incorporated herein by
reference to information included in the Proxy Statement for our 2011 Annual Meeting of Shareholders
119
PART IV
ITEM 15. – EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES
1.
2.
3.
Financial Statements
See “Index to Consolidated Financial Statements and Supplemental Data” set forth on page F-1.
Financial Statement schedule
See “Index to Consolidated Financial Statements and Supplemental Data” set forth on page F-1.
Exhibits
See “Index to Exhibits”. Set forth on Page E-1.
120
Exhibit
Number
INDEX TO EXHIBITS
Description
2.1
2.2
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
4.1
4.2
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
Stock and Note Purchase Agreement dated as of July 31, 2006, among Compass Group Diversified Holdings
LLC, Compass Group Investments, Inc. and Compass Medical Mattress Partners, LP (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 2.1 of the 8-K filed on August 1, 2006)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated June 24, 2008, among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC and the
other shareholders party thereto, Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as Sellers’ Representative,
Aeroglide Holdings, Inc. and Bühler AG (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.1 of the 8-K filed on June 26,
2008)
Certificate of Trust of Compass Diversified Trust (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 of the S-1 filed on
December 14, 2005)
Certificate of Amendment to Certificate of Trust of Compass Diversified Trust (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 3.1 of the 8-K filed on September 13, 2007)
Certificate of Formation of Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
3.3 of the S-1 filed on December 14, 2005)
Amended and Restated Trust Agreement of Compass Diversified Trust (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
3.5 of the Amendment No. 4 to S-1 filed on April 26, 2006)
Amendment No. 1 to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement, dated as of April 25, 2006, of Compass
Diversified Trust among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as Sponsor, The Bank of New York
(Delaware), as Delaware Trustee, and the Regular Trustees named therein (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 4.1 of the 8-K filed on May 29, 2007)
Second Amendment to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement, dated as of April 25, 2006, as amended on
May 23, 2007, of Compass Diversified Trust among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as Sponsor,
The Bank of New York (Delaware), as Delaware Trustee, and the Regular Trustees named therein
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.2 of the 8-K filed on September 13, 2007)
Third Amendment to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement dated as of April 25, 2006, as amended on
May 25, 2007 and September 14, 2007, of Compass Diversified Holdings among Compass Group Diversified
Holdings LLC, as Sponsor, The Bank of New York (Delaware), as Delaware Trustee, and the Regular Trustees
named therein (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.1 of the 8-K filed on December 21, 2007)
Fourth Amendment dated as of November 1, 2010 to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement, as amended
effective November 1, 2010, of Compass Diversified Holdings, originally effective as of April 25, 2006, by
and among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as Sponsor, The Bank of New York (Delaware), as
Delaware Trustee, and the Regular Trustees named therein (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 of the
Form 10-Q filed on November 8, 2010)
Second Amended and Restated Operating Agreement of Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC dated
January 9, 2007 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 of the 8-K filed on January 10, 2007)
Third Amended and Restated Operating Agreement of Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC dated
November 1, 2010 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.2 of the Form 10-Q filed on November 8, 2010)
Specimen Certificate evidencing a share of trust of Compass Diversified Holdings (incorporated by reference
to Exhibit 4.1 of the S-3 filed on November 7, 2007)
Specimen Certificate evidencing an interest of Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 10.2 of the 8-K filed on January 10, 2007)
Form of Registration Rights Agreement (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3 of the Amendment No. 5 to
S-1 filed on May 5, 2006)
Form of Supplemental Put Agreement by and between Compass Group Management LLC and Compass Group
Diversified Holdings LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.4 of the Amendment No. 4 to S-1 filed on
April 26, 2006)
Amended and Restated Employment Agreement dated as of December 1, 2008 by and between James J.
Bottiglieri and Compass Group Management LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the 8-K filed
on December 3, 2008)
Form of Share Purchase Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass
Diversified Trust and CGI Diversified Holdings, LP (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.6 of the
Amendment No. 5 to S-1 filed on May 5, 2006)
Form of Share Purchase Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass
Diversified Trust and Pharos I LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.7 of the Amendment No. 5 to S-1
filed on May 5, 2006)
Credit Agreement among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, the financial institutions party thereto
and Madison Capital Funding LLC, dated as of November 21, 2006 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1
of the 8-K filed on November 22, 2006)
First Amendment to Credit Agreement, entered into as of December 19, 2006, among Compass Group
121
10.8
10.9
10.10
10.11
10.12
10.13
21.1*
23.1*
31.1*
31.2*
32.1*
32.2*
99.1
99.2
99.3
99.4
99.5
99.6
99.7
Diversified Holdings LLC, the financial institutions party thereto and Madison Capital Funding LLC
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.7 of the 10-K filed on March 14, 2008)
Increase Notice, Consent and Second Amendment to Credit Agreement, effective as of May 23, 2007, by and
among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, the financial institutions party thereto and Madison Capital
Funding LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the 8-K filed on May 29, 2007)
Third Amendment to Credit Agreement as of December 7, 2007, among Madison Capital Funding LLC, as
Agent for the Lenders, the Existing Lenders and New Lenders and Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the 8-K filed on December 11, 2007)
Increase Notice and Fourth Amendment to Credit Agreement, entered into as of January 30, 2008, among
Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, the financial institutions party thereto and Madison Capital
Funding LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.7 of the 10-K on March 14, 2008)
Amended and Restated Management Services Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified
Holdings LLC, and Compass Group Management LLC, dated as of December 15, 2009 and originally effective
as of May 16, 2006
Registration Rights Agreement by and among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass
Diversified Trust and CGI Diversified Holdings, LP, dated as of April 3, 2007 (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 10.3 of the Amendment No. 1 to the S-1 filed on April 20, 2007)
Form of Share Purchase Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass
Diversified Trust and CGI Diversified Holdings, LP (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.16 of the
Amendment No. 1 to the S-1 filed on April 20, 2007)
List of Subsidiaries
Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a) Certification of Chief Executive Officer of Registrant
Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a) Certification of Chief Financial Officer of Registrant
Section 1350 Certification of Chief Executive Officer of Registrant
Section 1350 Certification of Chief Financial Officer of Registrant
Note Purchase and Sale Agreement dated as of July 31, 2006 among Compass Group Diversified Holdings
LLC, Compass Group Investments, Inc. and Compass Medical Mattress Partners, LP (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on August 1, 2006)
Stock Purchase Agreement, dated as of February 28, 2007, by and between HA-LO Holdings, LLC and HALO
Holding Corporation (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.3 of the 8-K filed on March 1, 2007)
Purchase Agreement dated December 19, 2007, among CBS Personnel Holdings, Inc. and Staffing Holding
LLC, Staffmark Merger LLC, Staffmark Investment LLC, SF Holding Corp., and Stephens-SM LLC
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on December 20, 2007)
Share Purchase Agreement dated January 4, 2008, among Fox Factory Holding Corp., Fox Factory, Inc. and
Robert C. Fox, Jr. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on January 8, 2008)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated May 8, 2008, among Mitsui Chemicals, Inc., Silvue Technologies Group,
Inc., the stockholders of the Company and the holders of Options listed on the signature pages thereto, and
Compass Group Management LLC, as the Stockholders Representative (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
99.1 of the 8-K filed on May 9, 2008)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated March 31, 2010 by and among Gable 5, Inc., Liberty Safe and Security
Products, LLC and Liberty Safe Holding Corporation (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K
filed on April 1, 2010)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated September 16, 2010, by and among ERGO Baby Intermediate Holding
Corporation, The ERGO Baby Carrier, Inc., Karin A. Frost, in her individual capacity and as Trustee of the
Revocable Trust of Karin A. Frost dated February 22, 2008 and as Trustee of the Karin A. Frost 2009
Qualified Annuity Trust u/a/d 12/21/2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on
September 17, 2010)
*
Filed herewith.
122
Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Registrant has duly
caused this to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.
SIGNATURE
COMPASS GROUP DIVERSIFIED HOLDINGS LLC
Date: March 10, 2011
By: /s/ Alan B. Offenberg
Alan B. Offenberg
Chief Executive Officer
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the
following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.
Signature
Title
Date
/s/ Alan B. Offenberg
Alan B. Offenberg
/s/ James J. Bottiglieri
James J. Bottiglieri
/s/C. Sean Day
C. Sean Day
/s/D. Eugene Ewing
D. Eugene Ewing
/s/Harold S. Edwards
Harold S. Edwards
/s/Mark H. Lazarus
Mark H. Lazarus
/s/Gordon Burns
Gordon Burns
Chief Executive Officer
(Principal Executive Officer)
and Director
Chief Financial Officer
(Principal Financial and Accounting
Officer)
and Director
Director
Director
Director
Director
Director
March 10, 2011
March 10, 2011
March 10, 2011
March 10, 2011
March 10, 2011
March 10, 2011
March 10, 2011
123
Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Registrant has duly
caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.
SIGNATURE
Date: March 10, 2011
COMPASS DIVERSIFIED HOLDINGS
By: /s/ James J. Bottiglieri
James J. Bottiglieri
Regular Trustee
124
Compass Diversified Holdings
INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
AND SUPPLEMENTAL FINANCIAL DATA
Historical Financial Statements:
Report of Management on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2010 and December 31, 2009
Consolidated Statements of Operations for the Years Ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008
Consolidated Statements of Stockholders’ Equity for the Years Ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Years Ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
Supplemental Financial Data:
The following supplementary financial data of the registrant and its subsidiaries required to be included in
Item 15(a) (2) of Form 10-K are listed below:
Schedule II – Valuation and Qualifying Accounts
All other schedules not listed above have been omitted as not applicable or because the required
information is included in the Consolidated Financial Statements or in the notes thereto.
Page
Numbers
F-2
F-3
F-4
F-5
F-6
F-7
F-8
F-9
S-1
F-1
REPORT OF MANAGEMENT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING
Management of Compass Diversified Holdings is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal
control over financial reporting as defined in Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) under the Securities Exchange Act of
1934. Compass’ internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance
regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation and fair presentation of financial statements issued
for external purposes in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America
(US GAAP). Compass’ internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that:
•
•
•
pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the
transactions and dispositions of assets of the company;
provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of
financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP, and that receipts and expenditures of the
company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of
the company; and
provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition,
use or disposition of assets of the company that could have a material effect on the consolidated
financial statements.
Internal control over financial reporting includes the entity level environment, controls activities, monitoring and
internal auditing practices and actions taken by management to correct deficiencies as identified.
Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect all
misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that
controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the
policies or procedures may deteriorate.
Management assessed the effectiveness of Compass’ internal control over financial reporting as of December 31,
2010. In making this assessment, management used the criteria set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring
Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO) in Internal Control-Integrated Framework. Based on this
assessment, management determined that Compass maintained effective internal control over financial reporting as
of December 31, 2010.
The effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting has been audited by Grant Thornton, LLP an
independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in their report which appears on page F-3.
March 10, 2011
F-2
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
Board of Directors and Shareholders
Compass Diversified Holdings
We have audited Compass Diversified Holdings (a Delaware Trust) and subsidiaries’ internal control over financial
reporting as of December 31, 2010, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the
Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). Compass Diversified Holdings and
subsidiaries’ management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its
assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Report of
Management on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on Compass
Diversified Holdings and subsidiaries’ internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.
We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United
States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective
internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an
understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and
evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other
procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our
opinion.
A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the
reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with
generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and
procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the
transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded
as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and
that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and
directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized
acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.
Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also,
projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate
because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.
In our opinion, Compass Diversified Holdings and subsidiaries maintained, in all material respects, effective internal
control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2010, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated
Framework issued by COSO.
We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United
States), the consolidated balance sheets of Compass Diversified Holdings and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2010 and
2009, and the related consolidated statements of operations, stockholders’ equity, cash flows, and financial statement
schedule listed in the index appearing under Item 15(a)(2) for each of the three years in the period ended December 31,
2010, and our report dated March 10, 2011 expressed an unqualified opinion thereon.
/s/ Grant Thornton LLP
New York, New York
March 10, 2011
F-3
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
Board of Directors and Shareholders
Compass Diversified Holdings
We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Compass Diversified Holdings (a Delaware Trust) and
subsidiaries as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, and the related consolidated statements of operations, stockholders' equity,
and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2010. Our audits of the basic financial
statements include the financial statement schedule listed in the index appearing under Item 15(a)(2). These financial
statements and financial schedule are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an
opinion on these financial statements and financial statement schedule based on our audits.
We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United
States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the
financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the
amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and
significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe
that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial
position of Compass Diversified Holdings and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, and the results of their
operations and their cash flows for each for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2010 in conformity
with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. Also in our opinion, the related financial
statement schedule when considered in relation to the basic financial statements taken as a whole, present fairly, in all
material respects, the information set forth therein.
We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United
States), Compass Diversified Holdings and subsidiaries’ internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2010,
based on criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring
Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO) and our report dated March 10, 2011 expressed an unqualified
opinion thereon.
/s/ Grant Thornton LLP
New York, New York
March 10, 2011
F-4
Compass Diversified Holdings
Consolidated Balance Sheets
(in thousands )
Assets
Current assets:
Cash and cash equivalents.....................................................................................................
Accounts receivable, less allowances of $5,481 at December 31, 2010
and $5,409 at December 31, 2009...................................................................................
Inventories.............................................................................................................................
Prepaid expenses and other current assets.............................................................................
Total current assets.............................................................................................................
Property, plant and equipment, net........................................................................................
Goodwill...............................................................................................................................
Intangible assets, net.............................................................................................................
Deferred debt issuance costs, less accumulated amortization of
December 31,
2010
December 31,
2009
$ 13,536
$ 31,495
208,487
77,412
33,904
333,339
33,484
325,851
269,672
165,550
51,727
26,255
275,027
25,502
288,028
216,365
$6,882 at December 31, 2010 and $5,093 at December 31, 2009....................................
Other non-current assets........................................................................................................
Total assets
3,822
17,873
$ 984,041
5,326
20,764
$ 831,012
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity
Current liabilities:
Accounts payable..................................................................................................................
Accrued expenses..................................................................................................................
Due to related party...............................................................................................................
Current portion, long-term debt............................................................................................
Current portion of workers’ compensation liability..............................................................
Other current liabilities.........................................................................................................
Total current liabilities.......................................................................................................
Supplemental put obligation.................................................................................................
Deferred income taxes...........................................................................................................
Long-term debt......................................................................................................................
Workers’ compensation liability...........................................................................................
Other non-current liabilities..................................................................................................
Total liabilities
$ 53,197
74,302
2,692
2,000
18,170
1,043
151,404
44,598
74,457
94,000
40,588
3,084
408,131
$ 45,089
54,306
3,300
2,500
22,126
2,566
129,887
12,082
60,397
74,000
38,913
7,667
322,946
Stockholders’ equity
Trust shares, no par value, 500,000 authorized; 46,725 shares issued
and outstanding at December 31, 2010 and 36,625 shares issued and outstanding
at December 31, 2009......................................................................................................
Accumulated other comprehensive loss................................................................................
Accumulated deficit..............................................................................................................
Total stockholders’ equity attributable to Holdings.........................................................
Noncontrolling interest.........................................................................................................
Total stockholders’ equity.....................................................................................................
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
638,763
(143)
(150,550)
488,070
87,840
575,910
$ 984,041
485,790
(2,001)
(46,628)
437,161
70,905
508,066
$ 831,012
See notes to consolidated financial statements.
F-5
Compass Diversified Holdings
Consolidated Statements of Operations
Year ended December 31,
2010
2009
2008
(in thousands, except per share data)
Net sales...............................................................................................................
$ 655,098
$ 503,400
$ 532,127
Service revenues...................................................................................................
1,002,511
745,340
1,006,346
Total revenues
1,657,609
1,248,740
1,538,473
Cost of sales.........................................................................................................
447,504
344,191
363,675
Cost of services....................................................................................................
854,698
632,800
832,531
Gross profit
Operating expenses:
355,407
271,749
342,267
Staffing expense...........................................................................................
81,250
74,279
102,438
Selling, general and administrative expense.................................................
179,154
145,948
165,768
Supplemental put expense (reversal)............................................................
32,516
(1,329)
6,382
Management fees.........................................................................................
15,380
13,100
15,205
Amortization expense...................................................................................
29,312
24,609
24,605
Impairment expense.....................................................................................
38,835
59,800
-
Operating income (loss)
Other income (expense):
(21,040)
(44,658)
27,869
Interest income.............................................................................................
20
1,178
1,377
Interest expense............................................................................................
(11,544)
(11,736)
(17,828)
Amortization of debt issuance costs.............................................................
(1,789)
(1,776)
(1,969)
Loss on debt extinguishment........................................................................
- (3,652)
-
Other income (expense), net.........................................................................
718
(282)
894
Income (loss) from continuing operations before income taxes
(33,635)
(60,926)
10,343
Provision (benefit) for income taxes...............................................................
11,135
(21,281)
6,526
Income (loss) from continuing operations
Income from discontinued operations, net of income tax...............................
Gain on sale of discontinued operations, net of income tax...........................
Net income (loss)
Net income (loss) attributable to noncontrolling interest ...............................
Net income (loss) attributable to Holdings
(44,770)
(39,645)
3,817
-
-
- 4,607
- 73,363
(44,770)
3,987
(39,645)
(13,375)
81,787
3,493
$ (48,757)
$ (26,270)
$ 78,294
Amounts attributable to Holdings:
Income (loss) from continuing operations......................................................
$ (48,757)
$ (26,270)
$ 324
Income from discontinued operations, net of income tax...............................
-
- 4,607
Gain on sale of discontinued operations, net of income tax............................
-
Net income (loss) attributable to Holdings
(48,757)
-
(26,270)
$
73,363
78,294
$
Basic and fully diluted income (loss) per share attributable to Holdings:
Continuing operations....................................................................................
$
(1.19)
$
(0.76)
$
0.01
Discontinued operations.................................................................................
-
-
2.47
Basic and fully diluted income (loss) per share attributable to Holdings
$
(1.19)
$
(0.76)
$
2.48
Weighted average number of shares of trust stock outstanding – basic and fully
diluted
40,928
34,403
31,525
Cash distributions declared per share
$
1.36
$
1.36
$
1.33
See notes to consolidated financial statements.
F-6
Compass Diversified Holdings
Consolidated Statements of Stockholders’ Equity
Total
Accumulated
Stockholders'
Other
Equity
Non-
Total
(in thousands)
Number of
Accumulated
Comprehensive
Attributable
Controlling
Stockholders’
Shares
Amount
Deficit
Loss
to Holdings
Interest
Equity
Balance — January 1, 2008
31,525
443,705
(10,855)
-
432,850
21,867
454,717
Net income.....................................................................................................................
-
-
78,294
-
78,294
3,493
81,787
Other comprehensive loss – cash flow hedge loss........................................................................
-
-
-
(5,242)
(5,242)
-
(5,242)
Comprehensive income (loss)..................................................................................................
-
-
78,294
(5,242)
73,052
3,493
76,545
Transfer from noncontrolling interest .........................................................................................
-
-
-
-
-
(3,900)
(3,900)
Issuance of stock by noncontrolling interest:
Staffmark acquisition .........................................................................................................
-
-
-
-
-
47,899
47,899
Fox acquisition ...............................................................................................................
-
-
-
-
-
7,725
7,725
Option activity attributable to noncontrolling interest..................................................................
-
-
-
-
-
2,347
2,347
Distributions paid.............................................................................................................
-
-
(41,455)
-
(41,455)
-
(41,455)
Balance — December 31, 2008
31,525
443,705
25,984
(5,242)
464,447
79,431
543,878
Net loss.......................................................................................................................
-
-
(26,270)
-
(26,270)
(13,375)
(39,645)
Other comprehensive income – cash flow hedge gain..................................................................
-
-
-
724
724
-
724
Other comprehensive income – cash flow hedge reclassification to earnings...............................
-
-
-
2,517
2,517
-
2,517
Comprehensive income (loss)..................................................................................................
-
-
(26,270)
3,241
(23,029)
(13,375)
(36,404)
Issuance of Trust shares, net of offering costs..............................................................................
5,100
42,085
-
-
42,085
-
42,085
Option activity attributable to noncontrolling interest..................................................................
-
-
-
-
-
2,303
2,303
Contribution of noncontrolling interest related to
Staffmark recapitalization..............................................................................................
-
-
-
-
-
5,497
5,497
Contribution from noncontrolling interest holders.......................................................................
-
-
-
-
-
49
49
Redemption of noncontrolling interest holders............................................................................
-
-
-
-
-
(3,000)
(3,000)
Distributions paid.............................................................................................................
-
-
(46,342)
-
(46,342)
-
(46,342)
Balance — December 31, 2009
36,625
$ 485,790
$ (46,628)
$ (2,001)
$ 437,161
$ 70,905
$ 508,066
Net loss.......................................................................................................................
-
-
(48,757)
-
(48,757)
3,987
(44,770)
Other comprehensive income – cash flow hedge gain..................................................................
-
-
-
1,858
1,858
-
1,858
Comprehensive income (loss)..................................................................................................
-
-
(48,757)
1,858
(46,899)
3,987
(42,912)
Issuance of Trust shares, net of offering costs..............................................................................
10,100
152,973
-
-
152,973
-
152,973
Contributions from noncontrolling interest holders.....................................................................
-
-
-
-
-
9,485
9,485
Option activity attributable to noncontrolling interest holders......................................................
-
-
-
-
-
4,913
4,913
Distribution to noncontrolling shareholder, net (see Note P)........................................................
-
-
(6,144)
(6,144)
Repayment of loan from noncontrolling shareholder (see Note P)................................................
-
-
-
-
-
4,694
4,694
Distributions paid.............................................................................................................
-
-
(55,165)
-
(55,165)
-
(55,165)
Balance — December 31, 2010
46,725
$ 638,763
$ (150,550)
$ (143)
$ 488,070
$ 87,840
$ 575,910
See notes to consolidated financial statements.
F-7
Compass Diversified Holdings
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows
2010
Year Ended December 31,
2009
2008
(in thousands)
Cash flows from operating activities:
Net income (loss)......................................................................................................
$ (44,770)
$ (39,645)
$ 81,787
Adjustments to reconcile net income (loss) to net cash provided by operating
activities:
Gain on sales of dispositions................................................................................
-
-
(73,363)
Depreciation expense............................................................................................
9,025
8,387
9,276
Amortization expense...........................................................................................
33,095
24,609
25,745
Impairment expense..............................................................................................
38,835
59,800
-
Amortization of debt issuance costs.....................................................................
1,789
1,776
1,969
Loss on debt extinguishment................................................................................
-
3,652
-
Supplemental put expense (reversal)....................................................................
32,516
(1,329)
6,382
Noncontrolling interests related to discontinued operations.................................
-
549
Noncontrolling stockholder charges and other.....................................................
7,637
1,555
2,827
Deferred taxes.......................................................................................................
(7,146)
(24,964)
(8,911)
Other.....................................................................................................................
441
107
381
Changes in operating assets and liabilities, net of acquisition:
(Increase) decrease in accounts receivable............................................................
(22,500)
143
29,970
(Increase) decrease in inventories.........................................................................
(13,030)
(557)
102
Increase in prepaid expenses and other current assets..........................................
(3,812)
(4,442)
(3,874)
Increase (decrease) in accounts payable and accrued expenses............................
12,761
(8,879)
(17,344)
Payment of supplemental put liability..................................................................
-
-
(14,947)
Net cash provided by operating activities
44,841
20,213
40,549
Cash flows from investing activities:
Acquisitions, net of cash acquired............................................................................
(173,732)
(1,435)
(167,546)
Purchases of property and equipment.......................................................................
(8,668)
(3,585)
(11,576)
Proceeds from dispositions........................................................................................
-
-
154,156
Other investing activities..........................................................................................
8
38
173
Net cash used in investing activities
(182,392)
(4,982)
(24,793)
Cash flows from financing activities:
Proceeds from the issuance of Trust shares, net........................................................
152,973
42,085
-
Borrowings under Credit Agreement.........................................................................
202,300
3,000
90,000
Repayments under Credit Agreement........................................................................
(182,800)
(79,500)
(87,532)
Distributions paid......................................................................................................
(55,165)
(46,342)
(41,455)
Swap termination fee.................................................................................................
-
(2,517)
-
Net proceeds provided by noncontrolling interest.....................................................
2,671
2,546
2,251
Debt issuance costs...................................................................................................
(259)
-
(552)
Other.........................................................................................................................
(128)
(481)
(273)
Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities
119,592
(81,209)
(37,561)
Foreign currency adjustment.....................................................................................
-
-
(80)
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents
(17,959)
(65,978)
(21,885)
Cash and cash equivalents — beginning of period...................................................
Cash and cash equivalents — end of period..............................................................
31,495
$ 13,536
97,473
$ 31,495
119,358
$ 97,473
Supplemental non-cash financing and investing activity:
- Issuance of CBS Personnel's common stock valued at $47.9 million during 2008 in connection with the acquisition of Staffmark LLC.
- Acquisition of $7.0 million of Tridien common stock during 2008 in connection with the extinguishment of a promissory note due the
Company by an employee of Tridien.
- Capital leases totaling $0.9 million were entered into during 2008.
See notes to consolidated financial statements.
F-8
Compass Diversified Holdings
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
December 31, 2010
Note A — Organization and Business Operations
Compass Diversified Holdings, a Delaware statutory trust (“the Trust”), was incorporated in Delaware on November 18,
2005. Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC, a Delaware limited liability Company (the “Company”), was also
formed on November 18, 2005. Compass Group Management LLC, a Delaware limited liability Company (“CGM” or the
“Manager”), was the sole owner of 100% of the interests of the Company (as defined in the Company’s operating
agreement, dated as of November 18, 2005), which were subsequently reclassified as the “Allocation Interests” pursuant to
the Company’s amended and restated operating agreement, dated as of April 25, 2006 (as amended and restated, the “LLC
Agreement”) (see Note P - Related Parties).
The Trust and the Company were formed to acquire and manage a group of small and middle-market businesses
headquartered in North America. In accordance with the amended and restated Trust Agreement, dated as of April 25,
2006 (the “Trust Agreement”), the Trust is sole owner of 100% of the Trust Interests (as defined in the LLC Agreement) of
the Company and, pursuant to the LLC Agreement, the Company has, outstanding, the identical number of Trust Interests
as the number of outstanding shares of the Trust. Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC, a Delaware limited liability
company is the operating entity with a board of directors and other corporate governance responsibilities, similar to that of
a Delaware corporation.
The Company is a controlling owner of eight businesses, or operating segments, at December 31, 2010. The operating
segments are as follows: Compass AC Holdings, Inc. (“ACI” or “Advanced Circuits”), AFM Holdings Corporation
(“AFM” or “American Furniture”), The ERGO Baby Carrier, Inc. ("ERGObaby”), Fox Factory, Inc. (“Fox”), HALO Lee
Wayne LLC (“HALO”), Liberty Safe and Security Products, LLC (“Liberty Safe” or “Liberty”), Staffmark Holdings Inc.
(“Staffmark”), and Tridien Medical (“Tridien”). Refer to Note E for further discussion of the operating segments.
Note B — Summary of Significant Accounting Policies
Accounting principles
The Company’s consolidated financial statements are prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally
accepted in the United States of America (US GAAP).
Basis of presentation
The results of operations for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008 represent the results of operations of the
Company’s acquired businesses from the date of their acquisition by the Company, and therefore are not indicative of the
results to be expected for the full year. Certain prior year amounts have been reclassified to conform to the current year’s
presentation.
Principles of consolidation
The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Trust and the Company, as well as the businesses
acquired as of their respective acquisition date. All significant intercompany accounts and transactions have been
eliminated in consolidation. Discontinued operating entities are reflected as discontinued operations in the Company’s
results of operations and statements of financial position.
The acquisition of businesses that the Company owns or controls more than a 50% share of the voting interest are
accounted for under the purchase method of accounting. The amount assigned to the identifiable assets acquired and the
liabilities assumed is based on the estimated fair values as of the date of acquisition, with the remainder, if any, recorded as
goodwill.
Use of estimates
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles requires management
to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent
assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the
reporting period. It is possible that in 2011 actual conditions could be worse than anticipated when we developed our
estimates and assumptions, which could materially affect our results of operations and financial position. Such changes
F-9
could result in future impairment of goodwill, intangibles and long-lived assets, inventory obsolescence, establishment of
valuation allowances on deferred tax assets and increased tax liabilities. Actual results could differ from those estimates.
Fair value of financial instruments
The carrying value of the Company’s financial instruments, including cash, accounts receivable and accounts payable
approximate their fair value due to their short term nature. Term Debt with a carrying value of $74.0 million at December
31, 2010 had a fair value of approximately $70.0 million. The fair value is based on interest rates that are currently
available to the Company for issuance of debt with similar terms and remaining maturities.
Revenue recognition
In accordance with authoritative guidance on revenue recognition, the Company recognizes revenue when persuasive
evidence of an arrangement exists, delivery has occurred or services have been rendered, the sellers price to the buyer is
fixed and determinable, and collection is reasonably assured. Shipping and handling costs are charged to operations when
incurred and are classified as a component of cost of sales.
Advanced Circuits
Revenue is recognized upon shipment of product to the customer, net of sales returns and allowances. Appropriate
reserves are established for anticipated returns and allowances based on past experience. Revenue is typically recorded at
F.O.B. shipping point but for sales of certain custom products, revenue is recognized upon completion and customer
acceptance.
American Furniture, ERGObaby, Fox, Liberty, Tridien
Revenue is recognized upon shipment of product to the customer, net of sales returns and allowances. Appropriate
reserves are established for anticipated returns and allowances based on past experience. Revenue is typically recorded at
F.O.B. shipping point.
HALO
Revenue is recognized when an arrangement exists, the promotional or premium products have been shipped, fees are fixed
and determinable, and the collection of the resulting receivables is probable. Over 90% of HALO’s sales are drop-shipped
and recorded F.O.B shipping point.
Staffmark
Revenue from temporary staffing services is recognized at the time services are provided by the Company employees and
is reported based on gross billings to customers. Revenue from employee leasing services is recorded at the time services
are provided and is reported on a net basis (gross billings to clients less worksite employee salaries and payroll-related
taxes). Revenue is recognized for permanent placement services at the employee start date.
Cash equivalents
The Company considers all highly liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less to be cash
equivalents.
Allowance for doubtful accounts
The Company uses estimates to determine the amount of the allowance for doubtful accounts in order to reduce accounts
receivable to their estimated net realizable value. The Company estimates the amount of the required allowance by
reviewing the status of past-due receivables and analyzing historical bad debt trends. The Company’s estimate also
includes analyzing existing economic conditions. When the Company becomes aware of circumstances that may impair a
specific customer’s ability to meet its financial obligations subsequent to the original sale, the Company will record an
allowance against amounts due, and thereby reduce the net receivable to the amount it reasonably believes will be
collectible.
Inventories
Inventories consist of manufactured goods and purchased goods acquired for resale. Inventories are stated at the lower of
cost or market, determined on the first-in, first-out method. Cost includes raw materials, direct labor and manufacturing
overhead. Market value is based on current replacement cost for raw materials and supplies and on net realizable value for
finished goods.
F-10
Inventory is comprised of the following (in thousands):
December 31,
2010
December 31,
2009
Raw materials and supplies........................................
Finished goods...........................................................
Less: obsolescence reserve.........................................
Total
$ 47,444
31,830
(1,862)
$ 77,412
$ 34,764
18,003
(1,040)
$ 51,727
Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment is recorded at cost. The cost of major additions or betterments is capitalized, while
maintenance and repairs that do not improve or extend the useful lives of the related assets are expensed as incurred.
Depreciation is provided principally on the straight-line method over estimated useful lives. Leasehold improvements are
amortized over the life of the lease or the life of the improvement, whichever is shorter.
The useful lives are as follows:
Machinery, equipment and software
Office furniture and equipment
Leasehold improvements
2 to 15 years
2 to 7 years
Shorter of useful life or lease term
Property, plant and equipment and other long-lived assets, that have definitive lives, are evaluated for impairment when
events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value of the assets may not be recoverable. Upon the
occurrence of a triggering event, the asset is reviewed to assess whether the estimated undiscounted cash flows expected
from the use of the asset plus residual value from the ultimate disposal exceeds the carrying value of the asset. If the
carrying value exceeds the estimated recoverable amounts, the asset is written down to the estimated present value of the
expected future cash flows from using the asset.
Property, plant and equipment is comprised of the following (in thousands):
December 31,
2010
December 31,
2009
$ 42,421
Machinery, equipment and software.....................
Office furniture and equipment............................. 2,812
9,551
Leasehold improvements......................................
54,784
(21,300)
$ 33,484
Less: accumulated depreciation............................
Total
$ 30,405
2,274
6,182
38,861
(13,359)
$ 25,502
Depreciation expense was approximately $9.0 million, $8.4 million and $8.5 million for the years ended December 31,
2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
Goodwill and intangible assets
Goodwill represents the difference between purchase cost and the fair value of net assets acquired in business acquisitions.
Indefinite lived intangible assets, representing trademarks and trade names, are not amortized until their useful life is
determined to no longer be indefinite. Goodwill and indefinite lived intangible assets are tested for impairment at least
annually as of March 31, or unless a triggering event occurs, by comparing the fair value of each reporting unit to its
carrying value.
Two methodologies are utilized when estimating the fair value of the reporting units for the purpose of the annual or
interim goodwill impairment test; (i) the income approach and, (ii) the market approach. The Company weighs the results
from the two methodologies based on its opinion of the relative strength of each and arrives at a blended indication of fair
value for each of the reporting units. The methodology employed in the income approach is the discounted cash flow
method, which focuses on the expected cash flow of the particular reporting unit. The Company determines cash flow over
the next five years together with a terminal value at the end of those five years and then discounts the sum of those values
to present value using an appropriate discount rate. The methodology employed in the market approach focuses on
F-11
comparing the particular reporting unit to reasonably similar publicly traded companies deriving valuation multiples from
the operating data of the selected guideline company. The Company then adjusts the multiples based on the relative
strengths and weaknesses of the selected company compared to the reporting unit and apply the resulting data to arrive at
an indication of fair value of the reporting unit. The Company also considers prices paid for recent transactions involving
companies similar to a particular reporting unit. Both the income approach and the market approach includes
management’s assumptions on revenue, growth rates, operating margins, appropriate discount rates and expected capital
expenditures. Estimating the fair value of reporting units involves the use of estimates and significant judgments that are
based on a number of factors including actual operating results. If current conditions change from those expected, it is
reasonably possible that the judgments and estimates described above could change in future periods.
Impairments, if any, are charged directly to earnings. Intangible assets with a useful life include customer relations,
technology, definite lived trade names, licensing agreements and non-compete agreements that are subject to amortization,
and are evaluated for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value of the assets
may not be fully recoverable.
Please refer to Note G for the results of the Company’s 2010 annual impairment testing.
Deferred debt issuance costs
Deferred debt issuance costs represent the costs associated with the issuance of debt instruments and are amortized over the
life of the related debt instrument.
Workers’ compensation liability
Workers’ compensation liability represents estimated costs of self insurance associated with workers’ compensation at the
Company’s Staffmark operating segment. The reserves for workers’ compensation are based upon actuarial assumptions
of individual case estimates and incurred but not reported (“IBNR”) losses. At December 31, 2010 and 2009, the current
portion of these reserves is included as a component of current portion of workers’ compensation liability and the non-
current portion is included as a component of workers’ compensation liability on the consolidated balance sheets.
Warranties
The Company’s ERGObaby, Fox, Liberty and Tridien operating segments estimate the exposure to warranty claims based
on both current and historical product sales data and warranty costs incurred. The Company assesses the adequacy of its
recorded warranty liability quarterly and adjusts the amount as necessary.
Supplemental put
In connection with the Management Services Agreement, the Company entered into a supplemental put agreement with the
Manager pursuant to which the Manager has the right to cause the Company to purchase the Allocation Interests then
owned by the Manager upon termination of the management services agreement for a price to be determined in accordance
with the supplemental put agreement. The fair value of the supplemental put is determined using a model that multiplies
the trailing twelve-month earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization (“EBITDA”) for each reporting unit
by an estimated enterprise value multiple to determine an estimated selling price of that reporting unit. The Company then
deducts estimated selling and disposal costs in arriving at a net estimated selling price that is then input into an iterative
supplemental put calculation which takes into account, among other things, contractually defined cumulative contribution
based profit in order to arrive at the estimated manager’s profit allocation accrual required, reflected on the balance sheet as
the supplemental put liability.
The Company reviews the model quarterly and makes updates to EBITDA and cumulative contribution based profit.
When appropriate the Company may change the estimated enterprise value multiple if the market for the particular
reporting unit has changed. The Company reviews the model and assumptions with the Manager each quarter. Since some
of the Manager’s functions are to (i) identify, evaluate, manage, perform due diligence on, negotiate and oversee the
acquisitions of target businesses by the Company and (ii) evaluate, manage, negotiate and oversee the disposition of all or
any part of property, assets or investments, including dispositions of all or any part of the reporting units, the Company
feels that the Manager is particularly skilled at reviewing and commenting on this data. Annually, the Company prepares a
detailed analysis of the estimated enterprise value multiple for each of the reporting units, which is one of the primary
drivers used to calculate the estimated selling price. In addition, annually, the Company engages an independent
investment banking firm to review the estimated enterprise value multiple for reasonableness taking into account
comparable company data, comparable transactions and discounted cash flow analyses.
The methodology and results employed in the market approach for goodwill impairment testing for each of the reporting
units is most similar to the methodology and results reflected in calculating the estimated selling price of each of the
reporting units for the purpose of estimating the fair value of the supplemental put.
F-12
The Company typically assigns a higher weighting to the market approach as opposed to the DCF in calculating the
estimated selling price of the reporting units for the purpose of estimating the fair value of the supplemental put than the
Company does for estimating the fair value of the reporting units for the purpose of goodwill impairment testing, which
accounts for the major differences in value. The higher weighting is based on the premise that because the Manager can
unilaterally resign, the Company will be required to remit the profit allocation (supplemental put value) as of a specific
point in time. This one-sided put on behalf of the Manager is the principle reason that the Company is required to reflect
this liability on the balance sheet.
The impact of over-estimating or under-estimating the value of the supplemental put agreement could have a material
effect on operating results. In addition, the value of the supplemental put agreement is subject to the volatility of the
Company’s operations which may result in significant fluctuation in the value assigned to this supplemental put agreement.
For the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2008, the Company recognized approximately $32.5 million and $6.4 million,
respectively, in expense related to the Supplemental Put Agreement. For the year ended December 31, 2009 the Company
reversed $1.3 million of expense related to the Supplemental Put Agreement. Upon the sale of any of the majority owned
subsidiaries, the Company will be obligated to pay CGM the amount of the supplemental put liability allocated to the sold
subsidiary.
Derivatives and hedging
The Company utilized an interest rate swap (derivative) to manage risks related to interest rates on the last $70.0 million of
its Term Loan Facility (“swap”). The Company has elected hedge accounting treatment to account for its swap and has
designated the swap as a cash flow hedge and as a result unrealized changes in fair value of the hedge are reflected in
comprehensive income (loss). The swap expired January 22, 2011.
Noncontrolling interest
Noncontrolling interest represents the portion of a majority-owned subsidiary’s net income that is owned by noncontrolling
shareholders.
Income taxes
Deferred income taxes are calculated under the liability method. Deferred income taxes are provided for the differences
between the basis of assets and liabilities for financial reporting and income tax purposes at the enacted tax rates. A
valuation allowance is established when necessary to reduce deferred tax assets to the amount that is expected to be more
likely than not realized.
Earnings per share
Basic and fully diluted income (loss) per share attributable to Holdings is computed on a weighted average basis.
2008
The weighted average number of Trust shares outstanding for fiscal 2008 was computed based on 31,525,000
shares outstanding for the entire fiscal year.
2009
The weighted average number of Trust shares outstanding for fiscal 2009 was computed based on 31,525,000
shares outstanding for the period from January 1, 2009 through December 31, 2009 and 5,100,000 additional
shares outstanding issued in connection with the Company’s secondary offering for the period from June 9, 2009
through December 31, 2009.
2010
The weighted average number of Trust shares outstanding for fiscal 2010 was computed based on 36,625,000
shares outstanding for the period from January 1, 2010 through December 31, 2010 and 5,100,000 additional
shares outstanding issued in connection with the Company’s secondary offering for the period from April 16,
2010 through December 31, 2010, and 150,000 shares outstanding issued in connection with the over-allotment
for the period from April 23, 2010 through December 31, 2010. Further, the weighted average number of Trust
shares outstanding for fiscal 2010 included 4,300,000 additional shares outstanding issued in connection with the
Company’s secondary offering for the period from November 17, 2010 through December 31, 2010, and 550,000
shares outstanding issued in connection with the over-allotment for the period from December 8, 2010 through
December 31, 2010.
The Company did not have any stock option plan or any potentially dilutive securities outstanding during the years ended
December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008.
F-13
Advertising costs
Advertising costs are expensed as incurred and included in selling, general and administrative expense in the consolidated
statements of operations. Advertising costs were $6.1 million, $3.6 million and $5.5 million during the years ended
December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
Research and development
Research and development costs are expensed as incurred and included in selling, general and administrative expense in
the consolidated statements of operations. The Company incurred research and development expense of $5.5 million, $3.9
million and $3.5 million during the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
Employee retirement plans
The Company and many of its operating segments sponsor defined contribution retirement plans, such as 401(k) or profit
sharing plans. Employee contributions to the plan are subject to regulatory limitations and the specific plan provisions.
The Company and its operating segments may match these contributions up to levels specified in the plans and may make
additional discretionary contributions as determined by management. The total employer contributions to these plans were
$1.1 million, $0.5 million and $2.1 million for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
Seasonality
Earnings of certain of the Company’s operating segments are seasonal in nature. Earnings from AFM are typically highest
in the months of January through April of each year, coinciding with homeowners’ tax refunds. Earnings from Staffmark
are typically lower in the first quarter of each year than in other quarters due to reduced seasonal demand for temporary
staffing services and to lower gross margins during that period associated with the front-end loading of certain payroll
taxes and other payments associated with payroll paid to our employees. Earnings from HALO are typically highest in the
months of September through December of each year primarily as the result of calendar sales and holiday promotions.
HALO generates approximately two-thirds of its operating income in the months of September through December.
Revenue and earnings from Fox are typically highest in the third quarter, coinciding with the delivery of product for the
new bike year.
Recent accounting pronouncements
In December 2010, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued amended guidance for performing
goodwill impairment tests, which was effective for the Company on January 1, 2011. The amended guidance requires
reporting units with zero or negative carrying amounts to be assessed to determine if it is more likely than not that goodwill
impairment exists. As part of this assessment, entities should consider all qualitative factors that could impact the carrying
value. The Company does not expect the adoption of this guidance will have a significant impact on the consolidated
financial statements.
In March 2010, the Emerging Issues Task Force (“EITF”) reached a consensus related to guidance when applying the
milestone method of revenue recognition. The consensus was issued by the FASB as an update to authoritative guidance
for revenue recognition and will be effective beginning on January 1, 2011. The amended guidance provides criteria for
identifying those deliverables in an arrangement that meet the definition of a milestone. In addition, the amended guidance
includes enhanced quantitative and qualitative disclosure about the arrangements when an entity recognizes revenue using
the milestone method. The Company does not expect the adoption of this guidance will have a significant impact on the
consolidated financial statements.
In February 2010, the FASB issued amended guidance for subsequent events, which was effective for the Company in
February 2010. In accordance with the revised guidance, an SEC filer no longer will be required to disclose the date
through which subsequent events have been evaluated in issued and revised financial statements. The adoption of the
revised guidance did not have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.
In January 2010, the FASB issued amended guidance to enhance disclosure requirements related to fair value
measurements. The amended guidance for Level 1 and Level 2 fair value measurements was effective for the Company on
January 1, 2010. The amended guidance for Level 3 fair value measurements will be effective for the Company January 1,
2011. The guidance requires disclosures of amounts and reasons for transfers in and out of Level 1 and Level 2 recurring
fair value measurements as well as additional information related to activities in the reconciliation of Level 3 fair value
measurements. The guidance expanded the disclosures related to the level of disaggregation of assets and liabilities and
information about inputs and valuation techniques. The adoption of the guidance for Level 1 and Level 2 fair value
measurements did not have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements. The Company does not
expect the adoption of the guidance related to Level 3 fair value measurements will have a significant impact on the
consolidated financial statements.
In January 2010, the FASB issued amended authoritative guidance related to consolidations when there is a decrease in
ownership. The guidance was effective for the Company on January 1, 2010. Specifically, the amendment clarifies the
F-14
scope of the existing guidance and increases the disclosure requirements when a subsidiary is deconsolidated or when a
group of assets is de-recognized. The adoption of the amended guidance did not have a significant impact on the
Company’s consolidated financial statements.
Note C - Acquisition of Businesses
Acquisition of The ERGO Baby Carrier, Inc
On September 16, 2010, ERGO Baby Intermediate Holding Corporation ("ERGO Holding"), a subsidiary of the Company,
entered into a stock purchase agreement with ERGObaby, and certain management stockholders pursuant to which ERGO
Holding acquired all of the issued and outstanding capital stock of ERGObaby. Based in Pukalani, Hawaii (Maui) and
founded in 2003, ERGObaby is a premier designer, marketer and distributor of babywearing products and accessories.
ERGObaby's reputation for product innovation, reliability and safety has led to numerous awards and accolades from
consumer surveys and publications. ERGObaby offers a broad range of wearable baby carriers and related products that are
sold through more than 800 retailers and web shops in the United States and internationally in approximately 20 countries.
The Company made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in ERGObaby for approximately $85.2 million
(excluding acquisition-related costs), representing approximately 84% of the outstanding common stock of ERGObaby on
a primary and fully diluted basis. ERGObaby’s management and certain other investors invested in the transaction
alongside the Company collectively representing approximately 16% initial noncontrolling interest on a primary and fully
diluted basis. In the event ERGObaby's net sales, as determined on a consolidated basis in accordance with United States
generally accepted accounting principles, for the fiscal year ending 2011 are equal to or greater than a contractually agreed
upon fixed amount, the sellers would be entitled to an additional cash payment of $2.0 million. If the sellers do not reach
this sales goal for 2011, the sellers would not be entitled to any payment. The fair value of this contingent consideration
was $0.2 million as of the acquisition date and was valued assuming a 10% probability of achieving the agreed upon sales
goal, discounted to present value utilizing a discounted cash flow model. In addition, an Internal Revenue Code Section
338(h)(10) election was made with respect to the ERGObaby transaction. Acquisition-related costs were approximately
$2.0 million and were recorded in selling, general and administrative expense on the accompanying condensed
consolidated statement of operations. CGM acted as an advisor to the Company in the transaction and received fees and
expense payments totaling approximately $0.9 million.
F-15
The results of operations of ERGObaby have been included in the consolidated results of operations since the date of
acquisition. ERGObaby’s results of operations are reported as a separate operating segment. The table below includes the
provisional recording of assets and liabilities assumed as of the acquisition date.
ERGO
(in thousands)
Assets:
Cash............................................................................................
Accounts receivable, net (1)........................................................
Inventory (2)...............................................................................
Other current assets.....................................................................
Property, plant and equipment....................................................
Intangible assets..........................................................................
Goodwill (3)................................................................................
Other assets.................................................................................
Total assets
Liabilities:
Current liabilities........................................................................
Other liabilities...........................................................................
Noncontrolling interest................................................................
Total liabilities and noncontrolling interest
Costs of net assets acquired........................................................
Loans to businesses.....................................................................
Amounts
Recognized as
of Acquisition
Date
$ 1,828
1,489
8,250
829
181
49,055
33,312
1,888
$ 96,832
$ 4,517
48,360
7,400
$ 60,277
$ 36,555
48,683
$ 85,238
(1) Includes $1.6 million of gross contractual accounts receivable, of which $0.2
million was not expected to be collected. The fair value of accounts receivable
approximated book value acquired.
(2) Includes $4.3 million of inventory fair value step up.
(3) The portion of goodwill deductible for tax purposes is approximately $32.9
million.
The intangible assets preliminarily recorded in connection with the ERGObaby acquisition are as follows (in thousands):
Intangible assets
Trade name
Customer relationships
Non-compete agreements
Technology
Amount
$
26,155
21,310
1,360
230
49,055
$
Estimated
Useful Life
Indefinite
15
5
10
Acquisition of Liberty Safe and Security Products, Inc
On March 31, 2010, Liberty Safe Holding Corporation (“Liberty Holding”), a subsidiary of the Company, entered into a
stock purchase agreement with Liberty Safe and certain management stockholders pursuant to which Liberty Holding
acquired all of the issued and outstanding capital stock of Liberty Safe. Based in Payson, Utah and founded in 1988,
Liberty Safe is the premier designer, manufacturer and marketer of home and gun safes in North America. From its
200,000 square foot manufacturing facility, Liberty produces a wide range of home and gun safe models in a broad
assortment of sizes, features and styles. Products are marketed under the Liberty brand, as well as a portfolio of licensed
and private label brands, including Remington, Cabela’s and John Deere.
The Company made loans to and purchased a controlling interest in Liberty for approximately $70.2 million (excluding
acquisition-related costs), representing approximately 96% of the outstanding common stock of Liberty on a primary basis
and approximately 88% on a fully diluted basis. Liberty’s management and certain other investors invested in the
transaction alongside the Company collectively representing approximately 4% initial noncontrolling interest on a primary
basis and approximately 12% on a fully diluted basis. In addition, the Company issued put options to certain
noncontrolling shareholders providing them an option to sell their ownership in the future at the then fair value (see Note H
for further discussion). Acquisition-related costs were approximately $1.5 million and were recorded in selling, general and
administrative expense on the accompanying condensed consolidated statement of operations. CGM acted as an advisor to
the Company in the transaction and received fees and expense payments totaling approximately $0.7 million.
F-16
The results of operations of Liberty have been included in the consolidated results of operations since the date of
acquisition. Liberty’s results of operations are reported as a separate operating segment. The table below includes the
provisional recording of assets and liabilities assumed as of the acquisition date.
Liberty
(in thousands)
Assets:
Cash............................................................................................
Accounts receivable, net (1)........................................................
Inventory.....................................................................................
Other current assets.....................................................................
Property, plant and equipment....................................................
Intangible assets..........................................................................
Goodwill (2)................................................................................
Other assets.................................................................................
Total assets
Liabilities:
Current liabilities........................................................................
Other liabilities...........................................................................
Noncontrolling interest................................................................
Total liabilities and noncontrolling interest
Costs of net assets acquired........................................................
Loans to businesses.....................................................................
Amounts
Recognized as
of Acquisition
Date
$ 2,438
10,109
7,435
1,552
5,991
27,756
33,075
1,935
$ 90,291
$ 7,125
55,884
1,085
$ 64,094
$ 26,197
44,059
$ 70,256
(1) Includes $10.5 million of gross contractual accounts receivable, of which $0.4
million was not expected to be collected. The fair value of accounts receivable
approximated book value acquired.
(2) Goodwill is not deductible for tax purposes.
The intangible assets preliminarily recorded in connection with the Liberty acquisition are as follows (in thousands):
Intangible assets
Customer relationships
Technology
License agreements
Trade name
Non-compete agreements
Training documents
Amount
$
13,590
6,690
3,300
3,020
640
516
27,756
$
Estimated
Useful Life
5
7
3
Indefinite
5
2
Acquisition of Circuit Express, Inc
On March 11, 2010, the Company’s subsidiary, Advanced Circuits, completed the acquisition of Circuit Express, Inc.
(“Circuit Express”), a manufacturer of rigid printed circuit boards, primarily for aerospace and defense related customers,
for approximately $16.1 million. The acquisition included three manufacturing facilities, totaling 35,000 square feet of
production space, in Tempe, Arizona. Goodwill of $6.9 million was recorded in connection with this acquisition and is not
tax deductible. In addition to goodwill, ACI recorded $7.6 million related to customer relationships with an estimated
useful life of 9 years, $0.8 million related to a trade name with an estimated useful life of 10 years and $0.3 million related
to a non-compete agreement with an estimated useful life of 5 years. Further, ACI recorded approximately $2.4 million in
property, plant and equipment, approximately $1.7 million in gross accounts receivable and approximately $0.2 million in
other working capital items.
This acquisition expands ACI’s capabilities and provides immediate access to manufacturing capabilities of more advanced
higher tech PCBs, as well as the ability to provide manufacturing services to the U.S. military and defense related accounts.
Other acquisition
On February 25, 2010, the Company’s subsidiary HALO completed an acquisition of Relay Gear, Inc. for approximately
$0.4 million. In connection with this acquisition, goodwill and intangible assets were recorded. The intangible assets
primarily relate to customer relationships with an estimated useful life of 15 years. This acquisition was not material to the
Company’s balance sheet, results of operations or cash flows.
F-17
Unaudited pro forma information
The following unaudited pro forma data for the year ended December 31, 2010 and 2009 gives effect to the acquisitions of
ERGObaby, Liberty and Circuit Express, as described above, as if the acquisitions had been completed as of January 1,
2009. The pro forma data gives effect to historical operating results with adjustments to interest expense, amortization and
depreciation expense, management fees and related tax effects. The information is provided for illustrative purposes only
and is not necessarily indicative of the operating results that would have occurred if the transactions had been
consummated on the date indicated, nor is it necessarily indicative of future operating results of the consolidated
companies, and should not be construed as representing results for any future period.
(in thousands)
Year ended December 31,
2010
2009
Net sales.............................................................
Operating loss.....................................................
Net loss...............................................................
$ 1,698,702
$ 1,361,716
(5,604)
(43,363)
(35,321)
(43,805)
Note D – Discontinued Operations
2008 Dispositions
On June 24, 2008, the Company sold its majority owned subsidiary, Aeroglide Corporation (“Aeroglide”), for a total
enterprise value of $95.0 million. The Company’s share of the net proceeds, after accounting for (i) redemption of
Aeroglide’s noncontrolling holders; (ii) payment of transaction expenses; and (iii) CGM’s profit allocation; totaled $78.3
million. The Company recognized a gain on the sale of $34.0 million, or $1.08 per share.
On June 25, 2008, the Company sold its majority owned subsidiary, Silvue Technologies Group, Inc. (“Silvue”), for a total
enterprise value of $95.0 million. The Company’s share of the net proceeds, after accounting for (i) redemption of Silvue’s
noncontrolling holders; (ii) payment of transaction expenses; and (iii) CGM’s profit allocation; totaled $63.6 million. The
Company recognized a gain on the sale of $39.4 million, or $1.25 per share.
Approximately $65 million of the Company’s net proceeds from the 2008 dispositions were used to repay amounts
outstanding under the Company’s Revolving Credit Facility. The remainder of the net proceeds was used to repay $70.0
million of the Term Debt Facility in February 2009 and for general corporate purposes.
F-18
Summarized operating results for the 2008 dispositions through the dates of the respective sales were as follows (in
thousands):
Aeroglide
For the Period
January 1, 2008
through Disposition
Net sales.....................................................................
$
34,294
Operating income.......................................................
Other expense.............................................................
Provision (benefit) for income taxes..........................
Noncontrolling interest...............................................
Income from discontinued
operations (1)..........................................................
5,041
(11)
1,274
239
$
3,517
(1) The results above for the period from January 1, 2008 through disposition exclude $1.6 million of intercompany interest expense.
Silvue
For the Period
January 1, 2008
through Disposition
Net sales.....................................................................
$
11,465
Operating income.......................................................
Other expense.............................................................
Provision for income taxes.........................................
Noncontrolling interest...............................................
Income from discontinued
operations(1)...........................................................
2,416
(83)
933
310
$
1,090
(1) The results above for the period from January 1, 2008 through disposition exclude $0.6 million of intercompany interest expense.
Note E – Operating Segment Data
At December 31, 2010, the Company had eight reportable operating segments. Each operating segment represents an
acquisition. The Company’s operating segments are strategic business units that offer different products and services.
They are managed separately because each business requires different technology and marketing strategies. A description
of each of the reportable segments and the types of products and services from which each segment derives its revenues is
as follows:
• Advanced Circuits, an electronic components manufacturing company, is a provider of prototype, quick-turn and
production rigid printed circuit boards. ACI manufactures and delivers custom printed circuit boards to customers
mainly in North America. ACI is headquartered in Aurora, Colorado.
• American Furniture is a leading domestic manufacturer of upholstered furniture for the promotional segment of
the marketplace. AFM offers a broad product line of stationary and motion furniture, including sofas, loveseats,
sectionals, recliners and complementary products, sold primarily at retail price points ranging between $199 and
$1,399. AFM is a low-cost manufacturer and is able to ship any product in its line within 48 hours of receiving an
order. AFM is headquartered in Ecru, Mississippi and its products are sold in the United States.
• ERGObaby is a premier designer, marketer and distributor of babywearing products and accessories. ERGObaby's
reputation for product innovation, reliability and safety has led to numerous awards and accolades from consumer
surveys and publications. ERGObaby offers a broad range of wearable baby carriers and related products that are
sold through more than 800 retailers and web shops in the United States and internationally. ERGObaby is
headquartered in Pukalani, Hawaii (Maui).
F-19
• Fox is a designer, manufacturer and marketer of high end suspension products for mountain bikes, all-terrain
vehicles, snowmobiles and other off-road vehicles. Fox acts as both a tier one supplier to leading action sport
original equipment manufacturers and provides after-market products to retailers and distributors. Fox is
headquartered in Watsonville, California and its products are sold worldwide.
• HALO serves as a one-stop shop for approximately 40,000 customers providing design, sourcing, and
management and fulfillment services across all categories of its customer promotional product needs. HALO has
established itself as a leader in the promotional products and marketing industry through its focus on service
through its approximately 700 account executives. HALO is headquartered in Sterling, Illinois.
• Liberty Safe is a designer, manufacturer and marketer of premium home and gun safes in North America. From
it’s over 200,000 square foot manufacturing facility, Liberty produces a wide range of home and gun safe models
in a broad assortment of sizes, features and styles. Liberty is headquartered in Payson, Utah.
• Staffmark, a human resources outsourcing firm, is a provider of temporary staffing services in the United States.
Staffmark serves approximately 6,000 corporate and small business clients. Staffmark also offers employee
leasing services, permanent staffing and temporary-to-permanent placement services. Staffmark is headquartered
in Cincinnati, Ohio.
• Tridien is a leading designer and manufacturer of powered and non-powered medical therapeutic support surfaces
and patient positioning devices serving the acute care, long-term care and home health care markets. Tridien is
headquartered in Coral Springs, Florida and its products are sold primarily in North America.
The tabular information that follows shows data of each of the operating segments reconciled to amounts reflected in the
condensed consolidated financial statements. The operations of each of the operating segments are included in
consolidated operating results as of their date of acquisition. Revenues from geographic locations outside the United States
were not material for any operating segment, except Fox, in each of the years presented below. Fox recorded net sales to
locations outside the United States, principally Asia, of $113.6 million, $84.0 million and $92.5 million for the years ended
December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Of these Asian sales, sales to Taiwan totaled $49.5 million, $35.6
million and $44.8 million for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Inter-segment sales
primarily represent sales of Staffmark services to the Fox segment.
Segment profit is determined based on internal performance measures used by the Chief Executive Officer to assess the
performance of each business. Segment profit excludes certain charges from the acquisitions of the Company’s initial
businesses not pushed down to the segments which are reflected in Corporate and other.
A disaggregation of the Company’s consolidated revenue and other financial data for the years ended December 31, 2010,
2009 and 2008 is presented below (in thousands):
Net sales of operating segments
Year Ended December 31,
2010
2009
2008
ACI.................................................................................. $ 74,481
$ 46,518
$ 55,449
American Furniture.........................................................
136,901
141,971
130,949
ERGO.............................................................................. 12,227
-
-
Fox..................................................................................
170,983
121,519
131,734
Halo................................................................................. 159,940
139,317
159,797
Liberty............................................................................. 48,966
-
-
Staffmark......................................................................... 1,002,511
745,340
1,006,345
Tridien............................................................................. 61,101
54,075
54,199
Intersegment eliminations...............................................
(9,501)
-
-
Total
1,657,609
1,248,740
1,538,473
Reconciliation of segment revenues to consolidated
revenues:
Corporate and other......................................................... -
-
-
Total consolidated revenues
$ 1,657,609
$ 1,248,740
$ 1,538,473
F-20
Profit (loss) of operating segments (1)
2010
Year Ended December 31,
2009
2008
ACI.................................................................................. $ 20,388
$ 16,297
$ 17,665
American Furniture (2).................................................... (37,088)
6,487
5,123
ERGO (3)........................................................................ (2,388)
-
-
Fox..................................................................................
19,576
10,658
10,707
Halo................................................................................. 4,870
2,847
5,289
Liberty (4).......................................................................
(811)
-
-
Staffmark(5).................................................................... 25,229
(55,603)
16,768
Tridien............................................................................. 8,013
7,400
4,228
Total
37,789
(11,914)
59,780
Reconciliation of segment profit to consolidated
income (loss) before income taxes:
Interest expense, net........................................................
(11,524)
(10,558)
(16,451)
Loss on debt extinguishment........................................... -
(3,652)
-
Other income (expense)................................................... 718
(282)
894
Corporate and other (6)...................................................
(60,618)
(34,520)
(33,880)
Total consolidated income (loss) before income taxes
$ (33,635)
$ (60,926)
$ 10,343
(1) Segment profit (loss) represents operating income (loss).
(2) Includes $38.8 million of goodwill and intangible asset impairment charges during the year ended December 31, 2010. See Note G.
(3) The year ended December 31, 2010 results include $2.0 million of acquisition-related costs incurred in connection with the acquisition of ERGObaby.
(4) The year ended December 31, 2010 results include $1.5 million of acquisition-related costs incurred in connection with the acquisition of Liberty.
(5) Includes $50.0 million of goodwill impairment charges during the year ended December 31, 2009. See Note G.
(6) Includes fair value adjustments related to the supplemental put liability and the call option of a noncontrolling shareholder. See Note H.
Accounts receivable
Accounts
Receivable
December 31, 2010
Accounts
Receivable
December 31, 2009
ACI........................................................................................................... $ 5,694
American Furniture..................................................................................
13,543
ERGO....................................................................................................... 3,273
Fox...........................................................................................................
17,482
Halo.......................................................................................................... 29,761
Liberty...................................................................................................... 9,720
Staffmark.................................................................................................. 128,491
Tridien...................................................................................................... 6,004
$ 2,762
12,032
-
15,590
25,103
-
106,394
9,078
Total
Reconciliation of segment to consolidated totals:
213,968
170,959
Corporate and other..................................................................................
Total
-
213,968
-
170,959
Allowance for doubtful accounts
Total consolidated net accounts receivable
(5,481)
$ 208,487
(5,409)
$ 165,550
F-21
Identifiable
Identifiable
Goodwill
Dec. 31,
2010
Goodwill
Dec. 31,
2009
Assets
Dec. 31,
2010(1)
Assets
Dec. 31, 2009(1)
2010
Depreciation and
Amortization Expense
for the Year
Ended Dec. 31,
2009
2008
Goodwill and identifiable assets of
operating segments
ACI.....................................................................
$ 57,615
$ 50,716
$ 28,919
$ 19,252
$ 4,279
$ 3,642
$ 3,741
American Furniture (3)........................................
5,900
41,435
60,067
63,123
3,119
3,654
3,704
ERGO.................................................................
33,397
-
59,248
-
4,305
-
-
Fox......................................................................
31,372
31,372
82,295
73,714
6,150
6,509
6,716
Halo....................................................................
39,252
39,060
41,304
43,647
3,235
3,351
3,157
Liberty.................................................................
32,870
-
40,917
-
5,161
-
-
Staffmark.............................................................
89,715
89,715
77,830
85,230
7,564
7,880
8,214
Tridien.................................................................
19,555
19,555
18,774
20,584
2,890
2,623
2,740
Total
309,676
271,853
409,354
305,550
36,703
27,659
28,272
Reconciliation of segment to consolidated total:
Corporate and other identifiable assets
Amortization of debt issuance costs
Goodwill carried at Corporate level (2)
-
-
40,349
71,884
5,417
5,337
4,857
-
-
-
-
1,789
1,776
1,969
16,175
16,175
-
-
-
-
-
Total
$ 325,851
$ 288,028
$ 449,703
$ 377,434
$ 43,909
$ 34,772
$ 35,098
(1) Does not include accounts receivable balances per schedule above.
(2) Represents goodwill resulting from purchase accounting adjustments not “pushed down” to the segments. This amount is allocated back to the
respective segments for purposes of goodwill impairment testing.
(3) Refer to Note G for discussion regarding American Furniture’s goodwill impairment recorded during the year ended December 31, 2010.
Note F - Commitments and Contingencies
Leases
The Company leases office facilities, computer equipment and software under various operating arrangements. Certain of
the leases are subject to escalation clauses and renewal periods. The future minimum rental commitments at December 31,
2010 under operating leases having an initial or remaining non-cancelable term of one year or more are as follows (in
thousands):
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
Thereafter
$
12,120
10,016
8,256
6,263
5,565
19,558
61,778
$
The Company’s rent expense for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008 totaled $14.0 million, $14.1
million and $16.5 million, respectively.
Legal Proceedings
In the normal course of business, the Company and its subsidiaries are involved in various claims and legal proceedings.
While the ultimate resolution of these matters has yet to be determined, the Company does not believe that any unfavorable
outcomes will have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial position or results of operations.
Note G - Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets
The Company performed its 2010 and 2009 annual goodwill impairment testing in accordance with guidelines issued by
the FASB as of March 31. This annual impairment test involved a two-step process. The first step of the impairment test
involved comparing the fair values of the applicable reporting units with their aggregate carrying values, including
goodwill. The Company’s reporting units are the same as its operating segments.
F-22
The Company determined fair values for each of its reporting units using both the income and market approach as
discussed in Note B. For purposes of the income approach, fair value was determined based on the present value of
estimated future cash flows, discounted at an appropriate risk-adjusted rate. The Company used its internal forecasts to
estimate future cash flows and included an estimate of long-term future growth rates based on its most recent views of the
long-term outlook for each business. Discount rates were derived by applying market derived inputs and analyzing
published rates for industries comparable to the Company’s reporting units. The Company used discount rates that are
commensurate with the risks and uncertainty inherent in the financial markets generally and in the internally developed
forecasts. Discount rates used in these reporting unit valuations ranged from approximately 15% to 16%. Valuations using
the market approach reflect prices and other relevant observable information generated by market transactions involving
businesses comparable to the Company’s reporting units. The Company assesses the valuation methodology under the
market approach based upon the relevance and availability of data at the time of performing the valuation and weighs the
methodologies appropriately.
2009 annual impairment test
The Company completed its analysis of the 2009 annual goodwill impairment testing in accordance with guidelines issued
by the FASB as of March 31, 2009. Based on the results of the test, an indication of impairment existed at the Company’s
Staffmark reporting unit. In each of the other reporting units the result of the annual goodwill impairment test indicated
that the fair value of the reporting unit exceeded its carrying value. Based on the results of the second step of the
impairment test, the Company estimated that the carrying value of the Staffmark goodwill exceeded its fair value by
approximately $50.0 million. As a result of this shortfall, the Company recorded a $50.0 million pretax goodwill
impairment charge to impairment expense on the consolidated statement of operations during the year ended December 31,
2009. The carrying amount of Staffmark exceeded its fair value due to the recent and projected significant decrease in
revenue and operating profit at Staffmark resulting from the negative impact on temporary staffing and permanent
placement revenues due to the depressed U.S. macroeconomic conditions resulting in downward employment trends.
In connection with the annual goodwill impairment testing at March 31, 2009, the Company tested other indefinite-lived
intangible assets at the Staffmark reporting unit. As a result of this analysis we determined that the carrying value
exceeded the fair value of the CBS Personnel trade name (an indefinite-lived asset), based principally on the phase-out of
the CBS Personnel trade name and rebranding of the reporting unit to Staffmark beginning in February 2009. The fair
value of the CBS Personnel trade name was determined by applying the income approach to forecasted revenues at the
Staffmark reporting unit. The result of this analysis indicated that the carrying value of the trade name ($10.6 million)
exceeded its fair value ($0.8 million) by approximately $9.8 million. Therefore, an impairment charge of $9.8 million was
recorded to impairment expense on the consolidated statement of operations for the year ended December 31, 2009. The
remaining balance of $0.8 million of the CBS Personnel trade name is being amortized over 2.75 years.
2010 annual impairment test
The Company completed its analysis of the 2010 annual goodwill impairment testing in accordance with guidelines issued
by the FASB as of March 31, 2010. For each reporting unit, the analysis indicated that the fair value of the reporting unit
exceeded its carrying value and as a result the carrying value of goodwill was not impaired as of March 31, 2010.
Interim goodwill impairment
The Company tests goodwill at interim dates if events or circumstances indicate that goodwill might be impaired at any of
the reporting units. As a result, the Company conducted an interim test for impairment at American Furniture based on
results of operations which had deteriorated significantly during the second and third quarter of 2010. The domestic
economy has undergone a significant period of economic uncertainty which has resulted in limited access to credit markets
and lower consumer spending. The retail furniture market has been, and continues to be, severely impacted by these
conditions, particularly as it relates to the housing market. Retail furniture sales rely heavily on consumer spending for
new furniture when they move into a new home. The uptick in sales and results of operations that the Company anticipated
at the beginning of this year, which it believed would coincide with the overall modest economic rebound has not occurred
in the furniture industry and the Company does not at this time believe it will occur in the near future. Accordingly, the
Company adjusted its forecast for American Furniture to reflect a revised outlook assuming continued pressure on sales
and gross margins in the furniture industry. The revised forecast, which is used to populate a discounted cash flow
analysis, led to the conclusion that it was more likely than not that the fair value of American Furniture is below its
carrying amount. Based on the results of the second step of the impairment test, the Company estimated that the carrying
value of American Furniture’s goodwill exceeded its fair value by approximately $35.5 million. As a result of this
shortfall, we recorded a $35.5 million goodwill impairment charge during the year ended December 31, 2010. Further, the
results of this analysis indicated that the carrying value of American Furniture’s trade name exceeded its fair value by
approximately $3.3 million. The fair value of the American Furniture trade name was determined by applying the relief
from royalty technique to forecasted revenues at the American Furniture reporting unit.
F-23
No indicators of impairment existed at December 31, 2010.
A reconciliation of the change in the carrying value of goodwill for the periods ended December 31, 2010 and 2009 are as
follows (in thousands):
Year ended
December 31,
2010
Year ended
December 31,
2009
Beginning balance:
Goodwill................................................................................................................. $ 338,028
(50,000)
Accumulated impairment losses.............................................................................
288,028
$ 339,095
-
339,095
Impairment losses...................................................................................................
(35,535)
Acquisition of businesses (1).................................................................................. 73,492
Adjustment to purchase accounting........................................................................ (134)
Total adjustments............................................................................................... 37,823
(50,000)
1,009
(2,076)
(51,067)
Ending balance:
Goodwill................................................................................................................. 411,386
(85,535)
Accumulated impairment losses.............................................................................
$ 325,851
338,028
(50,000)
$ 288,028
1) Relates to the purchase of ERGObaby, Liberty Safe, Circuit Express and Relay Gear. Refer to Note C.
Approximately $164.4 million of goodwill is deductible for income tax purposes at December 31, 2010.
Other intangible assets subject to amortization are comprised of the following at December 31, 2010 and 2009 (in
thousands):
December 30,
2010
December 31,
2009
Weighted Average
Useful Lives
Customer relationships........................................................................................
Technology..........................................................................................................
Trade names, subject to amortization..................................................................
Licensing and non-compete agreements..............................................................
Distributor relations and other.............................................................................
$
231,783
44,879
26,080
10,048
896
$
188,773
37,959
25,300
4,451
1,380
12
8
12
4
4
313,686
257,863
Accumulated amortization customer relationships..............................................
Accumulated amortization technology................................................................
Accumulated amortization trade names, subject to amortization.........................
Accumulated amortization licensing and non-compete agreements.....................
Accumulated amortization distributor relations and other...................................
Total accumulated amortization...........................................................................
Trade names, not subject to amortization ...........................................................
Total intangibles, net........................................................................................
(68,304)
(16,663)
(4,963)
(5,640)
(574)
(96,144)
52,130
269,672
$
(48,677)
(11,360)
(3,383)
(3,613)
(797)
(67,830)
26,332
216,365
$
Estimated charges to amortization expense of intangible assets over the next five years, is as follows, (in thousands):
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
$
30,719
30,161
29,224
28,817
25,301
144,222
$
F-24
The Company’s amortization expense of intangible assets for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008
totaled $33.1 million, $24.6 million and $24.6 million, respectively.
Note H — Fair Value Measurement
The following table provides the assets and liabilities carried at fair value measured on a recurring basis as of December
31, 2010 and 2009 (in thousands):
Liabilities:
Derivative liability – interest rate swap
Supplemental put obligation
Call option of noncontrolling shareholder (1)
Put option of noncontrolling shareholders (2)
Fair Value Measurements at December 31, 2010
Carrying
Value
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
$ -
$ 143
44,598 - - 44,598
$ -
$ 143
1,200
-
-
1,200
50
-
-
50
(1) Represents a noncontrolling shareholder’s call option to purchase additional common stock in Tridien.
(2) Represents put options issued to noncontrolling shareholders in connection with the Liberty acquisition.
Liabilities:
Derivative liability – interest rate swap
Supplemental put obligation
Call option of noncontrolling shareholder
Fair Value Measurements at December 31, 2009
Carrying
Value
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
$ 2,001
$ -
12,082 - - 12,082
$ -
$ 2,001
200
-
-
200
A reconciliation of the change in the carrying value of the Company’s level 3, supplemental put liability for the year ended
December 31, 2010 and 2009 is as follows (in thousands):
Balance at January 1
Supplemental put expense (reversal)
Balance at December 31
2010
2009
$
12,082
32,516
$
13,411
(1,329)
$
44,598
$
12,082
A reconciliation of the change in the carrying value of our level 3 call option of a noncontrolling shareholder for the year
ended December 31, 2010 is as follows (in thousands):
Balance at January 1
Fair Value adjustment to Call option (1)
Balance at December 31
2010
$ 200
1,000
$
1,200
(1) Represents a fair value adjustment to the call option of a noncontrolling shareholder of Tridien associated with an increase in
the estimated fair value of Tridien.
Valuation Techniques
Interest rate swap:
The Company’s derivative instrument consists of an over-the-counter (OTC) interest rate swap contract which is not traded
on a public exchange. The fair value of the Company’s interest rate swap contract was determined based on inputs that are
readily available in public markets or can be derived from information available in publicly quoted markets. Refer to Note
J for further discussion of the Company’s interest rate swap contract.
Supplemental put:
The Company and CGM entered into a Supplemental Put Agreement, which requires the Company to acquire the
Allocation Interests owned by CGM upon termination of the Management Services Agreement. Essentially, the put right
granted to CGM requires the Company to acquire CGM’s Allocation Interests in the Company at a price based on 20% of
the company’s profits upon clearance of a 7% annualized hurdle rate. Each fiscal quarter the Company estimates the fair
value of this potential liability associated with the Supplemental Put Agreement. Any change in the potential liability is
F-25
accrued currently as a non-cash adjustment to earnings. The large increase in the supplemental put liability during the year
ended December 31, 2010, as compared to the prior year, was primarily related to increases in the estimated values of the
Staffmark, Advanced Circuits and Fox operating segments, slightly offset by a decline in the estimated value of the
American Furniture operating segment.
Refer to Note B for a detailed discussion of the valuation technique related to the supplemental put.
Options of noncontrolling shareholder:
The call option of the noncontrolling shareholder was determined based on inputs that were not readily available in public
markets or able to be derived from information available in publicly quoted markets. As such, the Company categorized
the call option of the noncontrolling shareholder as Level 3.
The put options of noncontrolling shareholders were determined based on inputs that were not readily available in public
markets or able to be derived from information available in publicly quoted markets. As such, the Company categorized
the put options of the noncontrolling shareholders as Level 3.
The following table provides the assets and liabilities carried at fair value measured on a non-recurring basis as of
December 31, 2010 (in thousands):
Fair Value Measurements at Dec. 31, 2010
Carrying
Value
Assets:
Goodwill (1)
Trade name (2)
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
2010
2009
$ 5,900
$ -
$ -
$ 5,900
$ (35,535)
$ -
3,000
-
-
3,000
(3,300)
$ -
Gains/(losses)
Year ended
Dec. 31,
(1) Represents the fair value of goodwill at the AFM business segment subsequent to the goodwill impairment charge recognized during the
year ended December 31, 2010. See Note G for further discussion regarding impairment and valuation techniques applied.
(2) Represents the fair value of AFM’s trade name at the AFM business segment subsequent to the impairment charge recognized during the
year ended December 31, 2010.
Note I – Debt
On December 7, 2007, the Company entered into its current Credit Agreement with a group of lenders led by Madison
Capital, LLC (“Madison”). The Credit Agreement amended provides for a Revolving Credit Facility totaling $340.0
million and a Term Loan Facility with a balance of $74.0 million at December 31, 2010, (collectively “Credit
Agreement”). The Credit Agreement is secured by a first priority lien on all the assets of the Company, including, but not
limited to, the capital stock of the businesses, loan receivables from the Company’s businesses, cash and other assets. The
Revolving Credit Facility also requires that the loan agreements between the Company and its businesses be secured by a
first priority lien on the assets of the businesses subject to the letters of credit issued by third party lenders on behalf of
such businesses.
Term Loan Facility
The Term Loan Facility requires quarterly payments of $0.5 million that commenced March 31, 2008, with a final payment
of the outstanding principal balance due on December 7, 2013. In 2009 the Company repaid $75.0 million in term debt in
addition to the quarterly amortization with a portion of the unused proceeds from the sale of two of its operating segments
in 2008. The Term Loan Facility bears interest at either base rate or the London Interbank Offer Rate (“LIBOR”). Base
rate loans bear interest at a fluctuating rate per annum equal to the greater of (i) the prime rate of interest published by the
Wall Street Journal and (ii) the sum of the Federal Funds Rate plus 0.5% for the relevant period plus a margin of 3.0%.
LIBOR loans bear interest at a fluctuating rate per annum equal to LIBOR for the relevant period plus a margin of 4.0%.
Revolving Credit Facility
The Revolving Credit Facility matures on December 7, 2012. Availability under the Revolving Credit Facility is limited to
the lesser of $340 million or the Company’s borrowing base at the time of borrowing. The Company incurred
approximately $10.7 million in fees and costs for the arrangement of the Credit Agreement. These costs were capitalized
and are being amortized over the life of the loans. Approximately $1.8 million, $1.8 million and $2.0 million were
amortized to debt issuance cost in 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively, in connection with these capitalized costs. The
Revolving Credit Facility allows for loans at either base rate or LIBOR. Base rate loans bear interest at a fluctuating rate
per annum equal to the greater of (i) the prime rate of interest published by the Wall Street Journal and (ii) the sum of the
Federal Funds Rate plus 0.5% for the relevant period, plus a margin ranging from 1.50% to 2.50%, based upon the ratio of
total debt to adjusted consolidated earnings before interest expense, tax expense, and depreciation and amortization
F-26
expenses for such period (the “Total Debt to EBITDA Ratio”). LIBOR loans bear interest at a fluctuating rate per annum
equal to the London Interbank Offer Rate, or LIBOR, for the relevant period plus a margin ranging from 2.50% to 3.50%
based on the Total Debt to EBITDA Ratio. The Company is required to pay commitment fees ranging between 0.75% and
1.25% per annum on the unused portion of the Revolving Credit Facility. The Company recorded commitment fees of $3.0
million, $3.5 million and $3.1 million during 2010, 2009 and 2008 respectively, to interest expense.
At December 31, 2010, the Company had revolving credit availability of approximately $248.3 million under its Revolving
Credit Facility. The Company intends to use the availability under the Revolving Credit Facility to pursue acquisitions of
additional businesses to the extent permitted under its Credit Agreement and to provide for working capital needs.
Convenants
The Company is subject to certain customary affirmative and restrictive covenants arising under the Credit Agreement. In
addition, the Company is required to maintain certain financial ratios under the Revolving Credit Facility. The Company
was in compliance with all covenants at December 31, 2010. The following table reflects required and actual financial
ratios as of December 31, 2010 included as part of the affirmative covenants in our Credit Agreement:
Description of Required Covenant Ratio
Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio......................... greater than or equal to 1.5:1.0.........................................
Interest Coverage Ratio................................... greater than or equal to 2.75:1.0.......................................
Leverage Ratio................................................ less than or equal to 3.5:1.0..............................................
Covenant Ratio Requirement
Actual Ratio
6.39:1.0
9.75:1.0
1.17:1.0
A breach of any of these covenants will be an event of default under the Credit Agreement. Upon the occurrence of an
event of default under the Credit Agreement, the Revolving Credit Facility may be terminated, the Term Loan and all
outstanding loans and other obligations under the Credit Agreement may become immediately due and payable and any
letters of credit then outstanding may be required to be cash collateralized, and the Agent and the Lenders may exercise
any rights or remedies available to them under the Credit Agreement, the Collateral Agreement or any other documents
delivered in connection therewith. Any such event would materially impair the Company’s ability to conduct its business.
Letters of credit
The Credit Agreement allows for letters of credit in an aggregate face amount of up to $100.0 million. Letters of credit
outstanding at December 31, 2010 and 2009 totaled approximately $69.7 million and $66.2 million, respectively. Letter of
credit fees recorded to interest expense was $1.7 million for each of the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008.
The following table provides the Company’s debt holdings at December 31, 2010 and December 31, 2009 (in thousands):
Revolving credit facility ...................................................
Term loan facility..............................................................
Total debt..........................................................................
Less: Current portion, term loan facility...........................
Less: Current portion, revolving credit facility.................
Long term debt..................................................................
December 31,
2010
$ 22,000
74,000
$ 96,000
(2,000)
-
$ 94,000
2009
$ 500
76,000
$ 76,500
(2,000)
(500)
$ 74,000
Annual maturities of our Term Loan Facility and Revolving Credit Facility are scheduled as follows:
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
Thereafter
$
2,000
24,000
70,000
-
-
-
96,000
$
F-27
Note J - Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities
On January 22, 2008, the Company entered into a three-year fixed-for-floating interest rate swap for $140.0 million with its
bank lenders in order to reduce the risk of changes in cash flows associated with the variable interest payments on the last
$140.0 million of debt outstanding under its Term Loan Facility. The swap expired on January 22, 2011. The swap
effectively fixed the interest rate at 7.35% on the last $140.0 million of the Company’s outstanding Term Loan Facility.
The objective of the swap is to hedge the risk of changes in cash flows associated with the future interest payments on
variable rate Term Loan Facility debt with a notional amount of $140.0 million. The cash flow from the swap is expected
to offset any changes in the interest payments on the last $140.0 million of variable rate Term Debt due to changes in the
three-month LIBOR rate. On February 18, 2009, the Company terminated $70.0 million of the swap in connection with the
repayment of $75.0 million of the Term Loan Facility. In connection with the termination, the Company reclassified $2.5
million from accumulated other comprehensive loss into earnings during the year ended December 31, 2009.
The swap is a hedge of future specified cash flows. As a result, the swap is a derivative and was designated as a hedging
instrument at the initiation of the swap. The Company has applied cash flow hedge accounting. At the end of each period,
the swap is recorded in the consolidated balance sheet at fair value in either other assets if it is an asset position, or in
accrued liabilities if it is in a liability position. Any related increases or decreases in the fair value are recognized on the
Company’s consolidated balance sheet within accumulated other comprehensive income.
The Company assesses the effectiveness of its swap on a quarterly basis. The Company considered the impact of the recent
credit crisis in the United States in assessing the risk of counterparty default. The Company believed that it was likely that
the counterparty for these swaps would continue to perform throughout the contract period, and as a result continued to
deem the swaps as effective hedging instruments. A counterparty default risk is considered in the valuation of the interest
rate swaps.
At December 31, 2010, management has assessed and concluded that its cash flow hedge (swap) has no ineffectiveness, as
determined by the Change in Variable Cash Flows method due to the following conditions being met: (i) the floating rate
leg of the swap and the hedged variable cash flows are based on three-month LIBOR; (ii) the interest rate reset dates of the
floating rate leg of the swap and the hedged variable cash flows of the last $70.0 million of variable rate Term Loan
Facility debt are the same; (iii) the hedging relationship does not contain any other basis differences; and (iv) the likelihood
of the obligor not defaulting is assessed as being probable. If the Company partially or fully extinguishes the floating rate
debt payments being hedged or were to terminate the interest swap, a portion or all of the gains or losses that have
accumulated in other comprehensive income would be recognized in earnings at that time. Prospective and retrospective
assessments of the ineffectiveness of the hedge have been and will be made at the end of each fiscal quarter.
At December 31, 2010, the unrealized loss on the swap, reflected in accumulated other comprehensive income, was
approximately $0.1 million.
The following table provides the fair value of the Company’s cash flow hedge as well as its location on the balance sheet as
of December 31, 2010 and 2009 (in thousands):
December 30,
December 31,
Balance Sheet
2010
2009
Location
Liability
Cash flow hedge current
$
143
$
1,620
Other current liabilities
Cash flow hedge non-current
Total
-
143
$
381
2,001
$
Other non-current liabilities
Note K – Income Taxes
Compass Diversified Holdings and Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC are classified as partnerships for U.S.
Federal income tax purposes and are not subject to income taxes. Each of the Company’s majority owned subsidiaries are
subject to Federal and state income taxes.
F-28
Components of the Company’s income tax provision (benefit) are as follows (in thousands):
Current taxes
2010
Federal............................................................................... $ 14,843
State................................................................................... 3,438
18,281
Total current taxes
Deferred taxes:
Years ended December 31,
2009
$ 1,997
1,686
3,683
2008
$ 13,386
2,276
15,662
Federal............................................................................... (6,366)
State................................................................................... (499)
Foreign............................................................................... (281)
(7,146)
$ 11,135
Total deferred taxes
Total tax provision (benefit)
(24,519)
(445)
-
(24,964)
$ (21,281)
(8,379)
(757)
-
(9,136)
$ 6,526
The tax effects of temporary differences that have resulted in the creation of deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities
at December 31, 2010 and 2009 are as follows:
(in thousands)
December 31,
2010
2009
Deferred tax assets:
Tax credits...............................................................................
Accounts receivable and allowances.......................................
Workers’ compensation..........................................................
Accrued expenses....................................................................
Loan forgiveness.....................................................................
Other.......................................................................................
Total deferred tax assets
$ -
1,739
17,961
5,713
-
3,084
$ 28,497
$ 43
1,631
14,952
4,340
111
1,649
$ 22,726
Deferred tax liabilities:
Intangible assets......................................................................
Property and equipment..........................................................
Prepaid and other expenses.....................................................
Total deferred tax liabilities
$ (65,172)
(7,269)
(2,016)
$ (74,457)
$ (54,867)
(3,636)
(1,894)
$ (60,397)
Total net deferred tax liability
$ (45,960)
$ (37,671)
For the years ending December 31, 2010 and 2009, the Company recognized approximately $74.5 million and $60.4
million, respectively in deferred tax liabilities. A significant portion of the balance in deferred tax liabilities reflects
temporary differences in the basis of property and equipment and intangible assets related to the Company’s purchase
accounting adjustments in connection with the acquisition of its businesses. For financial accounting purposes the
Company recognized a significant increase in the fair values of the intangible assets and property and equipment in the
businesses it acquired. For income tax purposes the existing, pre-acquisition tax basis of the intangible assets and property
and equipment is utilized. In order to reflect the increase in the financial accounting basis over the existing tax basis, a
deferred tax liability was recorded. This liability will decrease in future periods as these temporary differences reverse.
There was no valuation allowance at December 31, 2010 or 2009. A valuation allowance is provided whenever it is more
likely than not that some or all of deferred assets recorded may not be realized.
F-29
The reconciliation between the Federal Statutory Rate and the effective income tax rate for 2010, 2009 and 2008 are as
follows:
United States Federal Statutory Rate......................................
Foreign and State income taxes (net of Federal benefits).......
Expenses of Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC
Years ended December 31,
2009
2008
2010
(35.0%)
4.9
(35.0%)
1.3
35.0%
9.5
representing a pass through to shareholders......................
Credit utilization.....................................................................
Non-deductible acquisition costs............................................
Impairment expense................................................................
Other.......................................................................................
Effective income tax rate...................................................
39.7
(12.8)
1.5
37.0
(2.2)
33.1%
4.6
(4.2)
-
-
(1.7)
(35.0%)
36.5
(24.1)
-
-
6.2
63.1%
A reconciliation of the amount of unrecognized tax benefits for 2010, 2009 and 2008 are as follows (in thousands):
Balance at January 1, 2008................................................
118
27
Additions for prior years’ tax positions.........................
Reductions for prior years’ tax positions....................... (44)
Balance at December 31, 2008..........................................
101
Additions for current years’ tax positions...................... 1,635
Reductions for prior years’ tax positions....................... (11)
Balance at December 31, 2009..........................................
$ 1,725
Additions for current years’ tax positions...................... 1,987
Additions for prior years’ tax positions.........................
778
Reductions for prior years’ tax positions....................... (30)
$ 4,460
Balance at December 31, 2010..........................................
Included in the unrecognized tax benefits at December 31, 2010 and 2009 is $3.6 million and $1.4 million, respectively, of
tax benefits that, if recognized, would affect the Company’s effective tax rate. The Company accrues interest and penalties
related to uncertain tax positions and at December 31, 2010 and 2009, there is $383 thousand and $127 thousand accrued,
respectively. Such amounts are included in the Provision (benefit) for income taxes in the accompanying consolidated
statements of operations. The change in the unrecognized tax benefits during 2010 and 2009 is primarily due to the
uncertainty of the deductibility of amortization and depreciation established as part of initial purchase price allocations in
2008. It is expected that the amount of unrecognized tax benefits will change in the next twelve months. However, we do
not expect the change to have a significant impact on our consolidated results of operations or financial position.
The Company and its operating segments file U.S. federal and state income tax returns in many jurisdictions with varying
statutes of limitations. The 2006 through 2010 tax years generally remain subject to examinations by the taxing authorities.
Note L- Noncontrolling interest
Noncontrolling interest represents the portion of a majority-owned subsidiary’s net income and equity that is owned by
noncontrolling shareholders.
F-30
The following tables reflect the Company’s percent ownership of its majority owned operating segments, as of December
31, 2010, 2009 and 2008 and related noncontrolling interest balances as of December 31, 2010 and 2009:
% Ownership (1)
December 31, 2010
% Ownership (1)
December 31, 2009
Primary
69.6
99.9
83.9
75.7
88.7
96.2
76.2
73.9
Fully Diluted
69.4
91.4
79.9
68.1
72.8
87.7
68.5
61.8
Primary
70.2
93.9
n/a
75.5
88.7
n/a
76.2
74.4
Fully Diluted
70.2
84.5
n/a
67.5
72.8
n/a
69.4
61.7
% Ownership (1)
December 31, 2008
Primary Fully Diluted
70.2
93.9
n/a
75.5
88.3
n/a
66.4
67.0
70.2
84.5
n/a
69.8
73.6
n/a
62.4
57.0
Advanced Circuits
American Furniture
ERGObaby
FOX
HALO
Liberty
Staffmark
Tridien
(1)
The principal difference between primary and fully diluted percentages of our operating segments is primarily due to stock option
issuances of operating segment stock to management of the respective operating segment.
Noncontrolling Interest Balances
as of December 31,
(in thousands)
ACI
American Furniture
ERGObaby
FOX
HALO
Liberty
Staffmark
Tridien
CGM
2010
$
2,326
(163)
7,087
13,373
3,211
1,156
50,962
9,788
100
87,840
$
2009
$
-
2,110
n/a
10,946
3,065
n/a
46,286
8,398
100
70,905
$
ACI
On January 12, 2010, in connection with a 2009 loan forgiveness arrangement, a portion of the outstanding loan between
the Company and certain members of Advanced Circuits management was repaid with Class A common stock of
Advanced Circuits valued at $47.50 per share ($4.75 million). The effect of this transaction decreased the noncontrolling
interest ownership percentage of Advanced Circuits from approximately 30% to 25%.
On December 9, 2010, the Company entered into an amendment to the inter-company loan agreement with Advanced
Circuits. As a result of this amendment, the noncontrolling interest ownership percentage of Advanced Circuits increased
from 25% to 30%. Refer to Note P for further information related to this amendment.
American Furniture
On December 30, 2010, the Company entered into an amendment to the inter-company loan agreement with American
Furniture. As a result of this transaction, the ownership percentage of the outstanding common stock of American Furniture
increased to approximately 99.9% on a primary basis and 91.4% on a fully diluted basis. Refer to Note P for further
information related to this amendment.
Staffmark
During 2009, the Company amended the Staffmark intercompany credit agreement which, among other things,
recapitalized a portion of Staffmark’s long-term debt by exchanging $35.0 million of debt for Staffmark common stock.
As a result of this transaction, the Company’s ownership percentage of the outstanding stock of Staffmark increased and
the noncontrolling interest in Staffmark decreased. In addition, as a result of the exchange the Company received cash
from a noncontrolling shareholder and recorded an increase to noncontrolling interest of $5.5 million. The receipt of the
noncontrolling shareholder contribution is included in Net proceeds provided by noncontrolling interest on the Company’s
consolidated statement of cash flows.
Tridien
On August 8, 2008, the Company exchanged a Promissory Note (Refer to Note P) due August 15, 2008, totaling
approximately $6.9 million (including accrued interest) due from the CEO of Tridien in exchange for shares of stock of
Tridien held by the CEO. As a result of this exchange of shares, noncontrolling interest decreased by approximately $3.9
million in 2008.
F-31
In September 2009, Tridien redeemed outstanding shares of Tridien stock from a noncontrolling interest holder of Tridien
for $3.0 million. This payment is included in net proceeds provided by noncontrolling interest on the Company’s
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows.
Note M- Stockholder’s Equity
Trust Shares
The Trust is authorized to issue 500,000,000 Trust shares and the Company is authorized to issue a corresponding number
of LLC interests. The Company will, at all times, have the identical number of LLC interests outstanding as Trust shares.
Each Trust share represents an undivided beneficial interest in the Trust, and each Trust share is entitled to one vote per
share on any matter with respect to which members of the Company are entitled to vote.
Initial public offering
On May 16, 2006, the Company completed its initial public offering of 13,500,000 shares of the Trust at an offering price
of $15.00 per share (“the IPO”). Total net proceeds from the IPO, after deducting the underwriters’ discounts,
commissions and financial advisory fee, were approximately $188.3 million. On May 16, 2006, the Company also
completed the private placement of 5,733,333 shares to Compass Group Investments, Inc. (“CGI”) for approximately $86.0
million and completed the private placement of 266,667 shares to Pharos I LLC, an entity controlled by Mr. Massoud, the
prior Chief Executive Officer of the Company, and owned by the Company’s management team, for approximately $4.0
million. Pharos I LLC was dissolved during 2010 and its shares were distributed to its individual members. CGI also
purchased 666,667 shares for $10.0 million through the IPO.
Secondary offerings
On May 8, 2007, the Company completed an offering of 9,200,000 trust shares (including the underwriter’s over-allotment
of 1,200,000 shares) at an offering price of $16.00 per share. Simultaneous with the sale of the trust shares to the public,
CGI purchased, through a wholly-owned subsidiary, 1,875,000 trust shares at $16.00 per share in a separate private
placement. The net proceeds of the secondary offering to the Company, after deducting underwriter’s discount and
offering costs totaled approximately $168.7 million. The Company used a portion of the net proceeds to repay the
outstanding balance on its Revolving Credit Facility.
On June 9, 2009, the Company completed an offering of 5,100,000 Trust shares at an offering price of $8.85 per share.
The net proceeds to the Company, after deducting underwriter’s discount and offering costs totaled approximately $42.1
million.
On April 13, 2010, the Company completed an offering of 5,250,000 Trust shares (including the underwriter’s over-
allotment completed April 23, 2010) at an offering price of $15.10 per share. The net proceeds to the Company, after
deducting underwriter’s discount and offering costs totaled approximately $75.0 million. The Company used $70.0 million
of the net proceeds to pay down its Revolving Credit Facility.
On November 12, 2010, the Company completed an offering of 4,850,000 Trust shares (including the underwriter’s over-
allotment completed December 8, 2010) at an offering price of $16.90 per share. The net proceeds to the Company, after
deducting underwriter’s discount and offering costs totaled approximately $78.0 million. The Company used $70.0 million
of the net proceeds to pay down its Revolving Credit Facility.
Distributions
During the year ended December 31, 2009, the Company paid the following distributions:
• On January 30, 2009, the Company paid a distribution of $0.34 per share to holders of record as of
January 23, 2009.
• On April 30, 2009, the Company paid a distribution of $0.34 per share to holders of record as of April
23, 2009.
• On July 30, 2009, the Company paid a distribution of $0.34 per share to holders of record as of July 24,
2009.
• On October 29, 2009, the Company paid a distribution of $0.34 per share to holders of record as of
October 23, 2009.
F-32
During the year ended December 31, 2010, the Company paid the following distributions:
• On January 28, 2010, the Company paid a distribution of $0.34 per share to holders of record as of
January 22, 2010.
• On April 30, 2010, the Company paid a distribution of $0.34 per share to holders of record as of April
23, 2010.
• On July 30, 2010, the Company paid a distribution of $0.34 per share to holders of record as of July 23,
2010.
• On October 29, 2010, the Company paid a distribution of $0.34 per share to holders of record as of
October 22, 2010.
On January 28, 2011, the Company paid a distribution of $0.34 per share to holders of record as of January 21, 2011.
On March 8, 2011, the Company declared a distribution of $0.36 per share to be paid April 12, 2011 to holders of record as
of March 29, 2011.
Note N – Unaudited Quarterly Financial Data
The following table presents the unaudited quarterly financial data. This information has been prepared on a basis
consistent with that of the audited consolidated financial statements and all necessary material adjustments, consisting of
normal recurring accruals and adjustments, have been included to present fairly the unaudited quarterly financial data. The
quarterly results of operations for these periods are not necessarily indicative of future results of operations. The per share
calculations for each of the quarters are based on the weighted average number of shares for each period; therefore, the
sum of the quarters may not necessarily be equal to the full year per share amount.
During the quarter ended December 31, 2010, the Company revised its goodwill impairment charge at its American
Furniture segment and write down of the related trade name based on the final results from the Step 2 goodwill impairment
analysis. During the quarter ended December 31, 2010, the Company reversed $5.9 million of goodwill impairment
previously charged and at the same time increased the trade name write down at American Furniture by $2.3 million.
(in thousands)
December 31,
2010
September 30,
2010
June 30,
2010
March 31,
2010
Total revenues.........................................................................................
Gross profit.............................................................................................
Operating income (loss)...........................................................................
Net income (loss) attributable to Holdings...............................................
Basic and fully diluted loss per share
$
$
438,901
99,158
6,261
(1,269)
460,767
99,531
(21,212)
(30,059)
$
404,322
85,692
9,086
(1,460)
$
$
$
353,619
71,026
(15,175)
(15,969)
$
$
attributable to Holdings:......................................................................
$
(0.03)
$
(0.72)
$
(0.04)
$
(0.44)
(in thousands)
December 31,
2009
September 30,
2009
June 30,
2009
March 31,
2009
Total revenues.........................................................................................
Gross profit.............................................................................................
Operating income (loss)...........................................................................
Net income (loss) attributable to Holdings...............................................
Basic and fully diluted income (loss) per share
$
$
362,059
78,910
6,461
(1,680)
324,239
71,064
7,902
2,101
$
287,528
64,166
2,974
627
$
$
$
274,914
57,609
(61,995)
(27,318)
$
$
attributable to Holdings:......................................................................
$
(0.05)
$
0.06
$
0.02
$
(0.87)
F-33
Note O – Supplemental Data
Supplemental Balance Sheet Data (in thousands):
Summary of accrued expenses:
Accrued payroll and fringes...........
Accrued taxes.................................
Income taxes payable.....................
Accrued interest..............................
Warranty payable............................
Other accrued expenses..................
Total
Warranty liability:
Beginning balance..........................
Accrual...........................................
Warranty payments.........................
Other (1).........................................
Ending balance...............................
December 31,
2010
$ 32,819
14,057
7,605
1,771
3,237
14,813
$ 74,302
December 31,
2010
1,529
$
2,872
(1,726)
562
$ 3,237
December 31,
2009
$ 26,274
9,816
3,622
1,936
1,529
11,129
$ 54,306
December 31,
2009
$
1,577
1,451
(1,499)
-
$ 1,529
(1) Represents warranty liabilities acquired related to Liberty and ERGObaby.
Supplemental Statement of Operations Data:
In connection with fire at the AFM manufacturing facility in February 2008, the Company recorded business interruption
proceeds of $1.3 million to offset cost of sales and $3.1 million to offset selling, general and administrative expense during
the year ended December 31, 2008. The Company recorded business interruption proceeds totaling approximately $1.5
million to offset cost of sales during the year ended December 31, 2009.
Supplemental Cash Flow Statement Data (in thousands):
December 31,
2010
December 31,
2009
December 31,
2008
Interest paid....................................
Taxes paid......................................
$ 12,033
10,101
$ 12,527
7,709
$ 15,754
15,971
Note P – Related Party Transactions
The Company has entered into the following related party transactions with its Manager, CGM:
• Management Services Agreement
•
LLC Agreement
Supplemental Put Agreement
Cost Reimbursement and Fees
•
•
Management Services Agreement - The Company entered into a management services agreement (“MSA”) with CGM
effective May 16, 2006. The MSA provides for, among other things, CGM to perform services for the Company in
exchange for a management fee paid quarterly and equal to 0.5% of the Company’s adjusted net assets, as defined in the
MSA. The Company amended the MSA on November 8, 2006, to clarify that adjusted net assets are not reduced by non-
cash charges associated with the Supplemental Put Agreement, which amendment was unanimously approved by the
Compensation Committee and the Board of Directors. The management fee is required to be paid prior to the payment of
any distributions to shareholders.
Pursuant to the MSA, CGM is entitled to enter into off-setting management service agreements with each of the operating
segments. The amount of the fee is negotiated between CGM and the operating management of each segment and is based
F-34
upon the value of the services to be provided. The fees paid directly to CGM by the segments offset on a dollar for dollar
basis the amount due CGM by the Company under the MSA.
For the year ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, the Company incurred the following management fees to CGM, by
entity (in thousands):
December 31,
2010
Advanced Circuits.................... $ 500
American Furniture..................
500
ERGObaby...............................
125
FOX.........................................
500
HALO......................................
500
Liberty......................................
375
Staffmark.................................
304
Tridien.....................................
350
Corporate.................................
12,226
15,380
$
December 31,
2009
$ 375
375
n/a
375
375
n/a
659
263
10,678
13,100
$
December 31,
2008
$ 500
500
n/a
496
500
n/a
1,715
350
11,144
15,205
$
Staffmark paid management fees of approximately $0.1 million and $0.3 million for the years ended December 31, 2010
and 2009, respectively, to a separate manager of Staffmark LLC, unrelated to CGM.
Approximately $2.7 million and $3.3 million of the management fees incurred were unpaid as of December 31, 2010 and
2009, respectively, and included in Due to related party on the consolidated balance sheets.
LLC Agreement
In addition to providing management services to the Company, pursuant to the MSA, CGM owns 100% of the Allocation
Interests in the Company. CGM paid $0.1 million for these Allocation Interests and has the right to cause the Company to
purchase the Allocation Interests it owns. The Allocation Interests give CGM the right to distributions pursuant to a profit
allocation formula upon the occurrence of certain events. Certain events include, but are not limited to, the dispositions of
subsidiaries.
Supplemental Put Agreement
Concurrent with the IPO, CGM and the Company entered into a Supplemental Put Agreement, which may require the
Company to acquire these Allocation Interests upon termination of the Management Services Agreement. Essentially, the
put rights granted to CGM require the Company to acquire CGM’s Allocation Interests in the Company at a price based on
a percentage of the increase in fair value in the Company’s businesses over its basis in those businesses. Each fiscal
quarter the Company estimates the fair value of its businesses for the purpose of determining its potential liability
associated with the Supplemental Put Agreement. Any change in the potential liability is accrued currently as an
adjustment to earnings. Refer to Note B for a description of the calculation of the supplemental put liability. For the years
ended December 31, 2010 and 2008, the Company recognized approximately $32.5 million and $6.4 million in expense
related to the Supplemental Put Agreement. For the year ended December 31, 2009, the Company reversed expense
related to the Supplemental Put Agreement of approximately $1.3 million. The Company paid approximately $14.9
million to CGM during the year ended December 31, 2008 related to the profit allocation for the dispositions of Aeroglide
and Silvue.
Cost Reimbursement and Fees
The Company reimbursed its Manager, CGM, approximately $2.8 million, $2.7 million and $2.6 million, principally for
occupancy and staffing costs incurred by CGM on the Company’s behalf during the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009
and 2008, respectively.
CGM acted as an advisor for each of the 2010 acquisitions for which it received transaction service and expense payments
totaling approximately $1.6 million. CGM acted as an advisor for each of the 2008 acquisitions for which it received
transaction service and expense payments of approximately $2.0 million.
F-35
The Company has entered into the following significant related party transactions with its businesses:
Advanced Circuits
In connection with the acquisition of Advanced Circuits by CGI, Advanced Circuits loaned certain officers and members of
management of Advanced Circuits $8.2 million for the purchase of shares of Advanced Circuit’s common stock in late
2005 and early 2006. The notes bared interest at 6% and interest was added to the notes. Advanced Circuits implemented
a performance incentive program whereby the notes could either be partially or completely forgiven based upon the
achievement of certain pre-defined financial performance targets. The original measurement date for determination of any
potential loan forgiveness was based on the financial performance of Advanced Circuits for the fiscal year ended
December 31, 2010. Advanced Circuits had been accruing loan forgiveness over the service period measured from the
issuance of the notes until the original measurement date of December 31, 2010. However, the Company accelerated the
loan forgiveness to January 2010 and as a result, forgave a portion of the loan balance as described below. As a result
Advanced Circuits reversed $0.7 million of loan forgiveness previously accrued in prior years during the year ended
December 31, 2009. In addition, the Company recorded the amount of interest due over the original service period of the
loan by increasing the loan forgiveness accrual by $1.3 million and by recording $1.1 million of interest income during the
year ended December 31, 2009. During each of the fiscal years 2008 and 2007, ACI accrued approximately $1.6 million
for this loan forgiveness. This expense has been classified as a component of general and administrative expense.
Approximately $5.8 million is reflected as a component of other non-current liabilities in the consolidated balances sheet as
of December 31, 2009.
On January 12, 2010, in connection with a 2009 loan forgiveness arrangement referred to above, a portion of the
outstanding loan between the Company and certain members of Advanced Circuits management was repaid with Class A
common stock of Advanced Circuits valued at $47.50 per share ($4.75 million). These same members of Advanced
Circuits management were granted 0.1 million stock options in Advanced Circuits common stock. These options were
fully vested on grant date and as a result Advanced Circuits recorded a $3.8 million non-cash expense during the year
ended December 31, 2010 to selling, general and administrative expense in the consolidated statement of operations.
On December 9, 2010, the Company entered into an amendment to the intercompany loan agreement (the “Amendment”)
with Advanced Circuits (the “Loan Agreement”). The Loan Agreement was amended to (i) provide for additional term loan
borrowings of $40.0 million and a special short term facility of $8.7 million and to permit the proceeds thereof to fund cash
distributions totaling $48.7 million by ACI to Compass AC Holdings, Inc. (“ACH”), ACI’s sole shareholder, and by ACH
to its shareholders, including the Company, (ii) extend the maturity dates of the term loans under the Loan Agreement, and
(iii) modify borrowing rates under the Loan Agreement. The Company’s share of the cash distribution was approximately
$38.0 million with approximately $14.6 million being distributed to ACH’s non-controlling shareholders. All other
material terms and conditions of the Loan Agreement were unchanged. Stock options totaling 96,982 were issued on
January 12, 2010 and were exercised at the time of this distribution.
Refer to Note L for the impact on noncontrolling interest with respect to this transaction.
American Furniture
AFM’s largest supplier, Independent Furniture Supply (“Independent”), is 50% owned by Mike Thomas, AFM's CEO.
AFM purchases polyfoam from Independent and AFM performs regular audits to verify market pricing. AFM does not
have any long-term supply contracts with Independent. Total purchases from Independent during 2010 and 2009 totaled
approximately $17.6 million and $19.4 million, respectively. The Company had unpaid balances due to Independent of
$1.3 million and $2.2 million as of December 31, 2010 and December 31, 2009, respectively.
On December 30, 2010, the Company entered into an amendment to the intercompany loan agreement with American
Furniture wherein the Company contributed $50.6 million in additional equity contributions in exchange for the following:
•
•
•
$1.0 million in unpaid Management fees
$35.5 million in outstanding term loans
$14.1 million in outstanding revolving loans
Refer to Note L for the impact on noncontrolling interest with respect to this transaction.
Fox
The Company leases its principal manufacturing and office facilities in Watsonville, California from Robert Fox, a
founder, Chief Engineering Officer and noncontrolling shareholder of Fox. The term of the lease is through July of 2018
and the rental payments can be adjusted annually for a cost-of-living increase based upon the consumer price index. Fox is
responsible for all real estate taxes, insurance and maintenance related to this property. The leased facilities are 86,000
F-36
square feet and Fox paid rent under this lease of approximately $1.1 million and $1.1 million for the years ended December
31, 2010 and 2009, respectively.
Tridien
On July 31, 2006, the Company acquired from CGI and its wholly-owned, indirect subsidiary, Compass Medical Mattress
Partners, LP (the “Seller”) approximately 47.3% of the outstanding capital stock, on a fully-diluted basis, of Tridien,
representing approximately 69.8% of the voting power of all Tridien stock. On the same date, the Company entered into a
Note Purchase and Sale Agreement with CGI and the Seller for the purchase from the Seller of a Promissory Note (“Note”)
issued by a borrower controlled by Tridien’s chief executive officer. The Note was secured by shares of Tridien stock and
guaranteed by Tridien’s chief executive officer. The Note accrued interest at the rate of 13% per annum and was added to
the Note’s principal balance. The Note was to mature on August 15, 2008. The Company recorded interest income
totaling $0.5 million in 2008 related to this note.
On August 8, 2008 the Company exchanged the aforementioned Note, due August 15, 2008, totaling approximately $6.9
million (including accrued interest) due from the CEO of Tridien in exchange for shares of stock of Tridien held by the
CEO. In addition, the CEO of Tridien was granted an option to purchase approximately 10% of the outstanding shares of
Tridien, at a strike price exceeding the exchange price, from the Company in the future for which the CEO exchanged
Tridien stock valued at $0.2 million (the fair value of the option at the date of grant) as consideration.
On August 5, 2008, the Company exchanged $1.5 million in term debt due from Tridien for 15,500 shares of common
stock and 13,950 shares of convertible preferred stock of Tridien.
Refer to Note L for the impact on noncontrolling interest with respect to these transactions.
The Company leases two facilities from noncontrolling shareholders of Tridien. The term of the leases are through
September of 2013 and February of 2014. Tridien paid rent under these leases of approximately $0.9 million for each of
the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008.
F-37
SCHEDULE II –Valuation and Qualifying Accounts
(in thousands)
Balance at
beginning of
year
Additions
Charge to costs
and expense
Other
Deductions
Balance at end
of Year
Allowance for doubtful accounts - 2008
Allowance for doubtful accounts - 2009
Allowance for doubtful accounts - 2010
$ 3,204
$ 4,824
$ 5,409
$ 3,917 $ 1,778
$ 5,999 $ -
$ 3,645 $ 400
(1) $ 4,075 (2) $ 4,824
$ 5,414 (2) $ 5,409
$ 5,481
(1) $ 3,973
Valuation allowance for deferred tax assets - 2008 $ 359
Valuation allowance for deferred tax assets - 2009 $ -
Valuation allowance for deferred tax assets - 2010 $ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
$ 359 (3) $ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
$ -
(1) Represents opening allowance balances related to current year acquisitions.
(2) Represent write-offs and rebate payments.
(3) Represents utilization of deferred tax asset and corresponding removal of valuation allowance.
S-1
Exhibit
Number
INDEX TO EXHIBITS
Description
2.1
2.2
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
4.1
4.2
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
Stock and Note Purchase Agreement dated as of July 31, 2006, among Compass Group Diversified Holdings
LLC, Compass Group Investments, Inc. and Compass Medical Mattress Partners, LP (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 2.1 of the 8-K filed on August 1, 2006)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated June 24, 2008, among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC and the
other shareholders party thereto, Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as Sellers’ Representative,
Aeroglide Holdings, Inc. and Bühler AG (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 2.1 of the 8-K filed on June 26,
2008)
Certificate of Trust of Compass Diversified Trust (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 of the S-1 filed on
December 14, 2005)
Certificate of Amendment to Certificate of Trust of Compass Diversified Trust (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 3.1 of the 8-K filed on September 13, 2007)
Certificate of Formation of Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
3.3 of the S-1 filed on December 14, 2005)
Amended and Restated Trust Agreement of Compass Diversified Trust (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
3.5 of the Amendment No. 4 to S-1 filed on April 26, 2006)
Amendment No. 1 to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement, dated as of April 25, 2006, of Compass
Diversified Trust among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as Sponsor, The Bank of New York
(Delaware), as Delaware Trustee, and the Regular Trustees named therein (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 4.1 of the 8-K filed on May 29, 2007)
Second Amendment to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement, dated as of April 25, 2006, as amended on
May 23, 2007, of Compass Diversified Trust among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as Sponsor,
The Bank of New York (Delaware), as Delaware Trustee, and the Regular Trustees named therein
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.2 of the 8-K filed on September 13, 2007)
Third Amendment to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement dated as of April 25, 2006, as amended on
May 25, 2007 and September 14, 2007, of Compass Diversified Holdings among Compass Group Diversified
Holdings LLC, as Sponsor, The Bank of New York (Delaware), as Delaware Trustee, and the Regular Trustees
named therein (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.1 of the 8-K filed on December 21, 2007)
Fourth Amendment dated as of November 1, 2010 to the Amended and Restated Trust Agreement, as amended
effective November 1, 2010, of Compass Diversified Holdings, originally effective as of April 25, 2006, by
and among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, as Sponsor, The Bank of New York (Delaware), as
Delaware Trustee, and the Regular Trustees named therein (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 of the
Form 10-Q filed on November 8, 2010)
Second Amended and Restated Operating Agreement of Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC dated
January 9, 2007 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 of the 8-K filed on January 10, 2007)
Third Amended and Restated Operating Agreement of Compass Group Diversified Holdings, LLC dated
November 1, 2010 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.2 of the Form 10-Q filed on November 8, 2010)
Specimen Certificate evidencing a share of trust of Compass Diversified Holdings (incorporated by reference
to Exhibit 4.1 of the S-3 filed on November 7, 2007)
Specimen Certificate evidencing an interest of Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 10.2 of the 8-K filed on January 10, 2007)
Form of Registration Rights Agreement (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3 of the Amendment No. 5 to
S-1 filed on May 5, 2006)
Form of Supplemental Put Agreement by and between Compass Group Management LLC and Compass Group
Diversified Holdings LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.4 of the Amendment No. 4 to S-1 filed on
April 26, 2006)
Amended and Restated Employment Agreement dated as of December 1, 2008 by and between James J.
Bottiglieri and Compass Group Management LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the 8-K filed
on December 3, 2008)
Form of Share Purchase Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass
Diversified Trust and CGI Diversified Holdings, LP (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.6 of the
Amendment No. 5 to S-1 filed on May 5, 2006)
Form of Share Purchase Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass
Diversified Trust and Pharos I LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.7 of the Amendment No. 5 to S-1
filed on May 5, 2006)
Credit Agreement among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, the financial institutions party thereto
and Madison Capital Funding LLC, dated as of November 21, 2006 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1
10.7
10.8
10.9
10.10
10.11
10.12
10.13
21.1*
23.1*
31.1*
31.2*
32.1*
32.2*
99.1
99.2
99.3
99.4
99.5
99.6
99.7
of the 8-K filed on November 22, 2006)
First Amendment to Credit Agreement, entered into as of December 19, 2006, among Compass Group
Diversified Holdings LLC, the financial institutions party thereto and Madison Capital Funding LLC
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.7 of the 10-K filed on March 14, 2008)
Increase Notice, Consent and Second Amendment to Credit Agreement, effective as of May 23, 2007, by and
among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, the financial institutions party thereto and Madison Capital
Funding LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the 8-K filed on May 29, 2007)
Third Amendment to Credit Agreement as of December 7, 2007, among Madison Capital Funding LLC, as
Agent for the Lenders, the Existing Lenders and New Lenders and Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the 8-K filed on December 11, 2007)
Increase Notice and Fourth Amendment to Credit Agreement, entered into as of January 30, 2008, among
Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, the financial institutions party thereto and Madison Capital
Funding LLC (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.7 of the 10-K on March 14, 2008)
Amended and Restated Management Services Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified
Holdings LLC, and Compass Group Management LLC, dated as of December 15, 2009 and originally effective
as of May 16, 2006
Registration Rights Agreement by and among Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass
Diversified Trust and CGI Diversified Holdings, LP, dated as of April 3, 2007 (incorporated by reference to
Exhibit 10.3 of the Amendment No. 1 to the S-1 filed on April 20, 2007)
Form of Share Purchase Agreement by and between Compass Group Diversified Holdings LLC, Compass
Diversified Trust and CGI Diversified Holdings, LP (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.16 of the
Amendment No. 1 to the S-1 filed on April 20, 2007)
List of Subsidiaries
Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a) Certification of Chief Executive Officer of Registrant
Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a) Certification of Chief Financial Officer of Registrant
Section 1350 Certification of Chief Executive Officer of Registrant
Section 1350 Certification of Chief Financial Officer of Registrant
Note Purchase and Sale Agreement dated as of July 31, 2006 among Compass Group Diversified Holdings
LLC, Compass Group Investments, Inc. and Compass Medical Mattress Partners, LP (incorporated by
reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on August 1, 2006)
Stock Purchase Agreement, dated as of February 28, 2007, by and between HA-LO Holdings, LLC and HALO
Holding Corporation (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.3 of the 8-K filed on March 1, 2007)
Purchase Agreement dated December 19, 2007, among CBS Personnel Holdings, Inc. and Staffing Holding
LLC, Staffmark Merger LLC, Staffmark Investment LLC, SF Holding Corp., and Stephens-SM LLC
(incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on December 20, 2007)
Share Purchase Agreement dated January 4, 2008, among Fox Factory Holding Corp., Fox Factory, Inc. and
Robert C. Fox, Jr. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on January 8, 2008)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated May 8, 2008, among Mitsui Chemicals, Inc., Silvue Technologies Group,
Inc., the stockholders of the Company and the holders of Options listed on the signature pages thereto, and
Compass Group Management LLC, as the Stockholders Representative (incorporated by reference to Exhibit
99.1 of the 8-K filed on May 9, 2008)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated March 31, 2010 by and among Gable 5, Inc., Liberty Safe and Security
Products, LLC and Liberty Safe Holding Corporation (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K
filed on April 1, 2010)
Stock Purchase Agreement dated September 16, 2010, by and among ERGO Baby Intermediate Holding
Corporation, The ERGO Baby Carrier, Inc., Karin A. Frost, in her individual capacity and as Trustee of the
Revocable Trust of Karin A. Frost dated February 22, 2008 and as Trustee of the Karin A. Frost 2009
Qualified Annuity Trust u/a/d 12/21/2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.1 of the 8-K filed on
September 17, 2010)
*
Filed herewith.
n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n
I
I
D
O
C
Compass Diversified Holdings (“CODI”) offers our shareholders an opportunity to own profitable
middle market businesses that hold highly defensible positions in their individual market niches.
We own controlling interests in our subsidiary businesses, which maximizes our ability to impact
their performance. Our model for creating shareholder value involves discipline in identifying and
valuing businesses and proactive engagement with the management teams of the companies we
acquire. From time to time, we will monetize our interest in those subsidiaries if we believe that doing
so will maximize value to our owners.
We deliver an extraordinarily high level of transparency in our financial reporting and governance
processes. We believe our owners deserve and should demand nothing less.
As of December 31, 2010, CODI owned and managed eight diverse subsidiaries; we believe that
these businesses will continue to produce stable and growing cash flows over the long term, enabling
us both to invest in the long-term growth of the company and to make distributions of cash to our
shareholders.
C o n t e n t s
Letter to Our Owners
Highlights
Our Companies
CODI Governance
Owner Information
Financial Review
1
4
5
10
12
13
Company Headquarters
61 Wilton Road, Second Floor
Westport, CT 06880, (203) 221-1703
Independent Auditors
Grant Thornton LLP
New York, NY
Common Stock Listing
NYSE, Ticker: CODI
Transfer Agent
BNY Mellon Shareholder Services
111 Founders Plaza, Suite 1100
East Hartford, CT 06108
Investor Relations Contact
Leon Berman, The IGB Group
(212) 477-8438, lberman@igbir.com
Annual Meeting of Shareholders
May 19, 2011, 9:00 a.m., EST
Hilton Rye Town, 699 Westchester Avenue
Rye Brook, NY 10573
Website
www.compassdiversifiedholdings.com